Home

BreezeACCESS II System Manual v4.0

1. rien Book 4 2 16 DHCP Broadcast Override Filter Parameter Book 4 2 47 PHCP C hent Paramotor ooo veuve vot texto ANE Book 4 2 22 DHCP Options Pa3tatmeltet nouis iet andate ua oleo Rin Mee Book 4 2 22 Dal Lone Se iaia Book 4 2 66 Dialing Parameters Menuires Book 4 2 59 Dialine Free Option Parameter asociale Book 4 2 61 true Preta Parametros Book 4 2 61 Disconnect Timeout Parameter iii eee Book 4 2 67 Display Association Info Parameter in Book 4 2 18 Display Bridging amp Association Info Book 4 2 17 Display Bridging amp Association Info Parameter Book 4 2 17 Display CIR MIR Info Parameter Book 4 2 19 Display Counters Parametri ace Book 4 2 15 Display Event bog E E Book 4 2 9 DIME Relay Parametros Book 4 2 62 Duplicate frames discarded Parameter Book 4 2 15 Diorama Book 4 2 67 Porto e AE Book 4 2 66 Dwell Time Parameter aerea Book 4 2 52 Book 4 2 72 E Echo Cancellation Parameter eese Book 4 2 57 Endpomt Type Parameter 22 oe iem elica Book 4 2 63 Erase Event Log Parameter tire Book 4 2 9 Error One Parameter ibis eee n en tte n ated ee Book 4 2 66 ESSID Par aie ven brulla Book 4 2 24 ESTO TEE Book 4 2 24 Etheraet Broadcast Pitter oer i ott ste or ee Book 4 2 47 Ethernet COMES spalla a
2. ecce eere Book 4 2 3 Unit MAC Address Parameter 1 eeeeee cessere Book 4 2 3 UnitStatos GU Parameteti aes alleata Book 4 2 4 Unit Status SU Parameter ae Book 4 2 4 Unt Types Parametros ad Book 4 2 3 Units Base Station Equipment ad Book 1 2 7 elen e SE Book 1 2 2 User Filtering Option Parameter 1 1 iii Book 4 2 52 User Filtermo Parameters platea ina Book 4 2 52 V A bla Book 4 2 37 VEAN ForWwardine Parameter sradicato Book 4 2 42 VLAN Forwarding Support Parameter Book 4 2 43 VLAN ID Data Parameter ario Book 4 2 37 VLAN ID Management Parameter nn Book 4 2 38 VLAN ID Voice amp Management Parameter Book 4 2 39 VEAN oink Type Parametros ie ii Book 4 2 40 NIGAN Parameleis midi Book 4 2 37 VLAN Priority Data Parameter rasa e aaa Book 4 2 45 VLAN Priority Management Parameter Book 4 2 45 VLAN Priority Voice Parameter Book 4 2 45 VLAN Priority Threshold Parameter Book 4 2 45 VLAN TEE Book 4 2 43 VLAN Relaying Support Parameter Book 4 2 43 VNIEAN SUpport Parametro Book 4 2 37 VLAN Traffic Priority Parameter sini Book 4 2 44 Voice Activity Detection Parameter oooonncnnnnncnnnononocnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnos Book 4 2 58 Voice Bytes Received Parameter Book 4 2 1
3. 4 0 40 Release Date Thu Dec 20 20 21 36 2001 Main Menu 1 Info Screens 2 Unit Control 3 Basic Configuration 4 Site Survey 5 Advanced Configuration X EXIT gt gt gt Figure 1 1 Main Menu Administrator Access Rights SU and AU The appearance of the Main Menu varies in accordance with the set access level lt P For users with Read Only access rights only the Info Screens option is displayed Users with this access level cannot access the Unit Control Basic Configuration Site Survey and Advanced Configuration menus lt P For users with Installer access rights the first four menu items Info Screens Unit Control Basic Configuration and Site Survey are displayed Users with this access level cannot access the Advanced Configuration menu lt P For users with Administrator access rights the full Main Menu will be displayed These users can access all the menu items NOTE The Main Menu of the GU BS GPS and Alarms module does not include the Basic Configuration option BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Manual ES BreezeACCESS 4 0 Operations and Administration Operating the Monitor Program l Type an option number to open activate the option You may need to press Enter in some cases 2 Press Esc to exit a menu or option UJ You can log out and exit the monitor program from the Main Menu by selecting X exit To get to the Main Menu from anywhere in the program press the
4. retransmissions If the ACSE Option is enabled then in addition to the total count there are also separate counters for total number of Data frames and Voice RTP frames This is true also for Subscriber Units that do not support voice in cells where the ACSE Option in the AU is enabled In this case the Voice count should be O lt P Total Tx errors Displays the number of transmit errors that have occurred The total number of Tx errors includes transmissions that were not acknowledged properly transmissions that were aborted and transmissions that were delayed for various reasons e g not enough time until the end of the current dwell period In addition the following special counters are displayed to indicate the reason for the error H W An internal hardware problem in the modem ABR The transmission was aborted before completion because of internal problems in the DSP eje CSL The transmission was cancelled because the modem was busy in receiving data vie ACKTOUT Acknowledge Timeout The frame was not acknowledged within the time defined by the Acknowledge Delay Limit parameter e FAIL There was an internal timeout in the modem i ACKCRC There was a CRC error in the ACK message sie RTSC The RTS was sent but no CTS was received RTS collision sis EOD End of Dwell There was not enough time left to transmit the message lt gt Total received frames from wireless Displays the
5. Removes a VLAN ID from the VLAN ID Forwarding List Valid values are VID values from 1 to 4094 that are included in the VLAN Forwarding List Show VLAN ID Forwarding List Displays the values of the VLAN IDs that are included in the VLAN Forwarding List NOTE If the VLAN ID Forwarding List is empty and the VLAN Forwarding Support is enabled then all data frames will be discarded i NZ din S dis VLAN Relaying AU only Applicable for Trunk link only Defines the VLAN ID values that will be included in the VLAN Relaying List If the Link Type is defined as Trunk Link and the VLAN Relaying option is enabled a received wireless link relayed frame a frame received from the wireless link that should be transmitted back through the wireless link with a VLAN ID that is not a member of the unit s VLAN Relaying List will be discarded If VLAN Forwarding Support is also enabled it is necessary to configure all the VLAN IDs in the Relaying List also in the Forwarding List to enable the relaying operation The VLAN Relaying menu provides the following options VLAN Relaying Support Enables or disables the VLAN Relaying feature Available selections are Disable and Enable The default selection is Disable Add Relaying VLAN ID Adds a VLAN ID to the VLAN Relaying List One VLAN ID can be entered each time BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Manual E BreezeACCESS 4 0 Operations and Administration ale dis
6. Set Partial Factory Defaults Resets all parameters to the values of the Factory Defaults configuration except for parameters that are necessary to maintain connectivity and to enable management These are the parameters included in the Basic Configuration menu except to the Maximum Data Rate parameter In addition Passwords and VLAN parameters are not changed Ne din Set Complete Operator Defaults Available only with Administrator access rights Set the unit to its Operator Defaults configuration After the next Reset Unit command see above all parameters will revert to their Operator Defaults values except for the Passwords Operator Defaults configuration can be defined by the Administrator see Save Current Configuration As Operator Defaults below It may also be defined at the factory according to customer s definition The default Operators Defaults configuration is the Factory Defaults configuration The complete Operator Defaults Configuration file can be downloaded uploaded using TFTP with the SNMP Write Manual Revision 1 01 M enus and Parameters EZ community string The procedure is the same as for downloading uploading configuration files except that the extension used for the file name is cmr Examples using the default SNMP Write community string To upload the configuration file using DOS based TFTP Client to an SU whose IP address is 206 25 63 65 tftp 206 25 63 65 put Suconf private cmr
7. Up to 10 characters 0 means no number DisplayString SIZE 0 25 Up to 24 characters XzNoID Integer disable 0 enable 1 a 255 DisplayString SIZE 0 15 Up to three telephone pad digits 0 9 A D X means no IP Dialing Indicator DisplayString SIZE 0 15 Up to eight telephone pad digits 0 9 A D X means no Automatic Prefix BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Manual EZ BreezeACCESS 4 0 System M anual FastStart 710 3 4 1 13 DialingParams 13 InformTransferCap 710 3 4 1 14 DialingParams 14 DTMFRelay 710 3 4 1 15 DialingParams 15 DialingPrfxOption 710 3 4 1 16 DialingParams 16 InterRegionalPrfx 710 3 4 1 17 DialingParams 17 InterNationalPrfx 710 3 4 1 18 DialingParams 18 Registration TTL 710 3 4 1 19 DialingParams 19 Endpoint Type 710 3 4 1 20 DialingParams 20 FaxRelay 710 3 4 1 21 DialingParams 21 FaxRelayRedundancy 710 3 4 1 22 DialingParams 22 BatteryPolarity 710 3 4 1 23 DialingParams 23 Manual Revision 1 01 Enables disables the fast connect protocol Defines the value of the information transfer capability in the SETUP message Disable enable DTMF Relay 0 fi Disable DTMF is transferred in band 1 fi Enable In band DTMF is filtered DTMF is relayed via H 245 session In case of Fast Start H 245 session will be forced upon DTMF detection 2 Enable Proprietary In band DTMF is filtered
8. eere eene 2 4 EM BreezeACCESS 4 0 Installation Location ofthe Unt ra 2 4 Location of the Antenna s siii 2 4 Antenna Diversity coin aaa 2 4 Antenna Polarization sassolini 2 5 Antenna eal siae 2 5 Lightning Proteccion sonrisa orarie 2 5 Installing SU R Indoor Units 2 6 wall Mounting the Unit eei oo ilaele 2 6 Connecting the Omni Antennas 2 6 Connecting a Detached Antenna 2 6 Connecting the Unit to the Power Supply and to the CPE 2 6 Indoor SUS anar AU el DIES rele 3 1 Packin MB Cmm t a A aaa 3 2 REN DR leie ln EE 3 2 AUI D ACCESS Unit sorrento 3 2 Other Items Required for Installation 3 2 Installation Guidelines 3 4 Locatiomo ihe WINN meme T i 3 4 Location of the Antenna s cccccocnccoccccconncconcnononnnconnnonanoss 3 4 Antenna Diversity sn n a a 3 4 Antenna FP OlANI ZATION nic n iano 3 5 Antenna Seal rissa 3 5 Ligrtning PEOIeCUOFE asili 3 5 Installing SU I I D and AU I I D Units 3 7 Connectors and LEDS ini 3 7 Wall Mounting the Unit ececcessseeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeenaees 3 9 Connecting Antenna s to the Units 3 10 Connecting the Unit to the Power SUDDly and to the CPE uit 3 11 i Chapter 1 alvarion O IF Based Equipment About This C
9. lt gt A TEL connector Subscriber Units with voice support only for connecting a regular telephone DC IN 5V Figure 3 2 SU I AU I Side View lt P ADC IN 5V connector for the power transformer lt A MON connector for connecting an ASCII terminal with terminal emulation software for configuration and maintenance purposes lt gt Two ANT connectors for external antennas SU I D AU I D units only BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Manual ES BreezeACCESS 4 0 Installation SIGNAL QUALITY power O Qu E wink O Om zm ud ETHERNET OO OL Figure 3 3 SU I Front Panel Table 3 2 SU I I D LEDs Name Description Functionality POWER Power supply On After successful power up Off Power off WIRELESS Wireless Link Blinking Receiving packets from the wireless LINK Activity link Off no reception of packets from the wireless link ETHERNET Ethernet activity Blinking Reception of data from Ethernet LAN Off No reception of data from Ethernet LAN SIGNAL Quality of Very low quality reception or not QUALITY received RF synchronized with Access Unit signal Low quality reception usually enabling 1Mbps traffic 00 000 Medium quality reception usually enabling 2 Mbps traffic O e e High quality reception usually enabling 3 Mbps traffic Manual Revision 1 01 Indoor SU I and AU I Units EI LOAD Power O OH Fun mm wink O O nm zm ud i ETHERNET OO OL I Figure 3 4
10. 255 Integer no 0 yes 1 na 255 Integer no 0 yes 1 na 255 BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Manual EJ BreezeACCESS 4 0 System M anual ARPBroadcastOverrideFilter Applicable to SU only Enables or disables the Integer 710 3 3 5 7 3 broadcasting of ARP messages overriding no 0 EthBroadcastingParameters 3 the general EthBroadcastFiltering Ethernet yes 1 broadcast filtering option na 255 ToSPriority Parameters 710 3 3 5 8 BridgeParameters 8 VoicePacketsToS Applicable to SU with voice only Integer 710 3 3 5 8 1 The Type of Service value to be inserted in the 0 255 ToSPriorityParameters 1 IP header of voice RTP packets ToSPrecedenceThreshold Applicable to SU and AU only Priority Integer 710 3 3 5 8 2 threshold based on the ToS for frames 0 7 ToSPriorityParameters 2 received from Ethernet port Manual Revision 1 01 Appendix B E Air Interface Parameters MIB Parameter Location in Parenthesis AirInterface 710 3 3 6 brzAccessMib 6 ESSID 710 3 3 6 1 Airlnterface 1 AckDelayLimit 710 3 3 6 2 Airlnterface 2 FregOffset 710 3 3 6 3 Airlnterface 3 TransmitDiversity 710 3 3 6 4 Airlnterface 4 HoppingSequence 710 3 3 6 5 Airlnterface 5 HoppingSet 710 3 3 6 6 Airlnterface 6 Description Applicable to SU and AU The Extended Service Set ID ESSID used to prevent the merging of collocated systems Accessible only with SNMP
11. After successful power up indicating that 12 VDC is supplied to the outdoor unit Off Power off or failure to supply 12 VDC to the outdoor unit Wireless Link Activity Blinking Receiving packets from the wireless media Off No reception of packets from the wireless media The SU NI AU NI provides the following interfaces lt gt An Ethernet connector marked ETH for connecting the unit to the network See Table 1 1 page 1 4 for information on the required type of Ethernet cable An IF connector for connecting the unit to an outdoor unit A DC 12V connector for the power supply A MON connector for connecting an ASCII terminal with terminal emulation software for configuration and maintenance purposes gt 9954 A TEL connector Sunscriber Units with voice support only for connecting a regular telephone Installing the SU NI AU NI Unit 1 Place the unit in an appropriate location on a shelf or a table The unit can be wall mounted using the installation materials provided with the unit Use a 6 mm 1 4 drill and the supplied template plate for easy and accurate marking of the holes 2 Connect the power supply DC power cord to the DC In jack marked DC 12V located on the rear panel of the unit Shown in Figure 1 7 page 1 13 3 Connect the IF cable to the IF connector marked IF The other side of the IF cable should already be connected to the outdoor unit 4 Connect the mains power cord to the p
12. BreezeACCESS units at once EB BreezeACCESS 4 0 Operations and Administration The Configuration Download Upload feature in BreezeACCESS units simplifies the task of remotely configuring a large number of units using TFTP protocol By downloading the configuration file to a PC it is possible to view all the parameters configured at the unit as it is a plain text ASCII file It is necessary to edit the file by a using simple editor and to remove certain parameters or change their values prior to uploading the configuration to another unit When multiple configuration is performed uploading the file to several units it is recommended that only the relevant parameters be included in the file Each parameter is represented in the file by three fields lt gt A symbolic string similar to the name of the parameter in the 66 99 monitor program followed by lt gt The value of the parameters using the same values that are used in the monitor program 6 99 lt gt A comment optional If used it should start with a character The unit will ignore an unknown parameter or a known parameter with an out of range value Use the SNMP write community string the default is private to define both the uploaded file put and the downloaded file get SnmpWriteCommunity cfg The file should be transferred in ASCII mode Example To upload the configuration file using DOS based TFTP Client to an SU
13. Connection to a PC hub SU I I D Subscriber Unit that supports a single Straight NA Ethernet devices SU 1D SU 1D1V SU I I D Subscriber Unit that supports Crossed Straight multiple Ethernet devices SU 8D SU 8D1V SU BD SU BD1V BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Manual EN BreezeACCESS 4 0 Installation Installation Guidelines This section describes the installation guidelines and the various considerations that must be taken into account when planning the installation Location of the Unit lt P The unit can be placed on a desktop or a shelf or can be attached to a wall lt P The unit should be installed as near as possible to the antenna models with detached antenna The RF cable connecting the unit to the antenna should be as short as possible to guarantee minimum power loss lt gt Keep the units well away from sources of heat such as radiators air conditioners etc Location of the Antenna s lt gt Any physical object in the path between two units can cause signal attenuation Common obstructions are buildings and trees If a units antenna is installed indoors the walls and or windows between the two sites are physical obstructions Any buildings or other physical structure such as trees mountains or other natural geographic features higher than the antenna and situated in the path between the two sites can constitute obstructions lt P Install indoor antennas as close as possible to a window or wall if
14. Grounding cable with an appropriate termination lt gt lt P Antenna and RF cable according to specific installation conditions for units with external separate antennas 4 Ethernet cable to connect the equipment to the Ethernet outlet see Table 1 1 page 1 4 lt P Telephone cord for connecting a Subscriber Unit with voice support to a telephone set RJ 11 connector at the Subscriber Unit side lt gt lt gt GPS cable 30 60 or 120 meter supplied separately according to order SYNC cable for daisy chaining GPS modules if necessary BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Manual ER BreezeACCESS 4 0 Installation lt P Alarms In and Alarms Out cables for the GPS module if necessary lt gt Installation tools and materials For local configuration of parameters lt gt A portable PC with Terminal Emulation software and Monitor cable Monitor cable is supplied with Access Units Or lt gt A portable PC equipped with an Ethernet card and with Telnet software and an Ethernet cable see Table 1 1 page 1 4 Items marked with an asterisk are available as options from Alvarion 3 NOTE E The BS GU does not have an external Monitor port and it should be configured via the Ethernet port using Telnet Table 1 1 Required type of Ethernet cable Unit Type Connection to a Connection to a PC hub Subscriber Unit that supports a single Straight NA Ethernet device SU 1D SU 1D1V Subscriber Unit that supp
15. ale dis The maximum number of VLAN IDs in the VLAN Relaying List is 20 Valid values are 1 to 4094 Remove Relaying VLAN ID Removes a VLAN ID from the VLAN ID Relaying List Valid values are VID values from 1 to 4094 that are included in the VLAN Relaying List Show VLAN ID Relaying List Displays the values of the VLAN IDs that are included in the VLAN Relaying List P we If the VLAN ID Relaying List is empty and the VLAN Relaying Support is enabled then all wireless link relayed data frames will be discarded If the VLAN ID Relaying List and Forwarding List Support are both enabled all the VLAN IDs configured in the Relaying List must also be configured in the Forwarding List VLAN Traffic Priority AU and SU Each packet to be Manual Revision 1 01 transmitted to the wireless link is transferred to one of three queues Low Mid and High Packets in the High queue have the highest priority for transmission and those in the Low queue have the lowest priority BreezeACCESS Subscriber and Access Units support Layer 2 traffic prioritization based on the IEEE 802 1p standard The priority field in the 802 1Q header tag can have a value in the range O 7 This value determines the relative priority of the packet Tagged frames that are received from the Ethernet port and have a Priority higher than the value of the VLAN Priority Threshold will be routed to the Mid queue As the system also supports
16. na 255 Integer disable 0 enable 1 DisplayString SIZE 14 Up to 14 printable ASCII characters case sensitive IP address Appendix B E NwMngTrapTableldx 710 3 3 4 7 1 3 mngTrapEntry 3 DeleteOneTrapAddr 710 3 3 4 8 NwMngParameters 8 DeleteAllTrapAddrs 710 3 3 4 7 9 NwMngParameters 9 Applicable to AU SU and GU Read only Tables Index for an entry in the Management Trap Table Applicable to AU SU and GU Deletes a single selected entry from the Management Trap Table Applicable to AU SU and GU Deletes all entries from the Management Trap Table Integer 1 3 Integer off 0 firstEntry 1 secondEntry 2 thirdEntry 3 na 255 Integer O off 1 on 2 0ff 255 na BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Manual BreezeACCESS 4 0 System M anual Bridge Parameters MIB Parameter Description Values Range Location in Parenthesis BridgeParameters Bridge parameters 710 3 3 5 brzAccessMib 5 EthBroadcastFiltering Applicable to SU only Integer 710 3 3 5 1 Enables disables the filtering of Ethernet disable 0 BridgeParameters 1 layer2 broadcasts ethOnly 1 disable No filtering wlanOnly 2 ethOnly Filter broadcasts received on the bothWlanAndEth 3 Ethernet port only na 255 wlanOnly Filter broadcasts received on the Wlan port only bothWlanAndEth Filter broadcasts received on both ports VLANSupport Applicable to AU SU and GU VLAN Support 710 3 3
17. the unit should be reset so that all new settings are applied 1 From the Main Menu select Unit Control The Unit Control menu opens 2 From the Unit Control menu select Reset Unit The Reset Unit configuration screen opens Type 1 to reset the unit so that new configuration settings are applied BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Manual E BreezeACCESS 4 0 Commissioning Manual Revision 1 01 Chapter 2 A alvarion N Optimizing the Wireless Link About This Chapter This chapter explains how to optimize the performance of the wireless link of BreezeACCESS Subscriber Units and includes the following sections lt gt RSSI Measurement and Maximum Data Rate Configuration Subscriber Units page 2 2 explains how to read the RSSI measurement and to configure the optimum value for the Maximum Data Rate parameter lt gt Aligning the Antenna of the SU A E Subscriber Unit page 2 3 give tips and instructions for aligning the antenna of the SU A E for optimum performance lt gt Positioning the SU I or SU R Subscriber Unit with Omni Antennas for Optimal Operation page 2 4 gives tips and instructions for setting up units for optimum signal strength lt gt Aligning the External Antenna of SU R and SU I D Units page 2 5 gives tips and instructions for setting up the external antennas of units for optimal signal strength EN BreezeACCESS 4 0 Commissioning RSSI Measurement and Maximum Data Rate Configuration Subscrib
18. the Access Unit The WEP Key is a string of 10 hexadecimal numbers The default for all 4 keys is a string of 10 zeros no key o Lm Na It is recommended to change the WEP Keys periodically to enhance system security Voice Parameters Subscriber Units with Voice Support Only The parameters in the Voice Parameters menu include the following options lt gt Volume Sets the gain of the voice signal to the earphone Available range is 0 dB to 20 dB in 1 dB steps The default value is 3 dB lt gt Echo Cancellation Enables or disables the built in echo cancellation feature The default value is Enable lt Voice Codec Specifys the relative priority of the codecs The units support the following codecs G723 1 6 4 Kbps rate 1 10 compression ratio G729 8 Kbps rate 1 8 compression ratio G711 Ulaw 64 Kbps no compression US standard G711 Alaw 64 Kbps no compression European Standard G729AnnexA G729 with reduced complexity G729wAnnexB G729 with silence compression ll EE EE G729Annex AwAnnexB G729 with reduced complexity and silence compression BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Manual ES BreezeACCESS 4 0 O perations and Administration You can enter a list of one to seven codecs specifying the relative priorities to be offered during capabilities exchange according to the H 323 standard For example enter 1 to always use the G 723 1 codec Enter 2 1 3 4 to set the prio
19. 2 72 Systems pecto a dm ED Ido esa equ ce ard ste dde Book 1 3 2 T Telephone Number Parametri an Book 4 2 59 Telephony Country Standard Parameter Book 4 2 65 Telephony Ee Men 5 eerte ada Book 4 2 65 Test PIO cigs eee eee MU D Ru MMC A LEE Book 4 2 16 Timeouts Parameter nina Book 4 2 67 ToS Precedence Threshold Parameter Book 4 2 46 ToS Prony Parameter asasan a ie Book 4 2 46 TOS Priority Parameters iii ii Book 4 2 46 Total received data frames Parameter ieri Book 4 2 14 Total received frames from wireless Parameter Book 4 2 14 Total received frames via Ethernet Parameter Book 4 2 12 Total retransmitted frames Parameter irene Book 4 2 14 Total submitted frames bridge Parameter Book 4 2 13 Total transmitted frames to wireless Parameter sees Book 4 2 13 Total Tx rrors Parametros Book 4 2 14 Keng seet E TEE Book 4 2 12 Transmit Antenna Parameter iii rici rie nie nie ee Book 4 2 33 Transmit Power Control Parameter rire Book 4 2 27 Transmitted wireless to Ethernet Parameter Book 4 2 12 Trunk Link Paradeleb nad css Book 4 2 41 U Unicast Relayine Paradas tas Book 4 2 49 Ut Control Mendes iii IL ea zi Book 4 2 6 Unit Hardware Version Parameter
20. 3 Mbps 2 Mbps 1 Mbps Rate SU A E RSSI gt 70dBm 78dBm lt RSSI lt 70dBm RSSI lt 78dBm SU I I D RSSI gt 64dBm 71dBm lt RSSI lt 64dBm RSSI lt 71dBm SU R RSSI gt 65dBm 74dBm lt RSSI lt 65dBm RSSI lt 74dBm 4 Reset the unit for the new configuration to become effective Manual Revision 1 01 O ptimizing the Wireless Link EI Aligning the Antenna of the SU A E Subscriber Unit ccra Antenna alignment using the RSSI bar display is possible only after the Access Unit you wish to associate with is operational and the basic parameters in the Subscriber Unit were properly configured Otherwise the unit will not be able to synchronize and associate with the Access Unit As the RSSI measurement is performed on received frames its results are meaningless as long as the unit is not associated with an Access Unit l Verify that the outdoor unit s Power indication is on 2 Align the antenna integrated into the front side of the SU RA outdoor unit or separate if the unit is an SU RE to point in the general direction of the base station 3 The RSSI bar display is located on the bottom panel of the outdoor unit The eight green RSSI LEDs are used for reading the Received signal Strength Indication The higher the number of green LEDs that are on the higher the level of the received signal Rotate the antenna left and or right until you reach the maximum RSSI reading as many green bars lit as possible
21. 4 2 73 Alarms Out Control Menu Book 4 2 74 Alarms Out Names Menu snm Book 4 2 74 Alarms Out Names Definitions Control and Status Parameter Book 4 2 75 Alternate Gatekeeper IP Address Parameter Book 4 2 59 Alternate Gatekeeper Option Parameter Book 4 2 59 Antenna att ee Book 2 1 12 Antenna DIVERSI nie Book 2 2 5 Book 2 3 4 Antenna Polarization ieri rie rie rie rie rie rie rie sie rie rie sie tenter Book 2 2 5 Book 2 3 5 Antenna Sea Book 2 2 5 Book 2 3 5 ARP Broadcast Override Filter Parameter Book 4 2 48 AU MAC Address Parameter eeeeeeeeee eee eere rennen Book 4 2 4 AU A E BS PPC RA E ee Book 2 1 2 185 7150 E Book 1 2 10 RE IRR EEA Book 2 1 3 AU I I D A alle Book 2 3 7 lere eure E astillas Book 2 3 2 AU NI ERE LEO PRO RR RO as AR Book 2 1 13 Authentication Algorithm Parameter Book 4 2 56 Automatic Alarms Out Definition Men Book 4 2 74 Automatic Prefix Parameter eeeeeeeeeeeeeeee nennen rnnt nene Book 4 2 60 B Bad fragments received Parameter iii Book 4 2 14 Base Station Equipment cra Book 1 2 7 Basic Contrsuration Me soda Book 4 2 10 Basic Parameters A o per Book 3 1 6 Battery Polarity Parametros Book 4 2 64 Best AU Parameters in SU Parameter Book 4 2 26 Best AU Selection Param
22. 9600 V 17 12000 and V 17 14400 The Fax Relay menu includes the following parameters Fax Relay Option Enables or disables the use of the T 38 protocol for relaying fax messages The default selection is Disable To enable the Fax Relay Option the Fast Start parameter must also be enabled Fax Relay Redundancy Defines the redundancy number of additional times each fax frame is transmitted to be used when transmitting T 38 fax messages Valid values O 5 BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Manual E BreezeACCESS 4 0 Operations and Administration Default value 3 lt gt Battery Polarity Defines the battery polarity for supporting an external device e g for coins or tokens charging purpose This feature is fully supported by units with voice card from revision D and up The available options are x v i us Forward Battery Regular polarity Reverse Battery Reverse polarity Forward gt Reverse Battery Change the polarity from forward to reverse Reverse gt Forward Battery Change the polarity from reverse to forward The default is Forward Battery lt P Caller ID Defines whether the unit will support generation of Caller ID CID signaling and if CID generation is supported which standard will be used The unit supports two CID signaling standards RA RA Voice band Frequency Shift Keying FSK signaling in accordance with ETSI ETS 300 659 1 1200 baud tone modulation i
23. AU I Front Panel Table 3 3 AU I I D LEDs POWER Power supply On After successful power up Off Power off WIRELESS Wireless Link Blinking Receiving packets from the wireless LINK Activity link Off no reception of packets from the wireless link e vo ooo ee LOAD Number of active subscriber units No subscribers l 1 8 subscribers O 9 16 subscribers y 17 or more subscribers Wall Mounting the Unit Use the supplied brackets for wall mounting to install the unit on a wall or a ceiling l Turn the unit so the rear panel is facing you 2 Unscrew the two screws located at the antennas end of the unit the top screws 3 Align the Unit Mounting Slots see Figure 3 6 with the slots you have just unscrewed BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Manual BreezeACCESS 4 0 Installation 4 Using the longer screws supplied with the wall mounts screw the wall mount to the unit 5 Align the Convenience Mounting Slots see Figure 3 2 with the nails push the wall mount against the wall and let it slide down until it rests on the nails Figure 3 5 Wall Mounting the Unit Special slots have been added to the wall mounts to allow for unobtrusive cable installation These slots should be used to fasten cables coming out of the unit to the wall mounts eliminating loose or tangled cable installations Convenience Mounting Slots Unit Mounting Slots Cable Fastening Slots Figure 3 6 Wa
24. AU module together with its outdoor radio unit comprises an AU A E BS Access Unit that serves a single sector lt P In the AU A BS series the AU RA outdoor unit contains a radio unit and an integral antenna lt P In the AU E BS series the AU RE outdoor unit contains the radio module and a RF connector for a separate external antenna The BS AU modules connect to the network through standard IEEE 802 3 Ethernet 10BaseT RJ 45 interfaces A coaxial Intermediate Frequency IF cable connects the indoor module to the outdoor unit This cable carries 440 MHz IF signals power 12 VDC and management and control signals from the indoor unit to the outdoor unit BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Manual ES BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Description Figure 2 4 BreezeACCESS Base Station Module and Outdoor Units BreezeACCESS II AU A E BS units are available with several different levels of maximum output power at the antenna port lt gt 26dBm HP 4 15dBm GP lt P 7dBm MP 4 2dBm LP GU A BS GPS and Alarms System The optional GU A BS system can be used to synchronize the frequency hopping mechanisms of collocated AU A E BS BreezeACCESS units where such synchronization is permitted by local regulations as well as to provide alarm management The GU A BS system is comprised of two units lt gt An outdoor GPS Receiver and Antenna unit the GU RA lt gt An indoor GPS and Alarms module the BS GU Manual Revision 1 01 System Comp
25. Applicable to SU and AU Read only The Integer 710 3 3 8 1 1 3 accumulated number of frames transmitted since hopSeqEntry 3 last reset at the applicable frequency hop TracerRetries Applicable to SU and AU Read only The Integer 710 3 3 8 1 1 4 accumulated number of frames retransmitted hopSeqEntry 4 since last reset at the applicable frequency hopTracerRSSI Applicable to SU and AU Read only The DisplayString SIZE 20 710 3 3 8 1 1 5 average RSSI of frames received at the hopSegEntry 5 applicable frequency hopTracerFreq Applicable to SU and AU Read only The DisplayString SIZE 9 710 3 3 8 1 1 6 frequency in MHz of the entry hopSeqEntry 6 TrafficStatistics Applicable to SU and AU Traffic Statistics 710 3 3 8 2 parameters SiteSurvey 2 ResetTrafficCounters Applicable to SU and AU Resets the Ethernet Integer 710 3 3 8 2 1 Counters EthCounters and the Wireless Link i 0 TrafficStatistics 1 Counters WlanCounters reset EthCounters Applicable to SU and AU Ethernet counters 710 3 3 8 2 2 TrafficStatistics 2 TotalRxFramesViaEthernet Applicable to SU and AU Read only Total Counter 710 3 3 8 2 2 1 number of frames received via the Ethernet port EthCounters 1 TxWireless ToEthernet Applicable to SU and AU Read only Total Counter 710 3 3 8 2 2 2 number of frames transmitted to the Ethernet EthCounters 2 port WlanCounters Applicable to SU and AU Wireless link counte
26. Book 3 1 6 Gibbon Book 3 1 10 Positioning 3 BE Antennas ds te torres it Book 3 2 4 Positioning SU R Antennas i Book 3 2 4 RSSI and Maximum Data Rate cernere Book 3 2 2 Compression Efficiency Parameter Book 4 2 58 Configuring Basie Parameters nile Book 3 1 6 Ba BE EE EE Book 3 1 10 RSSI and Maximum Data Rate ieri Book 3 2 2 Congestion Tone Parameter eene Book 4 2 66 Connecting the unit to the power supply oooooooncccnnnnncnonnnnnns Book 2 2 6 Book 2 3 11 Connectors ALT IN and AL OUT ERIS RT a e Uu Book 3 3 2 Console Specd BE Book 4 2 4 Book 4 2 8 Continuous Link Quality Display Book 4 2 17 Counters Liceali Book 4 2 12 SS Book 4 2 19 Wilson cian Book 4 2 13 Current Number of Associations Parameter ese Book 4 2 4 D Default Gateway Address Parameter Book 4 2 21 Detault Kev DD Paramotor i trientine iceman alae Book 4 2 57 Detaults Settings Parametet siriana Book 4 2 6 Delete a Network Management IP Address Parameter Book 4 2 36 Delete a User Filtering Entry Parameter Book 4 2 53 Delete All Network Management IP Addresses Parameter Book 4 2 36 Delete All User Filtering Entries Parameter Book 4 2 53 Destination IP Address Parameter
27. Book 4 2 12 Event Los Menu Parameter nario Book 4 2 8 Event Iog Polic SP aratrelel uoo ili Book 4 2 9 F Fast Start Parametri Book 4 2 60 Fax Relay Opuon Parameter a a Book 4 2 63 Fax Relay Parame EI icaro Book 4 2 63 Fax Relay Redundancy Parameter Book 4 2 63 Filter tele E Book 4 2 47 Flash Memory Control Parameter Li Book 4 2 8 Flash Type Parameter e Book 4 2 3 Flash Versions Parameter irish clint Book 4 2 3 Frames dropped too many retries Parameter Book 4 2 13 Frequency T Parameter sarai Book 4 2 66 Frequency 2 Parameter aaa Book 4 2 66 G G711A law Frames Per Packet Parameter Book 4 2 58 G711u law Frames Per Packet Parameter Book 4 2 58 3725 Frames Per Packet Parameter aaa Book 4 2 58 G729 Frames Per Packet Parameter Book 4 2 58 Gatekeeper Option Etgen Book 4 2 59 GateKeeper GateWay IP Address Parameter Book 4 2 59 GPS and Alarms System installations Book 2 1 21 GPS and Alarms system scort cda Book 1 2 8 Graceful Degradation Limit Parameter Book 4 2 55 Or We BS eut Moms neu MM ALI MA M D Lo IAM CL C LAM EE Book 1 2 8 CT US ashen EP Book 3 1 10 isdn cca Book 2 1 21 Pacino Listar daa Book 2 1 3 GU BS AL IN and AL OUT Connectors eene Book 3 3 2 H H323 Terminal I
28. Busy 14 Congestion 24 Error 24 High Level Error 0 Ring Frequency Null Dial Tone 13 Ring Back 19 Busy 14 Congestion 24 Error 24 High Level Error 0 Ring Frequency Null Dial Tone Ring Back 1000 Busy 500 Congestion 1000 Error 200 High Level Error 0 Ring Frequency 1000 Appendix D DB Parameter Unit Range Default Run Time Updated No Cadence Off SU with 100 10 000 milliseconds Dial Tone voice Ring Back 3000 Busy 500 Congestion 1000 Error 200 High Level Error 0 Ring Frequency 3000 Duration SU with 0 10 000 seconds Dial Tone 15 voice Ring Back 60 Busy 15 Congestion 0 Error 0 High Level Error 0 Ring Frequency Max Flash Detect SU with 0 2 000 milliseconds 1000 Timeout voice Disconnect Timeout SU with 0 2 000 milliseconds 1000 voice Inter Digit Timeout SU with 0 2 000 milliseconds voice Called Party Release SU with 0 10 000 milliseconds Timeout voice No 60 Min Flash Detect SU with 0 2 000 milliseconds 120 No Timeout voice i BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Manual E BreezeACCESS 4 0 System M anual Hopping Parameters Parameter Unit Range Default Run Time Updated Number of Hopping GU 2 99 No Frequencies Synchronization GU GPS Antenna or Internal GPS Antenna or Yes Signal Source Local from other GU Internal ACSE Option AU and GU Disable Enable Dwell Time AU and GU 32 64 128 Alarm In Names GU Up to 31 printable ASCII Alarm In 1 throu
29. Counter Read only Counts the number of voice bytes including fax and T 38 redundant bytes that were received from the wireless link Applicable to SU with voice support only Reset noReset 0 the voice counters reset 1 na 255 Applicable to SU and AU Applicable to AU and SU Resets the Per Rate noReset 0 Counters reset 1 na 255 MEME Applicable to SU only Read only Counts the Counter total number of frames excluding retransmissions that were transmitted over the wireless link at 1Mbps Applicable to SU only Read only Counts the Counter total number of frames excluding retransmissions that were transmitted over the wireless link at 2Mbps Applicable to SU only Read only Counts the Counter total number of frames excluding retransmissions that were transmitted over the wireless link at 3Mbps Applicable to SU only Read only Counts the Counter total number of frames that were retransmitted over the wireless link at 1Mbps Applicable to SU only Read only Counts the Counter total number of frames that were retransmitted over the wireless link at 2Mbps Applicable to SU only Read only Counts the Counter total number of frames that were retransmitted over the wireless link at 3Mbps BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Manual BreezeACCESS 4 0 System M anual ReceivingUnits 710 3 3 8 3 SiteSurvey 3 AveragePower 710 3 3 8 3 1 ReceivingUnits 1 RssiOrDbm 710 3 3 8 3
30. Esc key several times You can also exit the monitor from anywhere in the program by simultaneously pressing the Ctrl and X keys 5 we The program will terminate automatically after a given period of inactivity specified by the Log Out Timer parameter 4 Reset the unit after making configuration changes for the new values to take effect Ga Most parameters take effect only after the unit is reset However some parameters take effect immediately run time configurable Appendix D includes information on all parameters including which are run time configurable Manual Revision 1 01 Chapter 2 D Am arion gt Menus and Parameters About This Chapter This chapter describes the BreezeACCESS configuration menus and parameters It includes the following sections Main Menu page 2 2 Info Screens Menu page 2 3 Unit Control Menu page 2 6 Basic Configuration Menu page 2 10 Site Survey Menu page 2 12 gt gt gt Advanced Configuration Menu page 2 21 ES BreezeACCESS 4 0 Operations and Administration Main Menu From the Main Menu you can access the following menus depending on your access level lt gt lt gt Info Screens Provides read only display of current parameter values Available at all access levels Unit Control Enables access to general operations such as resetting the unit loading the default parameters changing passwords and switching between software versions
31. GU The Hopping Parameters Menu allows configuration of the hopping mechanism The GPS modules deliver signals to the Access Units that insure that their hopping patterns are fully synchronized This includes synchronizing the time each unit starts a new hop and ensuring that units start the hopping sequence simultaneously lt gt Number of Hopping Frequencies Configures the Number of Hopping Frequencies parameter to guarantee that all the Access Units managed by the GPS module will start their hopping sequence simultaneously To determine the correct number of hopping frequencies access the monitor program in one of the AU units select Show Basic Configuration in the Info Screens menu and view the Number of Hopping Frequencies value displayed BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Manual E BreezeACCESS 4 0 Operations and Administration You can also determine the Number of Hopping Frequencies using Table 3 18 Table 2 18 Number of Hopping Frequencies Hopping Standard Number of Hopping Frequencies hopping sequence length Auta Camada 9 nef 000 Fame BO CS A men Rest of America lt Dwell Time Applicable only when the ACSE Option is disabled When the ACSE Option is enabled this parameter is not applicable and the dwell time is the ACSE Dwell Time set to a fixed value of 60 milliseconds see page 2 52 lt gt ACSE Option see page 2 33 e The values of the ACSE Option and Dwell Time if the ACSE Option is disa
32. In case of Fast Start DTMF is relayed via Q 931 session Otherwise DTMF is relayed via H 245 session Defines the Dialing Prefix Option for handling prefixes according to the dialing plan supported by the unit disable 0 Insert Automatic Prefix if defined Otherwise forward as dialed enable 1 Insert Automatic Prefix if defined only if first digit differs from InterRegionalPrfx Otherwise forward as dialed enableBlocklnter RegionalPrfx 2 Insert Automatic Prefix if defined only if first digit differs from InterRegionalPrfx Remove the first digit if it equals InterRegionalPrfx and the second digit differs from InterNationalPrfx Otherwise forward as dialed To define the Inter Regional prefix to be handled according to the dialing plan supported by the unit To define the International prefix to be handled according to the dialing plan supported by the unit To define the registration Time To Live timeToLive request in the RRQ message to the Gatekeeper To define the EndpointType components in H 323 messages for interoperability with other equipment using H 323 Disable enable T 38 fax relay Defines redundancy used for transmitting IFP messages To define the battery polarity for supporting an external device e g for coins or tokens charging purpose This feature is only available in units with voice card from revision D and up Integer disable 0 enable 1 na 255 Integer
33. MAC address SysInfo 6 UnitType Applicable to all products Read only Unit DisplayString 710 3 3 13 7 type SIZE 0 32 SysInfo 7 AssociatedAU Applicable to SU only MAC address 710 3 3 13 8 Read only Associated AU MAC address SysInfo 8 NumOfAssociationsSinceLastReset Applicable to AU and SU Integer 710 3 3 13 9 Read only The number of associations since SysInfo 9 last reset including duplicate associations re associations FlashType Applicable to all products Read only Flash DisplayString 710 3 3 13 10 memory type SIZE 0 31 SysInfo 10 Type S Strata Flash Type F all other Flash types FlashSize Applicable to all products Read only Flash Integer 710 3 3 13 11 size in Mb SysInfo 11 SwVersionAfterReset Applicable to all products Read only The DisplayString 710 3 3 13 12 software version to be used after next reset SIZE 0 32 SysInfo 12 MaxPowerOutput Applicable to SU and AU Integer 710 3 3 13 13 Read only The maximum output power to the na 255 SysInfo 13 antenna port FrequencyDuplex Applicable to SU and AU in BreezeACCESS Integer 710 3 3 13 14 XL family only SysInfo 14 Read only The frequency separation between uplink and downlink Uni t St at us Applicable to GU only The status of the GPS DisplayString 710 3 3 13 15 antenna SIZE 0 100 SysInfo 15 CurrentNumOfAssociations Applicable to AU only Read only The number Integer 7
34. Mask The Subnet Mask configuration screen appears Enter the required subnet mask From the Basic Configuration menu select Default Gateway Address The Default Gateway Address configuration screen appears Enter the required default gateway address lt P If you have selected DHCP Only select Access to DHCP The Access to DHCP menu opens Select the required access option From Ethernet Port Only From Wireless Port Only or From Both Ethernet and Wireless Ports lt P If you have selected Automatic configure the following parameters Manual Revision 1 01 Setting Basic Parameters ES From the Basic Configuration menu select Access to DHCP The Access to DHCP menu opens Select the required access option From Ethernet Port Only From Wireless Port Only or From Both Ethernet and Wireless Ports From the Basic Configuration menu select IP Address The IP Address configuration screen appears Enter the required IP address vis From the Basic Configuration menu select Subnet Mask The Subnet Mask configuration screen appears Enter the required subnet mask vis From the Basic Configuration menu select Default Gateway Address The Default Gateway Address configuration screen appears Enter the required default gateway address Configuring ESSID Parameters 1 From the Basic Configuration menu select ESSID The ESSID configuration screen appears Enter the required ESSID If you are configur
35. SU Priority threshold for tagged frames received from Ethernet port Applicable to Hybrid Link and Trunk Link only Applicable to AU and SU Bridge aging time for devices learned from both the Ethernet and wireless link ports Applicable to AU only Controls the flow of information from Ethernet to Wlan rejectUnknown Permits only transmission to addresses known to be on the Wlan side forwardUnknown Forwards all frames except those sent to addresses known to be on the Ethernet side Applicable to AU only Enables disables the relaying of broadcast messages to the wireless link Applicable to AU only Enables disables the relaying of unicast messages to the wireless link Applicable to SU only Ethernet Broadcasting parameters Applicable to SU only Enables or disables the broadcasting of DHCP messages overriding the general EthBroadcastFiltering Ethernet broadcast filtering option Applicable to SU only Enables or disables the broadcasting of PPPoE messages overriding the general EthBroadcastFiltering Ethernet broadcast filtering option Integer disable 0 enable 1 na 255 Integer 0 19 Integer 1 4094 O remove entry Integer 0 7 na 255 Integer 0 7 na 255 Integer 0 7 na 255 Integer 0 7 na 255 Integer 100 2000 seconds Integer rejectUnknown 0 forwardUnknown 1 na 255 Integer disable 0 enable 1 na 255 Integer disable 0 enable 1 na
36. a Ping Frame Length of 1472 bytes MAC Address Database Available in AU Only The MAC Address Database displays information on the subscriber units associated with the AU as well as bridging forwarding information The following options are available lt gt Display Bridging amp Association Info Displays a list of all the Subscriber Units and stations in the Forwarding Database of the AU For stations behind an SU the SU s MAC address is also displayed Each MAC address entry is followed by a description as follows eje Et Ethernet Addresses that have been learned from the Ethernet port sis Vp Virtual port Addresses of the nodes behind an associated SU For these addresses the address of the SU is displayed in parenthesis BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Manual E BreezeACCESS 4 0 Operations and Administration eje St Static An associated SU These entries also include the SW Version of the SU eis Sp Special 5 Addresses that always exist ale X The MAC address of the AU appears twice as it is learned from both the Ethernet and the wireless ports ale Alvarion s Multicast address 01 20 D6 00 00 01 also twice The system handles this address as a Broadcast address t din The Ethernet Broadcast address FF FF FF FF FF FF In addition a summary table displays information about the Forwarding Database Bridging Info the Associated Subscriber Units Database Association Info and
37. a window is not accessible facing the required direction Avoid metal obstacles such as metal window frames or metal film anti glare windows in the transmission path Install outdoor antennas high enough to avoid any obstacles which may block the signal lt P gt Position the antennas clear of metal furniture and away from moving metal objects such as metal fans or doors Antenna Diversity Multipath propagation is to be expected when there are potential reflectors between the Access Unit and Subscriber Units These reflectors may be buildings or moving objects such as airplanes and motor vehicles If this is the case the radio signal does not travel in a straight line but is reflected or deflected off of the object creating multiple propagation paths In applications where no multipath propagation is expected a single antenna is sufficient to ensure good performance levels However in cases where multipath propagation exists Alvarion recommends that two antennas be used This takes advantage of space diversity Manual Revision 1 01 Indoor SU I and AU I Units EI capabilities By using two antennas per unit the system can select the best antenna on a per packet basis every several milliseconds When installing a single antenna configure the Transmit Antenna option to either Antenna 1 or Antenna 2 according to the antenna being used When using two antennas configure the Transmit Antenna option to Both Antennas Anten
38. a single unit that is powered from the mains 100 250 VAC lt P The AU I products include two integral 2 dBi omni antennas lt gt The AU I D products have two RF connectors for detached diversity antennas Manual Revision 1 01 System Components E Figure 2 7 BreezeACCESS AU I D Unit BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Manual EJ BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Description Networking Equipment The base station equipment is connected to the backbone through standard data communication and telecommunication equipment For improved security the 10BaseT ports of the AU modules are connected directly to a multi port router This router is connected by any means of point to point link to the backbone In cases where security is less important and cost is the main concern the Access Units can be connected to an Ethernet switch and then to a single port router The point to point link from the base station to the backbone may be wired or wireless links The data to the Internet is routed to the Internet backbone through standard routers The voice traffic is routed via standard Gateways Gatekeepers to the PSTN Manual Revision 1 01 System Components ES Management Systems The end to end IP based architecture of the system allows full management of all components from any point in the system BreezeACCESS components can be managed using standard management tools through SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol agents that implement stan
39. addresses of the stations that can manage the unit if Network Management Filtering option was enabled and allows you to enter new addresses up to three IP addresses can be defined The default value is 000 000 000 000 for all 3 addresses 4 Delete a Network Management IP Address Deletes one of the 3 IP address entries from the list of Network Management IP Addresses 4 Delete All Network Management IP Addresses Deletes all entries from the list of Network Management IP Addresses lt gt SNMP Traps Enables disables transmission of SNMP traps if this option is enabled you can define up to 3 IP addresses of stations to which SNMP traps are sent vis Send SNMP Traps Enables disables sending of SNMP traps Available options are X Enable Traps Sending Disable Traps Sending The default selection is Disable Traps Sending vis SNMP Traps IP Destination Displays the current values of 3 IP addresses that are defined as the trap destinations Allows entering a new address 4 groups of 3 digits each separated by dots for each of the 3 entries The default of all three SNMP Traps IP Destinations is 000 000 000 000 SNMP Traps Community Defines a new community string for each of the 3 SNMP Trap IP Destination entries Valid strings Up to 14 ASCII characters case sensitive Manual Revision 1 01 M enus and Parameters ESI The default for all 3 entries is public read only Show SNMP Traps Parameters D
40. configuration screen opens Type 1 to reset the unit so that new configuration settings are applied BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Manual ES BreezeACCESS 4 0 Commissioning Configuring Parameters in GU A BS Units Introduction This section describes all the parameters that are necessary for the initial installation and operation of GU RA units Once the unit is properly installed and operational other parameters can be configured using the monitor program via Telnet or SNMP management we The GU RA does not have an external MON port and therefore must be configured using Telnet Since all the parameters needed are found in the Advanced Configuration menu Admistrator level access is required in order to configure a GU RA unit Refer to Book 4 Operation and Administration for detailed information on the applicable parameters Configuring IP Parameters 1 From the Advanced Configuration menu select DHCP Client The DHCP Client menu appears 2 From the DHCP Client menu select DHCP Options The DHCP Options menu opens Choose the required option Disable DHCP Only or Automatic If DHCP Only is selected proceed to the next parameter If Disable or Automatic is selected continue to step 3 3 From the Basic Configuration menu select IP Address The IP Address configuration screen appears Enter the required IP address 4 From the Basic Configuration menu select Subnet Mask The Subnet Mask configuration screen appe
41. eem mmn nnn C 1 SU A HEU V sini C 1 SU Rand Sel aaa C 2 Appendix D Para meters LISE sonata D 1 Unit Control Parameters eee Keen D 1 Site Survey Parameters eececeeeee eese rennen D 2 IP Parameters iaia D 2 Air Interface Parameters eee eeee eere D 3 Network Management Parameters D 5 Bridge Parameters eee eee eere D 6 Performance Parameters ecce esee rere rene D 7 Service ParamelelS sisas D 8 Security Parameters la D 8 VOICE eu E D 9 Dialing Parameters eere eee D 10 Telephony Signals ee eeeeeee eere D 12 Hopping Parameters eere eene een D 14 EM BreezeACCESS 4 0 System M anual BreezeACCESS System Manual Book 1 System Description AL e S alvarion We re on your wavelength System Description alvarion N Table of Contents We re on your wavelength Introduction ssi cas ACE b ada 1 1 Introducing BreezeACCESS coccoococcccononnconononanonennannnnenenananennnnnns 1 2 System C ODIDOISDES avaria 2 1 Subscriber Units Customer Premises Equipment 2 2 SU A E Units with an Outdoor Radio Unit and Antenna 2 2 SU I I D Miniature Indoor
42. is 1800 seconds Maximum Voice Sessions Applicable only for an AU that provides services to Subscriber Units with voice capabilities When the ACSE voice scheduler option is enabled this parameter is not applicable and instead the Maximum ACSE Voice Sessions parameter is used The value of the Maximum Voice Sessions parameter specifies the maximum number of simultaneous voice sessions that can be conducted by the SUs associated with this AU If the number of active voice sessions reaches this number any additional SU trying to initiate a voice session shall not get a dial tone As this value increases voice quality may deteriorate as more users share the same bandwidth for voice sessions The selection range is from O to 50 The default value is 12 NOTE A voice session is defined as a voice connection between an SU and an AU A session between two SUs that are served by the same AU is counted as two voice Sessions Manual Revision 1 01 M enus and Parameters ES lt P Transmit Antenna Applicable only to single box SU R SU I ID and AU I ID units Displays which antennas are used for transmission Single box units support transmit antenna diversity 2 antennas During reception a BreezeACCESS unit that is connected to two antennas dynamically selects the antenna where reception is optimal In contrast if the transmit antenna diversity is enabled the unit selects the antenna from which it will transmit before the actu
43. link even if they are intended for devices on the wireless link Disable Unicast Relaying only if you know that all unicast messages from the wireless link will be destined to the local wired LAN The default selection is Enable Show Bridge Parameters Displays the current values of the Bridge parameters Performance Parameters AU and SU The Performance Parameters menu includes the following parameters lt gt RTS Threshold Defines the minimal frame size to require RTS CTS Request To Send Clear To Send handshake Frames with a size below the RTS Threshold value are transmitted directly to the wireless link without being preceded with RTS frames Setting this parameter to a value larger than the maximum frame size will prevent the RTS CTS handshake for frames transmitted by this unit The allowed range is from 20 to 1600 The default value is 60 bytes for SUs and 1600 for AUs Number of Retransmissions The maximum number of times that a packet that was not acknowledged will be retransmitted This parameter is not applicable when the ACSE Option is enabled Valid values are from O no retransmissions to 100 The default value is 1 Number of Dwells to Retransmit The minimum number of dwell periods during which packets will be retransmitted The Number of Dwells to Retransmit parameter is used together with the Number of Retransmissions parameter See above to spread the retransmissions in both the time and frequ
44. means no preferred AU is set For future use in SU I and AU I Sets the level in dBm of the transmitted power at the antenna port Applicable for AU SU and GU ACSE Voice Scheduler parameters Applicable for AU SU and GU Read only in the SU Disable enable the ACSE Voice Scheduler mechanism Applicable for AU SU and GU Read only The dwell time when the ACSEOption is enabled Currently set to 60 milliseconds Applicable to AU only The maximum number of simultaneous ACSE voice sessions permitted to guarantee minimum quality Applicable only when the ACSEOption is enabled Applicable to SU and AU Maximum times to retransmit an unacknowledged data packet Applicable only when the ACSEOption is enabled Applicable to SU with voice and AU Maximum times to retransmit an unacknowledged voice packet Applicable only when the ACSEOption is enabled Applicable for AU only The Enabling disabling the use of the Operator ESSID Sets the upper limit for the number of Subscriber Units that can be associated with the AU Site Proprietary parameters Applicable only to BreezeACCESS Il SU and AU configured to work in the special Site Proprietary hopping standard Number of frequencies in the proprietary hopping sets parameters Read Only Number of frequencies in the first set Read Only Number of frequencies in the second set Read Only Number of frequencies in the third set BreezeA
45. oe eens Book 4 2 52 Set Factory Defaults Parameter i Book 4 2 6 Set Full Operator Defaults Parameter esses Book 4 2 6 Set Network Management IP Addresses Parameter Book 4 2 36 Set Partial Factory Defaults Parameter Book 4 2 6 Set Partial Operator Defaults Parameter n Book 4 2 7 Set User Filter Address Parameter ieri rien Book 4 2 52 Set User Filter Mask Parameter ds Book 4 2 53 Set User Filter Range Parameter aca Book 4 2 53 Show Advanced Parameters Menu Book 4 2 5 Show Alarm Parameters Menu Book 4 2 75 Show All Parameters Menu Book 4 2 5 Show All User Filtering Parameters Parameter Book 4 2 53 Show Basic Parameters Men Book 4 2 5 Show IP Parameters Parameter eee Book 4 2 22 Show Pine Test Values Parameter u eb HEREDES Book 4 2 17 Show Unit Status Men Book 4 2 3 Der SUEY Meade Book 4 2 12 Book 1 C 2 SNMP Traps Community Parameter Book 4 2 36 SNMP Traps IP Destination Parameter esses Book 4 2 36 SNMP Traps Parameter ans dino ai Book 4 2 36 Specifications AUTE atea Book 1 3 8 WED rail Book 1 3 12 Configuration and Managemen Book 1 3 5 Data Communication rs dee Book 1 3 4 A e qaom amete euet top Fesk ie pA NN ne Book 1 3 6
46. of Alarm In entry Applicable to GU only Names definition control and status of Alarms Out Not accessible Applicable to GU only An Alarms Out table entry Not accessible Applicable to GU only Read only Alarms Out table index Applicable to GU only Alarm Out name The other are read only Applicable to GU only Enter an Alarm In number to activate the Alarm Out when this Alarm In is ON Enter A to activate the Alarm Out if ANY of the Alarms In are ON Enter N for NONE never activate the Alarm Out Applicable to GU only Alarm out control off 0 turn alarm off on 1 turn alarm on auto 2 activate according to status of relevant alarm in in accordance with Alarm Out Definition Applicable to GU only Read only The status off or on of Alarm Out entry Integer 1 10 DisplayString SIZE 0 31 Integer off 0 on 1 na 255 Integer 1 3 DisplayString SIZE 0 31 DisplayString SIZE 0 2 1 10 A N Integer off 0 on 1 auto 2 na 255 Integer off 0 on 1 na 255 Appendix B EE brzPhoneMIB applicable to SU with voice only breezecom breezecomPrvRev breezecom 3 brzPhoneMib breezecomPrvRev 4 OBJECT IDENTIFIER 1 3 6 1 4 1 710 iso 1 org 3 dod 6 internet 1 private 4 enterprises 1 breezecom 710 OBJECT IDENTIFIER 1 3 6 1 4 1 710 3 OBJECT IDENTIFIER 1 3 6 1 4 1 710 3 4 Note is used instead of the phon prefix Dialing
47. of the received signal including both signal and noise by 2dB when selecting 10dB attenuation and 12dB when selecting 25dB attenuation Applicable to AU only The maximum number of simultaneous voice sessions permitted to guarantee minimum quality Applicable to SU and AU only Flexible Hopping Definition parameters Applicable to SU and AU only In BreezeACCESS II V and MMDS families it adds sub bands f1 f2 or discrete frequencies to the list of sub bands frequencies to be used for generating the basic Hopping Sequence after the next reset In BreezeACCESS XL it defines a new set of sub bands frequencies to be used for generating the basic Hopping Sequence after the next reset Applicable to SU and AU in BreezeACCESS II V and MMDS families only Deletes sub bands f1 f2 or discrete frequencies from the list of sub bands frequencies to be used for generating the basic Hopping Sequence after the next reset Applicable to SU and AU in BreezeACCESS II V and MMDS families only Deletes all entries from the table of the frequencies to be used Applicable to SU and AU only The list of sub bands to be supported after next reset Not accessible Applicable to SU and AU only A Sub Band Table entry Not accessible Applicable only to SW version 2 6 Applicable to SU and AU only Read only A Sub Band in the Sub Bands Table Integer max1Mbps 1 max2Mbps 2 max3Mbps 3 na 255 Integer BreezeA
48. of the called party is busy Congestion Tone Defines the tone transmitted to the earphone to indicate that the system cannot currently support the call e g if a line is not available since the AU currently supports the maximum allowed number of voice sessions Error Tone Defines the tone transmitted to the earphone to indicate that the system cannot currently support the call e g if for any reason the call was disconnected because of a problem in the wireless link or incompatible capabilities or if the user did not hang up after exceeding the specified duration of the Dial Ring Back Busy or Congestion Tones High Level Error Tone Defines the high level tone transmitted to the earphone to better attract the attention of the user if he did not hang up after exceeding the specified duration of the Error Tone The various tones are defined by specifying the following parameters vis Frequency 1 One of two frequencies that can be used for generating the applicable tone Valid values are 0 3000 in Hz Frequency 2 The second of the two frequencies to be used for generating the applicable tone Valid values are 0 3000 in Hz sis Level 1 The level in dBm of Frequency 1 Valid values are 32 to 3 Level 2 The level in dBm of Frequency 2 Valid values are 32 to 3 Cadence On The ringing time on in the tones silence sequence of the tone Valid values are 100 10 000 milliseconds O O
49. option is selected Available selections are BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Manual ELI BreezeACCESS 4 0 Operations and Administration Disable PPPoE Broadcast messages is filtered or transmitted according to the general filtering criteria set by the selected value of the Filter Options parameter vis Enable PPPoE Broadcast messages is transmitted regardless of the selected value of the Filter Options parameter The default selection is Disable lt P ARP Broadcast Override Filter When this option is set to Enable ARP Broadcast broadcasting of ARP messages is independent of the filtering option selected in Filter Options above This means that ARP broadcasts are transmitted regardless of which filtering option is selected for broadcast messages Available selections are Disable ARP Broadcast messages are filtered or transmitted according to the general filtering criteria set by the Filter Options parameter eis Enable ARP Broadcast messages are transmitted regardless of the selected value of the Filter Options parameter The default selection is Enable Other Bridging Parameters lt gt LAN to Wireless Link Bridging Mode AU only Controls the flow of information from the Ethernet backbone to the wireless media The options are Reject Unknown Allows transmission of packets only to addresses that the AU knows to exist in the wireless link Forward Unknown Allows transmission of all packets except t
50. order to reset the unit Manual Revision 1 01 Installing the GU RA GPS Antenna 1 Screw the GPS antenna firmly to the special 1 threaded pole 2 Use the mounting kit supplied with the unit or any other suitable means to secure the GPS antenna pole to an existing pole e g any pole used for mounting base station antennas or the outdoor units of the BreezeACCESS Access Units Choose the location to ensure an obstacle free line of sight from the GPS antenna to the sky extending at least 30 degrees in all directions Figure 1 14 GPS Installation 3 Secure the GPS cable to the mounting pole leaving a free length of cable with the 12 pin round connector at the end sufficient for connecting to the antenna module we The cable is very heavy and connecting it to the antenna without first securing it to the pole may damage the connector 4 Connect the 12 pin round connector to the GPS antenna 5 Route the cable to the location intended for installation of the BS GU module BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Manual EZ BreezeACCESS 4 0 Installation NOTE E e Outdoor units and antennas should be installed ONLY by experienced installation professionals who are familiar with local building and safety codes and wherever applicable are licensed by the appropriate government regulatory authorities Failure to do so may void the BreezeACCESS product warranty and may expose the end user or the service provider to legal and
51. packets from the wireless media BS PS DC Power Supply Module LEDS Description 48 VDC 1s available and Power Supply 1s ON SV The 5V power supply module is OK and power is consumed at least one BS AU module is inserted 12V The 12V power supply module is OK and power is consumed at least one AU RA RE unit 1s connected BS PS AC AC Power Supply Module LEDs um si n ooo Green LED Indicates that the 3 3 V power supply module is OK 3 3V power supply is not used by current BreezeACCESS modules SV Green LED Indicates that the 5 V power supply module is OK 12V Green LED Indicates that the 12 V power supply module is OK OVERTEMP Red LED Indicates an Over Temperature condition in the power supply module BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Manual BreezeACCESS 4 0 Commissioning BS AU LEDS P WR Power supply On After successful power up indicating that 12 VDC is 12 VDC supplied to the outdoor unit Off Power off or DC DC converter failure 12 VDC not supplied to the outdoor unit WLNK Wireless link Blinking Receiving packets from the wireless media activity Off No reception of packets from the wireless media ALRM On Loss of hopping synchronization in Slave mode MASTER On The unit is configured as Master BS GU LEDs LED Name Functionality PWR green On Power supply functioning properly Off Power supply not functioning properly OK green On Proper signals are being r
52. price denoted on the invoice EM BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Description Electronic Emission Notice This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions This device may not cause harmful interference This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation FCC Radio Frequency Interference Statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a residential environment notwithstanding use in commercial business and industrial environments This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications FCC Radiation Hazard Warning To comply with FCC RF exposure requirements in section 1 1307 a minimum separation distance as defined in the following table is required between the antenna and all persons Product Minimum Separation Distance SU A E and AU A E 2 m 79 inches SU I I D and AU I I D 20 cm 8 inches SU R 20 cm 8 inches R amp TTE Compliance Statement This equipment complies with the appropriate essential requirements of Article 3 of the R amp TTE Directive 1999 5 EC
53. range of values is dependent on the bandwidth of the radio and on the selected Hopping Band Max Frequency Offset Overall radio bandwidth Hopping Band 2 Integer use2Antennasn 0 antennal 1 antenna2 2 na 255 Integer Na 255 Australia 1 20 Canada 1 10 Europe ETSI 1 26 France 1 11 Israel 1 11 Japan 1 4 Korea 1 4 Netherlands 1 5 Spain 1 9 US FCC 1 26 Mexico 1 10 International 1 26 Integer 1 3 na 255 BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Manual ES BreezeACCESS 4 0 System M anual HoppingSync Applicable to BS AU only Integer 710 3 3 6 7 Inter AU hopping sync functionality idle 0 Airlnterface 7 of the unit slave 1 In the BreezeACCESS II family master 2 synchronization among AUs is not na 255 available with the following Country Standards US FCC Australia Canada In the BreezeACCESS V family synchronization is not available if the selected hopping band is ISM US FCC HoppingShift Applicable to AU in Integer 710 3 3 6 8 BreezeACCESS V XL and MMDS na 255 Airlnterface 8 families and in BreezeACCESS II if Range 0 to number of operational HoppingBands is channels 1 frqFlexibleHopping Defines a hopping pattern different from the basic hopping sequence Hopping Shift 0 Different collocated AUs should use different hopping shifts Manual Revision 1 01 Appendix B ES HoppingBands Applicable to SU and AU only Integer 710 3 3 6 9 In BreezeACCESS II this
54. the Company Authorization to return products must be obtained prior to shipment The buyer shall pay all shipping charges to the Company and the Company shall pay shipping charges to return the product to the buyer The Company warrants that the firmware designed by it for use with the unit will execute its programming instructions when properly installed on the unit The Company does not warrant that the operation of the unit or firmware will be uninterrupted or error free Limitations of Warranty The foregoing warranty shall not apply to defects resulting from improper or inadequate maintenance by the buyer buyer supplied interfacing unauthorized modification or misuse operation outside of the environmental specifications for the product or improper site preparation or maintenance No other warranty is expressed or implied The Company specifically disclaims the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for any particular purpose Alvarion shall not be liable to any person for any special or indirect damages including but not limited to loss of profits or revenues loss of use or damage to any associated equipment cost of capital cost of substitute products facilities or services downtime costs or claims resulting from any cause whatsoever arising from or in any way connected with the manufacture sale handling service repair maintenance or use of the products In no event shall the company s liability exceed the purchase
55. the customer s premises Base Station Equipment page 2 7 describes the equipment used in BreezeACCESS Base Stations lt gt Networking Equipment page 2 12 describes how BreezeACCESS Base Station units are connected to one another and to other equipment in a network environment lt gt Management Systems page 2 13 introduces the management features built into the BreezeACCESS system and describes the use of various standard and proprietary management systems ES BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Description Subscriber Units Customer Premises Equipment The BreezeACCESS Subscriber Unit SU installed at the customer premises provides data only or data and telephone connections The data connection is a standard IEEE 802 3 Ethernet 1OBaseT RJ 45 interface while the voice connection in units that support voice is a standard RJ 11 Plain Old Telephone POTS interface The Subscriber Unit provides an efficient platform for high rate Internet and Intranet services providing subscribers with fast access to IP based services at a burst data rate of up to 3 Mbps The use of packet switching technology provides the user with a connection to the network that is practically always on allowing for immediate access to services There are 3 lines of Subscriber Units with different architectures lt gt SU A E units with an outdoor radio unit lt gt SU I miniature indoor units lt P SU R high power small footprint indoor units SU A
56. to 8 Ethernet devices 8 MAC addresses Manual Revision 1 01 System Components EI SU X BD 2 4 The unit provides bridge functionality and can support up to a full LAN Data and Voice Units SU X 1D1V 2 4 The unit supports one Ethernet device and has an interface to a standard analog telephone set POTS SU X 8D1V 2 4 The unit supports up to 8 Ethernet devices 8 MAC addresses and has an interface to a standard analog telephone set POTS SU X BD1V 2 4 The unit provides bridge functionality and can support a full LAN It also has an interface for a standard analog telephone POTS X I The unit is supplied with two integral 2 dBi omni antennas X I D The unit is supplied with two connectors for detached antenna s SU R High Power Indoor Units The SU R line includes small footprint high power units that are designed for indoor desktop or wall mount installations SU R units are available with three different antenna configurations lt gt Two clip on omni antennas lt P A wall mountable antenna lt gt An outdoor high gain antenna Figure 2 3 BreezeACCESS SU R Unit BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Manual ES BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Description The following types of units are available Data only Units SU R 1D The unit supports one Ethernet device SU R 8D The unit supports up to eight Ethernet devices eight MAC addresses SU R BD The unit provides bridge functionality and can support up to a full
57. used when finer alignment is required NOTE Antenna alignment of the Subscriber Unit is possible only after the Access Unit you wish to associate with is operational and the basic parameters were properly configured Otherwise the unit will not be able to synchronize and associate with the Access Unit As the RSSI measurement is performed on received frames its results are meaningless as long as the unit is not associated with an Access Unit 4 In SU I D units verify that the Subscriber Unit is associated with the Access Unit by aligning the antenna manually to point to the base station until the WIRELESS LINK LED on the front panel of the unit is lit lt gt Check the SIGNAL QUALITY L M and H LEDs The higher the number of LEDs that are on the better the quality of the link Rotate the antenna left and or right until you reach the point of highest signal quality reading on the SIGNAL QUALITY LEDs For proper operation at least one L LED should be on If this is not possible improve the link quality by placing the antenna at a higher point or in a different location lt P Ifyou are using the high gain antenna it is recommended to use the Continuous Link Quality Display test to locate the position with the highest RSSI reading This will help ensure optimal signal quality lt P Firmly secure the antenna in place BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Manual ES BreezeACCESS 4 0 Commissioning Manual Revision 1 01 Chapter 3 m a
58. whose IP address is 206 25 63 65 tftp 206 25 63 65 put Suconf private cfg To download the configuration file from the same unit tftp 206 25 63 65 get private cfg Suconf Manual Revision 1 01 BreezeACCESS Il System Manual Appendices p e S alvarion We re on your wavelength A endix A di N n arion gt Software Version Loading Procedure General NY Firmware upgrades to the unit s FLASH memory are performed by a simple loading procedure using a TFTP application Before performing an upgrade procedure be sure you have the correct files and latest instructions NOTE Shutting down power to the unit before completion of the loading procedure may cause the unit to be inoperable Verify that you have IP connectivity to the unit to be loaded with a new version Verify that the IP address of the PC from which you intend to perform the upgrade belongs to the same subnet as the unit to be upgraded unless the unit is behind a router If the unit is behind a router verify that the unit is configured with the correct Default Gateway Address To view the current IP parameters of the unit use the monitor program by connecting the PC to the unit either directly or via Telnet and use the following procedure 1 From the Main Menu select 1 Info Screens The Info Screens menu opens 2 From the Info Screen menu select 2 Show Basic Configuration A display of the current configuration of the basic para
59. wired and wireless links performance The traffic statistics counters display statistics concerning wireless link and Ethernet frames The menu includes the following options lt gt Display Counters Choose this option to display the current value of the Ethernet and Wireless Link Counters 4 Reset Counters Choose this option to reset all the counters Ethernet Counters The unit receives Ethernet frames from its Ethernet port and forwards them to its internal bridge which decides whether the frame should be transmitted to the wireless media Frames that were discarded by the units hardware filter are not counted by the Ethernet counters The unit transmits valid data frames that were received from the wireless media to the Ethernet port as well as some internally generated frames e g responses to management queries and pings that reached the unit from the Ethernet port lt gt Total received frames via Ethernet Displays the total number of frames received from the Ethernet port 4 Transmitted wireless to Ethernet Displays the number of frames transmitted by the unit to the Ethernet port These are usually frames that have been received from the wireless side but also frames generated by the unit itself Manual Revision 1 01 M enus and Parameters ES Wireless Link Counters The unit transmits data frames received from the Ethernet port as well as self generated control and wireless management frames to the wire
60. 0 Ten hexadecimal digits Appendix B Eu CurrentTxPwrLvl 710 3 3 6 18 Airlnterface 18 WirelessTrap Threshold 710 3 3 6 19 Airlnterface 19 NumberOfHoppingFrequenciess 710 3 3 6 20 Airlnterface 20 OperatorESSID 710 3 3 6 21 Airlnterface 21 RunTimeESSID 710 3 3 6 22 Airlnterface 22 BestAu 710 3 3 6 23 Airlnterface 23 BestAuSupport 710 3 3 6 23 1 BestAu 1 BestAuNoOfScanningAttempts 710 3 3 6 23 2 BestAu 2 NeighborAu Table 710 3 3 6 23 3 BestAu 3 NeighborAuEntry 710 3 3 6 23 3 1 NeighborAuTable 1 NeighborAuMacAdd 710 3 3 6 23 3 1 1 NeighborAuEntry 1 NeighborAuESSID 710 3 3 6 23 3 1 2 NeighborAuEntry 2 NeighborAuRssi 710 3 3 6 23 3 1 3 NeighborAuEntry 3 NeighborAuAssocLoadStatus 710 3 3 6 23 3 1 4 NeighborAuEntry 4 NeighborAuMark 710 3 3 6 23 3 1 5 NeighborAuEntry 5 NeighborAuldx 710 3 3 6 23 3 1 6 NeighborAuEntry 6 Applicable to SU R SU I and AU I units only Enables setting the transmitted power level according to the unit capabilities The medium 2 value is not applicable to SU I and AU I and to some SU R products A wireless link quality threshold for sending the WirelessStatus T RAP or WirelessStatusOfSUsTRAP These traps indicate whether the quality has gone below or above the specified threshold Applicable to SU and AU Read only The Number of Hopping Frequencies used in the A
61. 0 C Operating Humidity 5 95 non condensing weather protected Indoor equipment 5 95 non condensing Standards Compliance General te me Type EMC FCC part 15 247 EN 300 826 UL 1950 EN 60950 Environmental ETS 300 019 part 2 3 class 3 2E for indoor units ETS 300 019 part 2 4 class 4 1E for outdoor units FCC part 15 247 ETSI ETS 300 328 Manual Revision 1 01 Specifications EZ Physical Specifications SU A E Subscriber Unit Connectors SU NI TNC jack 50 ohm lightning protected E IOBaseT Ethernet RJ 45 with 2 embedded LEDs Cable connection to a PC SU A E 1D 1D1V straight SU A E 8D 8D1 V BD BDIV crossed TEL units with RJ 11 jack POTS voice support DC 12 V DC phone jack for the SU PS power supply M A F TH SU RE TNC jack 50 ohm lightning protected F N Type jack 50 ohm lightning protected SU RA TNC jack 50 ohm lightning protected Electrical Power consumption 25 W SU NI External power supply AC input power 100 240 Vr m s 47 63 Hz DC power output 12 V 2 5 A SU RA SU RE 12 VDC from the SU NI unit over the IF cable Mechanical General An indoor SU NI unit with an external SU PS power supply unit and an outdoor SU RE or SU RA radio unit Metal box plus an integral antenna in plastic enclosure 30 6 x 30 6 x 7 2cm 2 5 kg pole or wall mountable 30 6 x 12x 4 7 cm 30 6 x 30 6 x 2 5 cm BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Manual BreezeACCESS 4 0 System
62. 0 all 3 Destination entries SNMP Traps A Up to 14 printable ASCII public all 3 Community characters entries All All All All Il BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Manual ES BreezeACCESS 4 0 System M anual Bridge Parameters Parameter Unit Range Default Run Time 1 o VLANID Dua ID Data l 1 494 000 1 494 000 i ID LE GU SU 1 4094 65535 no VLAN Management without voice VLAN ID Voice SU with 1 4094 65535 65535 no VLAN No amp Management voice VLAN Link Type AU SU Hybrid Link Hybrid Link Trunk Link Access Link only in SU Voice Priority Tag SU with Disable Enable Disable No Option voice VLAN Forwarding AU SU Disable Enable Disable No Support Seet Forwarding AU SU 1 4094 up to 20 entries Empty list VLAN Relaying Disable Enable Disable Support VLAN Relaying ID VLAN Relaying ID ID 1 4094 upto20enties 1 4094 upto20enties to 20 entries Empylis Empylis VLAN Priority E SU Data VLAN Priority SU with 0 7 Voice voice VLAN Priority AU SU GU 0 7 SU with voice 4 Management All other units 0 VLAN Priority AU SU 0 7 4 Threshold Voice Packets ToS SU with 0 255 voice ToS Precedence AU SU 0 7 3 Yes Threshold Filter Option SU Disable Disable Yes From Ethernet Only From Wlan Only Both From Ethernet amp Wlan DHCP Broadcast SU Disable Enable Disable Yes Override Filter PPPoE Broadcast SU Disable Enable Disable Ye
63. 10 3 3 13 16 of subscriber units currently associated with SysInfo 16 the AU BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Manual Ez BreezeACCESS 4 0 System M anual Alarms Parameters MIB Parameter Location in Parenthesis Alarms 710 3 3 20 brzAccessMib 20 GpsAlarms 710 3 3 20 1 Alarms 1 AlarminTable 710 3 3 20 1 1 GpsAlarms 1 AlarmIn Table Entry 710 3 3 20 1 1 1 AlarminTable 1 Alarminidx 710 3 3 20 1 1 1 1 AlarmInTableEntry 1 AlarminName 710 3 3 20 1 1 1 2 AlarmInTableEntry 2 AlarminStatus 710 3 3 20 1 1 1 3 AlarmInTableEntry 3 AlarmOutTable 710 3 3 20 1 2 GpsAlarms 2 AlarmOutTableEntry 710 3 3 20 1 2 1 AlarmOutTable 1 AlarmOutldx 710 3 3 20 1 2 1 1 AlarmOutTableEntry 1 AlarmOutName 710 3 3 20 1 2 1 2 AlarmOutTableEntry 2 AlarmOutDefinition 710 3 3 20 1 2 1 3 AlarmOutTableEntry 3 AlarmOutControl 710 3 3 20 1 2 1 4 AlarmOutTableEntry 4 AlarmOutStatus 710 3 3 20 1 2 1 5 AlarmOutTableEntry 5 Manual Revision 1 01 Alarms parameters Applicable to GU only GPS Alarms parameters Applicable to GU only Names and status of Alarms In Not accessible Applicable to GU only An Alarms In table entry Not accessible Applicable to GU only Read only Alarms In table index Applicable to GU only Alarm In name Alarms 1 to 4 can receive a name The other are read only Applicable to GU only Read only The status off or on
64. 10 3 4 3 3 TelephonySignals 3 MinimumFlashDetectTimeOut 710 3 4 3 3 1 TimeOuts 1 MaximumFlashDetectTimeOut 710 3 4 3 3 2 TimeOuts 2 DisconnectTimeOut 710 3 4 3 3 3 TimeOuts 3 InterDigitTimeOut 710 3 4 3 3 4 TimeOuts 4 CalledPartyReleaseTimeOut 710 3 4 3 3 5 TimeOuts 5 Manual Revision 1 01 Time Out parameters If the TelephonyCountryStandard is set to proprietary the Time Out parameters may be configured read write For all other country standards the values are read only The minimum on hook time for identifying it as a Hook Flash The maximum on hook time for identifying it as a Hook Flash The minimum time for decision on an on hook disconnect condition Applicable only for pulse dialing The minimum time between two consecutive pulses to be considered as separating between two digits The minimum time for an on hook signal on the called party side to be considered as call disconnect BreezeACCESS 4 0 System M anual Integer 0 2 000 milliseconds Integer 0 2 000 milliseconds Integer 0 2 000 milliseconds Integer 0 2 000 milliseconds Integer 0 10 000 milliseconds Appendix B EJ Supported Traps Note is used instead of the brzacc prefix Trap Associated Parameters MIB Parameter Description Values Location in Parenthesis Traps 710 3 3 14 brzAccessMib 14 TrapSUMacAddr 710 3 3 14 1 Traps 1 TrapRssiQuality 710
65. 2 ReceivingUnits 2 PerHopStatistics 710 3 3 8 4 SiteSurvey 4 ResetPerHopStatistics 710 3 3 8 4 1 PerHopStatistics 1 MacAddressDatabase 710 3 3 8 5 SiteSurvey 5 AdbResetAllCounters 710 3 3 8 5 1 MacAddressDatabase 1 AdbTable 710 3 3 8 5 2 MacAddressDatabase 2 AdbEntry 710 3 3 8 5 2 1 AdbTable 1 Adbindex 710 3 3 8 5 2 1 1 AdbEntry 1 AdbMacAddress 710 3 3 8 5 2 1 2 AdbEntry 2 AdbMaxRate 710 3 3 8 5 2 1 3 AdbEntry 3 AdbCurrentTxRate 710 3 3 8 5 2 1 4 AdbEntry 4 AdbTxFramesTotal 710 3 3 8 5 2 1 5 AdbEntry 5 AdbTxFrames1M 710 3 3 8 5 2 1 6 AdbEntry 6 AdbTxFrames2M 710 3 3 8 5 2 1 7 AdbEntry 7 Manual Revision 1 01 Applicable to SU only Read only Represents DisplayString SIZE 32 the average Signal Strength of received frames Applicable to SU and AU Selects the Integer measurement units used to display the average rssi 0 received signal strength dBm 1 Applicable to SU and AU Applicable to SU and AU Reset the Per Hop Integer Statistics counters noReset 0 reset 1 Applicable to AU only Database by MAC Addresses for all SUs associated with the AU The databse include parameters learned by the AU from the SUs and some counters of wireless traffic between the AU and the relevant SU as measured by the AU Applicable to AU only To reset all the counters noReset 0 for all SUs in the MAC Address Databa
66. 3 1 Connecting External Devices to the GU BS AL IN and or AL OUT Connectors 3 2 Verifying PFOPECFOPeration aiar 4 1 Verifying Connectivity iaia 4 2 LED InalcatofS asca Gli 4 4 System Manual Book 4 Operations and Administration Accessing the MONIO PFOA arrasa isa 1 1 Accessing the Monitor Program using the RS 232 MON Connector 1 2 Accessing the Monitor Program using Telnet 1 4 Operating the Monitor Program 1 6 Menus dnd Parameters alano 2 1 Main Menu EE 2 2 Info Screens dE EE 2 3 Unit ConIrol MENU triada 2 6 Basic Configuration Menu eere 2 10 Site Survey Men 2 12 Advanced Configuration Menu 2 21 Configuration Download Upload sini 3 1 Table of Contents ES System Manual Appendices Appendix A Software Version Loading Procedure visioni EUER RU D LACUS E UR A 1 General M A 1 Loading an Upgrade to a Unit with FLASH Type F A 3 Loading an Upgrade to a Unit with FLASH Type S A 5 Appendix B Supported MIBs alid ADS ra B 1 BreezeACCESS System Object Identifiers B 2 DIZACCeSSMIB Qin B 4 brzPhoneMIB applicable to SU with voice only B 33 lee ele CH Traps ecu B 39 Appendix C RSSI to dBm Conversion Table
67. 3 3 14 2 Traps 2 TrapLastRssiQuality 710 3 3 14 3 Traps 3 Trap Text 710 3 3 14 4 Traps 4 Trap Toggle 710 3 3 14 5 Traps 5 LastAUMacAddress 710 3 3 14 6 Traps 6 TrapLog 710 3 3 14 7 Traps 7 TrapParameterChanged 710 3 3 14 8 Traps 8 TrapAccessRights 710 3 3 14 9 Traps 9 Trap TelnetUserlpAddress 710 3 3 14 11 Traps 11 TrapAlarmNumber 710 3 3 14 12 Traps 12 TrapAlarmName 710 3 3 14 13 Traps 13 TrapRTx 710 3 3 14 14 Traps 14 Applicable to AU only SU MAC address Applicable to SU only RSSI level of the received signal Applicable to SU only RSSI level of the received signal from the last AU with which the SU was associated Textual string for future use An On Off toggle status indicating a change in status from off to on or vice versa Applicable to SU only The MAC address of the last AU with which the SU was associated Login or logout to the monitor program via the Monitor port or Telnet A modification to one of the parameters related to CIR MIR IP Filtering Accounting Billing or VLAN The access rights used for login The IP address of a Telnet user Applicable to GU only The number of the alarm whose status has been changed Applicable to GU only The Name of the alarm whose status has been changed Applicable to AU only Retransmissions as a percentage of total transmissions MAC address Dis
68. 3 G 711 uLaw 64k 4 G 711 Alaw 64k 5 G 729AnnexA 6 G729wAnnexB 7 G729AnnexAwAnnexB off 0 g7231 1 na 255 Integer 1 8 na 255 Integer 1 8 na 255 Integer 1 16 na 255 Integer 1 16 na 255 Appendix B EI Telephony Signals MIB Parameter Location in Parenthesis TelephonySignals 710 3 4 3 brzPhonMib 3 TelephonyCountryStandard 710 3 4 3 1 TelephonySignals 1 Tones Table 710 3 4 3 2 TelephonySignals 2 TonesEntry 710 3 4 3 2 1 Tones Table 1 Tonesldx 710 3 4 3 2 1 1 TonesEntry 1 ToneName 710 3 4 3 2 1 2 TonesEntry 2 Freq1 710 3 4 3 2 1 3 TonesEntry 3 Freq2 710 3 4 3 2 1 4 TonesEntry 4 Level 710 3 4 3 2 1 5 TonesEntry 5 Level2 710 3 4 3 2 1 6 TonesEntry 6 CadenceOn 710 3 4 3 2 1 7 TonesEntry 7 CadenceOff 710 3 4 3 2 1 8 TonesEntry 8 Duration 710 3 4 3 2 1 9 TonesEntry 9 The country standard for call progress tones ringer and timeouts A table of parameters of the tones If the TelephonyCountryStandard is set to proprietary the tones parameters may be configured read write For all other country standards the values are read only Not accessible A table entry in the Tones Table Not accessible An index to the Tones Table indicating the tone type Read only The name of the tone One of the two frequencies that can be used for generating the tone Serves as the Ringer Frequen
69. 5 Voice Bytes Transmitted Parameter esses Book 4 2 15 Voice Codec Parameter eciam EN Book 4 2 57 Voice Frames Received Parameter eese eere enne Book 4 2 15 Voice Frames Transmitted Parameter c eeeee eene Book 4 2 15 Voice Hardware Version Parameter eee eee enne Book 4 2 4 Voice Packets ToS Parameter eee nere Book 4 2 46 Voice Parameters MEN adi Book 4 2 57 Voice Priority Tag Option Parameter esse Book 4 2 42 fe tee e eni Book 4 2 15 Volum e Parameter azien Book 4 2 57 W WEP KEY SEET Book 4 2 57 Wireless bank COUNTS aceea Book 4 2 13 WLAN Aging Time Parameter ui Book 4 2 31 e denim e 213230 We re on your wavelength BreezeACCESS Il Ver 0 Www alvarion com Copyright 2001 Alvarion Ltd All rights reserved Alvarion BreezeCOM Floware WALKair WALKnet BreezeNET BreezeMANAGE BreezeNET PRO BreezeNET DS BreezeACCESS BreezeLINK BreezeVIEW and or other products and or services referenced herein are either registered trademarks trademarks or service marks of Alvarion Ltd or Alvarion Inc All other names are or may be the trademarks of their respective owners
70. 5 2 Parameters BridgeParameters_2 VianiD Applicable to SU only VLAN ID for data frame Integer 710 3 3 5 2 1 tagging Applicable to Access Link only 1 4094 VLANSupport 1 0 means not applicable EthernetLinkType Applicable to AU and SU VLAN support Integer 710 3 3 5 2 2 mode Link Type accessLink 1 VLANSupport 2 The Access Link option is not available for AU trunkLink 2 hybridLink 3 ManagementVID Applicable to AU SU and GU VLAN ID for Integer 710 3 3 5 2 5 management frame tagging For SUs with 1 4094 VLANSupport 5 voice support it is also used for tagging voice 65535 means no VLAN frames RTP packets tagging VoicePriority Tag Applicable to SU with voice only Enables Integer 710 3 3 5 2 6 prioritization tagging of voice RTP frames disable 0 VLANSupport 6 according to IEEE 802 1p when enable 1 ManagementVID is 65535 No VLAN na 255 VLANForwarding VLAN Forwarding Feature Parameters 710 3 3 5 2 7 VLANSupport 7 VlanForwardingSupport Applicable to AU and SU Enables or disables Integer 710 3 3 5 2 7 1 VLAN Forwarding applicable in Trunk links disable 0 VLANForwarding 1 only enable 1 na 255 VlanForwardingTable Applicable to AU and SU A VLAN Forwarding 710 3 3 5 2 7 2 Table of up to 20 VLAN IDs of devices to VLANForwarding 2 which data frames are forwarded when VLAN Forwarding is Enabled applicable in Trunk links only Not accessible VlanFo
71. 59 Telephony Signals Parameters SU with voice support see page 2 65 Hopping Parameters GU see page 2 71 Alarm Parameters GU see page 2 73 IP Parameters AU SU and GU The IP Parameters sub menu allows configuration of the following parameters lt gt IP Address Displays the current IP address of the unit and allows the entry of a new IP address four sets of three digits separated by dots The default IP Address is 010 000 000 001 Subnet Mask Displays the current subnet mask of the unit and allows entry of a new subnet mask four sets of three digits separated by dots The default mask is 255 000 000 000 Default Gateway Address Displays the current address of the default gateway of the unit and allows entry of a new default gateway address four sets of three digits separated by dots The default is 000 000 000 000 BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Manual EZI BreezeACCESS 4 0 Operations and Administration lt gt DHCP Client DHCP Options Displays the current status of the DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol support and allows selecting a new operation mode The available options are ale Disable Use manual procedure for configuring the IP parameters ale DHCP Only Search for a DHCP Server and obtain the IP parameters from it IP Address Subnet Mask and Default Gateway Address NA 4 iN Automatic Search for a DHCP Server for configuration of the IP pa
72. 6 RetransmittedFramesVoice 710 3 3 8 2 3 17 WlanCounters 17 TotalTxErrors 710 3 3 8 2 3 19 WlanCounters 19 TotalTxErrors 710 3 3 8 2 3 20Hw WlanCounters 20 TotalTxErrorsAbr 710 3 3 8 2 3 21 WlanCounters 21 TotalTxErrorsCsl 710 3 3 8 2 3 22 WlanCounters 22 TotalTxErrorsAckTOut 710 3 3 8 2 3 23 WlanCounters 23 TotalTxErrorsFail 710 3 3 8 2 3 24 WlanCounters 24 TotalTxErrorsAckCre 710 3 3 8 2 3 25 WlanCounters 25 TotalTxErrorsRtsc 710 3 3 8 2 3 26 WlanCounters 26 TotalTxErrorsEod 710 3 3 8 2 3 27 WlanCounters 27 TotalReceivedDataFrames 710 3 3 8 2 3 28 WlanCounters 28 ReceivedDataFramesHigh 710 3 3 8 2 3 29 WlanCounters 29 ReceivedDataFramesLow 710 3 3 8 2 3 30 WlanCounters 30 Manual Revision 1 01 Applicable to SU and AU only when the ACSE Counter Option is enabled Read only The number of dropped voice frames including fax and T 38 redundant frames The voice frames that were retransmitted to the extent of the maximum allowed number of retransmissions for voice frames without being acknowledged Applicable to SU and AU Read only The total Counter number of retransmissions of frames counts all unsuccessful transmissions retransmissions Applicable to SU and AU only when the ACSE Counter Option is enabled Read only The total number of retransmissions of data frames counts all unsuccessful transmissions retransm
73. 7 NumOfRetransmissions 710 3 3 7 1 PerformanceParams 1 NumOfDwellToRetransmit 710 3 3 7 2 PerformanceParams 2 NumOfRetransToDecRate 710 3 3 7 3 PerformanceParams 3 MinContentionWin 710 3 3 7 5 PerformanceParams 5 MaxMulticastRate 710 3 3 7 6 PerformanceParams 6 CarrierSenseLevel 710 3 3 7 7 PerformanceParams 7 DwellTime 710 3 3 7 9 PerformanceParams 9 RTSThreshold 710 3 3 7 10 PerformanceParams 10 MultiRate 710 3 3 7 11 PerformanceParams 11 MultiRateSupport 710 3 3 7 11 1 MultiRate 1 MultiRateDecisionWinSize 710 3 3 7 11 2 MultiRate 2 NoOfFailuresInDecisionWindow 710 3 3 7 11 3 MultiRate 3 GpsHoppingParams 710 3 3 7 12 PerformanceParams 12 NumberOfHoppingFregs 710 3 3 7 12 1 GpsHoppingParams 1 Manual Revision 1 01 Applicable to SU and AU Maximum times to retransmit an unacknowledged packet Applicable only when the ACSEOption is disabled Applicable to SU and AU Minimum dwell periods during which an unacknowledged packet is retransmitted Applicable to SU and AU Number of unsuccessful retransmissions to decrease the transmission rate Applicable to SU and AU Determines the size of the contention window which is the time to wait before transmission for collision avoidance Applicable to SU and AU Maximum rate for transmission of multicast and broadcast messages Applicable to SU and AU Thres
74. 8 2 5 2 PerRateCounters 2 TxFrames1M 710 3 3 8 2 5 2 1 PerRateCountersSU 1 TxFrames2M 710 3 3 8 2 5 2 2 PerRateCountersSU 2 TxFrames3M 710 3 3 8 2 5 2 3 PerRateCountersSU 3 HeTxFrames1M 710 3 3 8 2 5 2 4 PerRateCountersSU 4 ReTxFrames2M 710 3 3 8 2 5 2 5 PerRateCountersSU 5 ReTxFrames3M 710 3 3 8 2 5 2 6 PerRateCountersSU 6 Applicable to SU and AU Read only The Counter number of frames received from the wireless media with errors CRC errors Applicable to SU and AU Read only The Counter number of frames discarded due to receiving multiple copies Applicable to SU and AU Read only The Counter number of data frames received from the Ethernet port that were discarded by the MIR CIR mechanism to avoid exceeding the maximum allowed information rate Applicable to SU with voice support only Applicable to SU with voice support only Counter Read only Counts the number of voice frames including fax and 1 38 redundant frames that were transmitted to the wireless link Applicable to SU with voice support only Counter Read only Counts the number of voice frames including fax and 1 38 redundant frames that were received from the wireless link Applicable to SU with voice support only Counter Read only Counts the number of voice bytes including fax and T 38 redundant bytes that were transmitted to the wireless link Applicable to SU with voice support only
75. 8 entries Set User Filter SU 0 255 0 all 8 entries Yes Range CO uo E Ir Maximum Burst AU SU 0 2000 milliseconds 5 milliseconds Duration Maximum Delay Maximum Delay 300 10000miliseconds 300 10000miliseconds 10 000 milliseconds 5 000 milliseconds 000 milliseconds Graceful 0 70 96 Kaes Degradation Limit MIR Only Option MIR Only Option Option Disable Enable Enable Disable Security Parameters Parameter Unit Range Default Run Time Updated Authentication AU SU Open System Shared Key Open System Algorithm Default Key ID Default Key ID ID aus SU WEP Key 1 4 ES SU DENN Hexadecimal Digits 0000000000 no se pe key Manual Revision 1 01 Appendix D EI Voice Parameters Parameter Unit Range Default Run Time Updated Volume SU with 20 to 0 dB 3dB Yes voice Echo Cancellation SU with Disable Enable Enable Yes voice Voice Codec SU with 1 7654321 use only the 2134 No voice digits 1 7 G723 Frames Per SU with 1 8 2 No Packet voice G729 Frames Per SU with 1 12 No Packet voice G711u Law Frames SU with 1 16 12 No Per Packet voice G729 Frames Per SU with 1 16 12 No Packet voice Voice Activity SU with Voice Activity Detection OFF Voice Activity No Detection voice Voice Activity Detection G7231 Detection OFF BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Manual EJ BreezeACCESS 4 0 System M anual Dialing Parameters Run Time Updated Pulse Diali
76. Available at the Installer and Administrator access levels Basic Configuration Enables access to the set of parameters that should be configured as a part of the installation process These parameters are also accessible from the Advanced Configuration menu Available at the Installer and Administrator access levels in SU and AU does not exist in GU Site Survey Enables activation of certain tests and viewing of various system counters Available at the Installer and Administrator access levels Advanced Configuration Enables access to all system parameters including the parameters that are included in the Basic Configuration menu Available only at the Administrator access level Exit Enables log out and exit from the monitor program Available at all access levels Manual Revision 1 01 M enus and Parameters EI Info Screens Menu BreezeACCESS AU BS Official Release Version 4 0 40 Release Date Thu Dec 20 21 05 08 2001 Info Screens Show Unit Status 2 Show Basic Parameters 3 Show Advanced Parameters S Show AII Parameters gt gt gt Figure 2 1 Info Screens Menu The Info Screens menu enables viewing of the current values of various parameter sets The parameter sets are identical to the main parameter groups in the configuration menus The user can view a specific parameter set or can elect to view all parameters S This menu is available for all access levels Show Unit S
77. BandDef 9 ScramblingMode 710 3 3 6 15 9 1 ScramblingDefinition 1 ManualSequenceDefinition 710 3 3 6 15 9 2 ScramblingDefinition 2 Applicable to SU and AU only Read only A Sub Band Table entry index Applicable to SU and AU only Read only A Sub Band in the Sub Bands Table Applicable to SU and AU only The list of hopping frequencies in the Current Hopping Sequence Not accessible Applicable to SU and AU only A Current Hopping Sequence Table entry Not accessible Applicable only to SW version 2 6 Applicable to SU and AU only Read only A frequency in the Current Hopping Sequence Table Applicable to SU and AU only Read only A Current Hopping Sequence Table index Applicable to SU and AU only Read only A frequency in the Current Hopping Sequence Table Applicable to SU and AU in BreezeACCESS XL family only Applicable only in Flexible Hopping Definition mode Defines the minimum distances between two frequencies Not available in some products that only support a 2MHz Channel Spacing Applicable to SU and AU in BreezeACCESS MMDS family only Adds MMDS channels to the list of channels to be used Applicable to SU and AU in BreezeACCESS MMDS family only Deletes MMDS channels from the list of channels to be used Applicable to SU and AU Scrambling parameters Applicable to SU and AU The method of scrambling the frequencies defined in the Flexible Hopping Definition p
78. BreezeACCESS 4 0 Commissioning NOTE E NY The Main Menu of the GU BS GPS and Alarms module does not include the Basic Configuration option Accessing the Monitor Program using Telnet 1 Connect a PC to the Ethernet port of the unit See the table below to determine the type of cable Configure the PC s IP parameters to enable connectivity with the unit the default IP Address is 10 0 0 1 Run the Telnet application Table 1 2 Required Type of Ethernet Cable Unit Type Connection to a Connection to a PC hub All SU R Units and Subscriber Units that Straight NA support a single Ethernet device SU 1D SU 1D1V Subscriber Units excluding SU R Units Crossed Straight that support multiple Ethernet devices SU 8D SU 8D1V SU BD SU BD1V 2 The Select Access Level menu appears Select the access level according to your authorized access rights You will be requested to enter your password After entering the correct password press Enter Default passwords are listed in Table 1 1 page 1 3 3 The Main Menu appears Proceed as you would after connecting via the MON port Operating the Monitor Program 1 Type an option number to open activate the option You may need to press Enter in some cases 2 Press Esc to exit a menu or option 3 You can log out and exit the monitor program from the Main Menu by selecting X exit To get to the Main Menu from anywhere in the program press the Esc key several times
79. BreezeCOM and Floware unite AAA We re on your wavelength BreezeACCESS II Ver 4 0 d System Manual BreezeACCESS System Manual Up 8 S Cat No 213230 alvar on We re on your wavelength 2002 by Alvarion Ltd All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced in any material form without the written permission of the copyright owner Trade Names BreezeACCESS BreezeNET BreezeLINK BreezeVIEW BreezeM ANAGE BreezeCONFIG and BreezeWIZARD are trade names of Alvarion Ltd Other brand and product names are registered trademarks or trademarks of their respective companies Statement of Conditions The information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice Alvarion shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing performance or use of this manual or equipment supplied with it Warranty In the following warranty text the Company shall mean Alvarion Ltd for products located outside the USA Alvarion Inc for products located in the USA This Breeze ACCESS product is warranted against defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year from date of purchase During this warranty period the Company will at its option either repair or replace products that prove to be defective For warranty service or repair the product must be returned to a service facility designated by
80. C power cable to the 48 VDC In jack marked 48V located on the front panel of the BS PS power supply If a redundant power supply module is installed connect a power cable to it as well Connect the power cable s to the 48 VDC power source and the black wire to the 48 VDC contact of the power source Connect the red wire to the Return contact Connect the shield to the ground 6 If a BS PS AC AC power supply is used connect the AC power cable to the AC jack marked AC IN located on the front panel of the BS PS AC power supply If a redundant power supply module is installed connect a power cable to that unit as well Connect the power cable s to the AC mains 7 Switch the BS PS or BS PS AC power supplies to ON Verify that all the power indicator LEDs on the front panel are on If you are using a BS PS AC power supply module verify that the OVERTEMP alarm indicator is off 8 Configure the basic parameters in all BS AU modules as described in Book 3 Commissioning Set the switches on the front panel of all BS AU modules in the chassis to ON only after all the basic parameters have been configured properly This is to avoid transmitting at undesired frequencies o n NS Disconnect the IF cable from the BS AU module before inserting or removing it to from the BS SH chassis Manual Revision 1 01 IF Based Equipment EZ Installing the GU A BS GPS and Alarms System BS GU Front Panel Y BS
81. CCESS 4 0 O perations and Administration Table 2 2 RSSI Scores vs Level in dBm of Received Signal Score 1 20 40 60 80 100 1Mbps 2Mbps 3Mbps 3Mbps 3Mbps The Best AU selection mechanism can be overridden by defining a specific AU as the preferred AU E NOTE we Although the SU selects the Best AU based on long term conditions prior to the decision time it may not always be connected to the instantaneous Best AU at any given time Note also that the decision is done only once during the scanning interval The decision may not remain the optimal one for ever If there are significant changes in deployment of neighboring AUs and the SUs served by them overall performance may be improved if the applicable SUs are reset intentionally so as to re initiate the Best AU decision process lt gt Best AU Parameters in SU Best AU Support Enables or disables the Best AU selection feature The default is Disable we If the Best AU feature is not used the SU associates with the first AU it finds whose ESSID or Operator ESSID is identical to its own ESSID Number of Scanning Attempts Defines the number of scanning cycles to be used for gathering information on neighboring AUs A higher number may result in a better decision at the cost of an increased scanning time during which the SU is not operational Valid values 1 255 Default value 20 The scanning time can be calculated based on the following
82. CCESS 4 0 System M anual MAC Address Integer 0 21 na 255 Integer disable 0 enable 1 Integer 60 mseconds na 255 Integer 0 15 na 255 Integer 0 100 Integer 0 100 Integer disable 0 enable 1 na 255 Integer 0 512 Integer na 255 Integer na 255 Integer na 255 Appendix B E SPFregs 710 3 3 6 31 2 SiteProprietary 2 SPFregsTable 710 3 3 6 31 2 1 SPFregs 1 sPFreqsEntry 710 3 3 6 31 2 1 1 SPFreqs Table 1 sPFreqldx 710 3 3 6 31 2 1 1 1 sPFreqsEntry 1 sPFirstSetFreq 710 3 3 6 31 2 1 1 2 sPFreqsEntry 2 sPSecondSetFreq 710 3 3 6 31 2 1 1 3 sPFreqsEntry 3 sPThirdSetFreq 710 3 3 6 31 2 1 1 3 sPFreqsEntry 3 Site Proprietary frequencies parameters A table of frequencies in the Site Proprietary hopping sets Not accessible An entry in the table of frequencies in the Site Proprietary hopping sets Not accessible A index of an entry in the able of frequencies in the Site Proprietary hopping sets Read Only A frequency in the first Site Proptietary hopping set Read Only A frequency in the second Site Proptietary hopping set Read Only A frequency in the third Site Proptietary hopping set Read Only BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Manual EZJ BreezeACCESS 4 0 System M anual Performance Parameters MIB Parameter Description Values Range Location in Parenthesis PerformanceParams 710 3 3 7 brzAccessMib
83. CCESS II XL and MMDS 0 15 BreezeACCESS V 0 7 na 255 Integer low0dB 0 med100B 1 high25dB 2 na 255 Integer 0 50 na 255 DisplayString SIZE 244 Up to 244 printable ASCII characters Use either MHZ resolution iaaaai or kHz resolution iaaaa bbbi Use a hyphen between two entries defining a sub band Use a comma between sub bands and or discrete frequency entries Do not use spaces DisplayString SIZE 244 Up to 244 printable ASCII characters Use either MHZ resolution iaaaai or kHz resolution iaaaa bbbi Use a hyphen between two entries defining a sub band Use a comma between sub bands and or discrete frequency entries Do not use spaces Integer eraseAll 0 noOperation 1 na 255 Integer Appendix B BIS SubBandsTableldx 710 3 3 6 15 4 1 2 SubBandEntry 2 SubBandExp 710 3 3 6 15 4 1 3 SubBandEntry 3 CurrentHoppingSeq Table 710 3 3 6 15 5 FlexSubBandDef 5 CurrentHoppingSegEntry 710 3 3 6 15 5 1 CurrentHoppingSeq Table 1 HopSegSubBand 710 3 3 6 15 5 1 1 CurrentHoppingSegEntry 1 CurrHopSegTableldx 710 3 3 6 15 5 1 2 CurrentHoppingSeqEntry 2 CurrSubBandExp 710 3 3 6 15 5 1 3 CurrentHoppingSegEntry 3 ChannelSpacing 710 3 3 6 15 5 FlexSubBandDef 5 AddFlexHopChannels 710 3 3 6 15 7 FlexSubBandDef 7 DelFlexHopChannels 710 3 3 6 15 8 FlexSubBandDef 8 ScramblingDefinition 710 3 3 6 15 9 FlexSub
84. Connectors 3 2 Chapter 1 alvarion N Setting Basic Parameters About This Chapter This chapter explains how to configure the basic parameters of the BreezeACCESS system and includes the following section lt gt Accessing the Monitor Program page 1 2 explains how to access your BreezeACCESS units for configuration lt gt Configuring Basic Parameters in Access and Subscriber Units page 1 6 outlines the basic configuration process for BreezeACCESS AU and SUs lt gt Configuring Parameters in GU A BS Units page 1 10 outlines the basic configuration process for BreezeACCESS BS GU units ETE BreezeACCESS 4 0 Commissioning Accessing the Monitor Program Accessing the Monitor Program using the RS 232 MON Connector l Use the monitor cable to connect the MON connector of the unit to the COM port of your ASCII ANSI terminal or PC The COM port connector on the monitor cable is a 9 pin D type plug 2 Run a terminal emulation program such as HyperTerminal V 3 Set the communication parameters as follows Baud Rate 9600 Data Bits 8 Stop Bits 1 Parity None Flow Control Xon Xoff Comnector Connected COM port 4 Press Enter The Select Access Level menu appears Select the access level according to your authorized access level You will be requested to enter your password After entering the correct password press Enter Table 1 1 page 1 3 lists the default password
85. D Parameter Unit Range Default Run Time Updated Endpoint Type SU with Terminal Gateway Terminal N voice Fax Relay Option SU with Disable Enable Disable N voice i N Batter Polarity Caller ID Stop dialing SU with 3 60 seconds 5 seconds Timeout voice Stop Dialing Indicator SU with voice Voice card rev D and higher SU with voice Voice card rev D and higher O O Fax Relay SU with 0 5 3 O redundancy voice es S S SU with VOICE Forward Battery Forward Battery No Reverse Battery Forward gt Reverse Battery Reverse gt Forward Battery Disable Disable ETSI 300659 1 DT AS ETSI 300659 1 RP AS ETSI 300659 1 Ringing Bellcore 202 MDMF Bellcore 202 SDMF Y Ye e BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Manual BreezeACCESS 4 0 System M anual Telephony Signals Unit Parameter Telephony Country Standard Proprietary Germany Sweden SU with voice France United Kingdom Belgium USA Chile 0 3000Hz 0 3000Hz 32 to 3 dBm 32 to 3 dBm 100 10 000 milliseconds SU with voice Manual Revision 1 01 SU with voice SU with voice SU with voice SU with voice Run Time pom eee USA Dial Tone 350 Ring Back 440 Busy 480 Congestion 480 Error 480 High Level Error 20 Dial Tone 350 Ring Back 440 Busy 480 Congestion 480 Error 480 High Level Error 0 Ring Frequency 20 Dial Tone 13 Ring Back 19
86. D Data defined in the unit are forwarded to the Ethernet port e The tag headers are removed from the data frames received from the wireless link prior to transmitting them on the Ethernet port Frames received from the Ethernet port e AVLAN data tag is inserted in all untagged frames received from the Ethernet port before transmission on BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Manual ES BreezeACCESS 4 0 O perations and Administration the wireless link The tag includes the values of the VLAN ID Data and the VLAN Priority Data parameters e Tagged frames received on Ethernet port which are designed to be forwarded to the Wireless link port are discarded including frames with priority tag for prioritization purpose only VLAN ID Management AU SU without voice and GU Applicable for all link types Sets the VLAN ID for management frames identifying remote stations for management purposes This applies to all management applications using protocols such as SNMP TFTP ICMP ping and Telnet All the servers stations using these protocols must tag the management frames they send to the unit with the value of the VLAN ID Management parameter Valid values 1 to 4094 or 65535 No VLAN Default value 65535 If VLAN ID Management is other than 65535 e Only tagged management frames with matching VLAN ID received on either the Ethernet or wireless link ports are forwarded to the unit e A VLAN Management Tag is inserted in all m
87. D ParaMeter aran lid Book 4 2 60 High Level Error Tone Parameter salis Book 4 2 66 Hoppme Parameters Ment ld Book 4 2 71 Hoppin Seguen e aurien E Book 4 2 22 el ng EE Book 4 2 23 LIODDIDE ee Book 4 2 23 Fly Bric Cink Parime eoa ta Book 4 2 42 lege Tee EE Book 4 2 3 Information Transfer Capability Parameter Book 4 2 60 Installation AED riale Book 2 3 7 Connecting the Antenna Cable AAR Book 2 1 12 GU A BS GPS and Alarms System EE Book 2 1 21 hee derer e A RN Book 2 1 13 Modular Base Station Equipment essessssooeeeesssssssosseerrsssssssees Book 2 1 15 OUIdoor BEE Book 2 1 7 Pole Mounting Outdoor Units essere Book 2 1 9 SEP M Book 2 3 7 SU NTandAUSNE Lai Book 2 1 13 Riise Book 2 2 6 SUR GUIA IN cells Book 2 2 4 Installation Guidelines SUTED E Book 2 3 4 Inter Digit Timeout Paramete 2 ica ae Book 4 2 67 Internally discarded MIR CIR Parameter Book 4 2 15 International Prefix Parametros Book 4 2 62 Inter Regional Prefix Parameter parlarci Book 4 2 62 Introducta sp Breeze ACCESS similari Book 1 1 2 IP Address Parametri Book 4 2 21 IP Dialing Indicator Parameter a a ES Book 4 2 60 IP Dianne Option Paramete amistades Book 4 2 60 IP Parameters Meni std a a ei Book 4 2 21 L LAN to Wireless Link Bridging Mode Parame
88. Description AU A E NI Stand Alone Access Unit Connectors TNC jack 50 ohm lightning protected AU NI F Cable connection to a PC crossed AU RE IF TNC jack 50 ohm lightning protected ANT N Type jack 50 ohm lightning protected AU RA IF TNC jack 50 ohm lightning protected Electrical Power consumption 25 W AU NI External power supply AC input power 100 240 Vr m s 47 63 Hz DC power output 12 V 2 5 A AU RA AU RE 12 VDC from the AU NI unit over the IF cable I E Mechanical General An indoor AU NI unit with an external AU PS power supply unit and an outdoor AU RE or AU RA radio unit AU NI Metal box desktop or wall mountable 15x 8 7 x 3 7 cm 0 34 kg AU PS Desktop unit 1 5 m DC cable 12x6x3 6 cm 0 28 kg AU RE Metal box poll or wall mountable 30 6 x 12 x 4 7 cm 1 58 kg AU RA Metal box plus an integral antenna poll or wall 72 5 x 13 x 6 2 cm 3 0 kg mountable 30 6 x 12 x 4 7 cm 72 5 x 13 x 1 5 cm Manual Revision 1 01 Specifications EZ Modular Base Station Equipment Connectors Cable connection to a PC crossed AU RE TNC jack 50 ohm lightning protected ANT N Type jack 50 ohm lightning protected BS GU ETH 10BaseT Ethernet RJ 45 with 2 embedded LEDs Cable connection to a PC straight SYNC IN 9 pin Micro D Type jack Molex 83619 9003 mates with Molex 83421 9014 or similar 4 contact closure alarm indicators SYNC OUT 9 pin Micro D Type jack Molex 83619 9003 mate
89. E The distance between any two antennas should be greater than 40 cm SU RA and SU RE The SU RA outdoor unit with its integrated antenna or the external antenna connected to the SU RE unit should be installed where it has a direct line of sight with the Base Station antenna The antenna integrated on the front side of the SU RA outdoor unit or external if using SU RE should be directed towards the Base Station The unit should be installed in a way that allows optimal alignment towards the Base Station IF Cable The outdoor unit is connected to the indoor unit by means of an IF cable carrying signaling control signals and power The IF frequency is BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Manual ETE BreezeACCESS 4 0 Installation 440 MHz The maximum allowed attenuation of the IF cable connecting the outdoor unit to the indoor unit is 15 dB at 440 MHz and the maximum allowed DC resistance the sum of the DC resistance of the inner and outer conductors is 1 5 ohm This allows for cable length of up to 30 m when using the standard RG 58 cable If longer cables are required a cable with lower attenuation and or DC resistance should be used Table 1 2 page 1 6 provides details regarding some popular cables such as the RG 58 and RG 213 If the spectral environment is polluted with noise in the 440 MHz band it is recommended to use a higher quality double shielded cable such as the LMR 200 LMR 240 and LMR 400 manufactured by Times Communicat
90. E Units with an Outdoor Radio Unit and Antenna SU A and SU E series Subscriber Units are comprised of an indoor unit SU NI and an outdoor unit lt gt In the SU A series the outdoor unit SU RA contains the radio module and an integral flat antenna lt gt In the SU E series the outdoor unit SU RE contains the radio module and an RF connector for an external antenna The indoor SU NI unit connects to the user s equipment and is powered from the mains via its SU PS power supply unit The SU NI is connected to the outdoor unit via a 50 ohm coaxial Intermediate Frequency IF cable This cable carries 440 MHz IF signals between the indoor and the outdoor units and also serves for transferring power 12 VDC management and control signals from the indoor unit to the outdoor unit Manual Revision 1 01 System Components EI Y Y v7 SA i WW d e j la k c ug gau Ae Figure 2 1 BreezeACCESS SU A E Outdoor and Indoor Units BreezeACCESS II SU A E units are available with several different levels of output power at the antenna port 4 26 dBm HP lt gt 15 dBm GP lt P 7 dBm MP lt gt 4 dBm LP The following products are available Data only Units SU X 1D 2 4 YP The unit supports one Ethernet device SU X 8D 2 4 YP The unit supports up to eight Ethernet devices eight MAC addresses SU X BD 2 4 YP The unit provides bridge functionality and can support up to a f
91. Entry 9 AdbRTx1M 710 3 3 8 5 2 1 10 AdbEntry 10 AdbRTx2M 710 3 3 8 5 2 1 11 AdbEntry 11 AdbRTx3M 710 3 3 8 5 2 1 12 AdbEntry 12 AdbTxDroppedFrames 710 3 3 8 5 2 1 13 AdbEntry 13 AdbRxFrames Total 710 3 3 8 5 2 1 14 AdbEntry 14 AdbCirTx 710 3 3 8 5 2 1 16 AdbEntry 16 AdbMirTx 710 3 3 8 5 2 1 17 AdbEntry 17 AdbCirRx 710 3 3 8 5 2 1 18 AdbEntry 18 AdbMirRx 710 3 3 8 5 2 1 194 AdbEntry 19 AdbCirMaxDelay 710 3 3 8 5 2 1 20 AdbEntry 20 AdbStatus 710 3 3 8 5 2 1 21 AdbEntry 21 AdbSwVersion 710 3 3 8 5 2 1 22 AdbEntry 22 AdbRssi 710 3 3 8 5 2 1 23 AdbEntry 23 AdbDbm 710 3 3 8 5 2 1 244 AdbEntry 24 Applicable to AU Only Read only Counts the total number of frames excluding retransmissions that were transmitted to the SU over the wireless link at 3Mbps Applicable to AU Only Read only Counts the total number of frames that were retransmitted to the SU over the wireless link Applicable to AU Only Read only Counts the total number of frames that were retransmitted to the SU over the wireless link at 1Mbps Applicable to AU Only Read only Counts the total number of frames that were retransmitted to the SU over the wireless link at 2Mbps Applicable to AU Only Read only Counts the total number of frames that were retransmitted to the SU over the wireless link at 3Mbps Applicable to AU Only Read only Count
92. GU PWR AT AZ Bd OK Ad AS AG Figure 1 13 BS GU Front Panel BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Manual ET BreezeACCESS 4 0 Installation Table 1 10 BS GU Connectors Connector Name Functionality SYNC IN Receives signals from the GPS antenna unit If more than one collocated BS GU module uses a single GPS antenna this connector is used by a Slave unit to receive synchronization signals from the Master unit SYNC OUT Sends synchronization signals to Slave BS GU modules AL IN Four connections to receive indications from external devices AL OUT Three relay outputs to external devices ETH Ethernet IOBaseT interface Use a straight cable to connect directly to a PC Use a crossed cable to connect to a hub Table 1 11 Front Panel LEDs and Switches LED Name Functionality PWR green On Power supply functioning properly Off Power supply not functioning properly On Proper signals are being received from the GPS antenna OK green Off The GPS antenna is not connected or it is not functioning properly Ethernet Activity On Receiving traffic on the Ethernet port Ethernet Connector Off No activity on the Ethernet port embedded LED green Ethernet Integrity On Unit is connected to an Ethernet segment Ethernet Connector Off Unit is not connected to an Ethernet segment Embedded LED orange Reset Press this button with a paper clip or similar object in
93. GU RA GPS Radio eve eth ve ias Book 1 3 5 GU RA to BS GU Communication eene enne Book 1 3 6 IF Indoor Outdoor Communication es Book 1 3 5 Modular Base Station Equipmen Book 1 3 9 PIV SIC al o a Book 1 3 7 Radio and Modem ict t t ais Book 1 3 2 Standards Compliance General sr isasricsniiiciriinea eniinn Book 1 3 6 SU Laica Book 1 3 7 SED aaa Book 1 3 11 A EE EE Book 1 3 13 TIPO Book 1 3 4 VOICE o tion Book 1 3 4 Start pendino Paramelet aria Book 4 2 17 Statistics Pet POP Et Book 4 2 15 allea Book 4 2 12 Volare Book 4 2 15 Stop endine Parameter sail Book 4 2 17 SEE RO TO Book 1 2 2 ANS MINS ANODI silla a Book 3 2 3 PACKING Lauda less Book 2 1 2 Subnet Mask Parametri Book 4 2 21 SUDserber UMIS ad Book 1 2 2 BE EE Book 1 2 2 Rozzi Book 1 2 5 SU I Position Antena siro Book 3 2 4 SU I I D saloni Book 2 3 7 ren e te un BE Te E ea das Book 2 3 4 Dac Erie hase alia Book 2 3 2 SU I D Aligning External Antennas ner Book 3 2 5 SU NI ren ee sl Book 2 1 13 SERRE MA RM MU EM M O Book 1 2 5 Altenme External Antenna dario P E ento PS cesa deris Book 3 2 5 ren E O RR RR O ies atea Book 2 2 6 Installation Gurdelmes uie Pete nM dada Book 2 2 4 Dac Rino EE C Book 2 2 2 Positions Antenati leleine Book 3 2 4 A A I A VIE SIVE Art Book 1 2 2 Synchronization Signal Source Parameter sss Book 4
94. ID CID signaling and if CID is supported which standard will be used disable 0 No CID signalling etsiDtAs 1 CID signalling in accordance with ETSI 300 659 1 using Dual Tone Alerting Signal etsiRpAs 2 CID signalling in accordance with ETSI 300 659 1 using Ringing Pulse Alerting Signal etsiRinging 4 CID signalling in accordance with ETSI 300 659 1 transmitting data during the first long silence between two ring patterns bellcoreMdmf 5 CID signaling in accordance with Bellcore 202 using Multiple Data Message Format MDMF which includes a name field in addition to the date time and number bellcoreSdmf 6 CID signaling in accordance with Bellcore 202 using Single Data Message Format SDMF which includes the date time and number To enable disable the use of the sign to indicate end of dialing disable The sign is interpreted as a part of the dialed sequence End of dialing is determined by the StopDialingTimeOut parameter enable The sign is interpreted as indicating end of dialing sequence To define the inactivity time following the last dialed digit that will be identified by the unit as an indication to end of dialing Voice Parameters MIB Parameter Location in Parenthesis VoiceParams 710 3 4 2 brzPhonMib 2 VoiceVolume 710 3 4 2 1 VoiceParams 1 EchoCancellation 710 3 4 2 3 VoiceParams 3 Gain of signal to earphone Enables or disables the echo canc
95. Information to User Any changes or modifications of equipment not expressly approved by the manufacturer could void the user s authority to operate the equipment Safety Considerations For the following safety considerations Instrument means the BreezeACCESS units components and their cables Caution To avoid electrical shock do not perform any servicing unless you are qualified to do so BS GU Lithium Battery Caution Danger of battery explosion if incorrectly replaced or disposed of Replace only with the same or equivilant type battery as recommended by the manufactuer Dispose of used batterys according to manufactuer s instructions Line Voltage Before connecting this instrument to the power line make sure that the voltage of the power source matches the requirements of the instrument Important Notice EN Power Cord Use only the power cord supplied with the unit Radio The instrument transmits radio energy during normal operation To avoid possible harmful exposure to this energy do not stand or work for extended periods of time in front of its antenna The long term characteristics or the possible physiological effects of Radio Frequency Electromagnetic fields have not been yet fully investigated Outdoor Unit and Antenna Installation and Grounding Be sure that the outdoor unit the antenna and the supporting structure are properly installed to eliminate any physical hazard to either people or
96. J 45 with 2 embedded LEDs Cable connection to a PC SU I I D 1D IDI V straight SU I I I D 8D 8D1V BD BD1V crossed TEL units with voice RJ 11 jack POTS support DC IN 5V Standard DC phone jack to external power supply MON RS 232 3 pin low profile jack Electrical Data only units Power consumption SU I I D xD External power supply AC input power 100 250Vr m s 50 60 Hz DC power output 5V 1 5A max Data and voice units Power consumption SU I I D xD1V External power supply AC input power 100 250Vr m s 50 60 Hz DC power output 5V 5A max Mechanical General An indoor unit with an external power supply unit SU I I D Metal box desktop or wall mountable 15x 8 7x 3 7 cm 0 35 kg excluding antennas Power supply Data Plugged directly into the mains socket 7 5 x 3 1 x 5cm 0 38 kg only units SU I I D 2 AC power pins 3 meter DC cable xD with a right angle phone plug Power supply Dataand Desktop unit 1 5m DC cable 19 5 x 13x 10 5 cm 1 82 kg voice units SU I I D xD1 V BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Manual E BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Description AU 1 1 D Connectors Antenna AU I D 2 x SMA jacks 50 ohm ETH 10Base T RJ 45 with 2 embedded LEDs Cable connection to a PC crossed DC IN 5V Standard DC phone jack to external power supply Electrical Power consumption External power supply AC input power 100 250Vr m s 50 60 Hz DC power output 5V 1 5A max M
97. LAN Data and Voice Units SU R 1D1V The unit supports one Ethernet device and has an interface to a standard analog telephone set POTS SU R 8D1V The unit supports up to eight Ethernet devices eight MAC addresses and has an interface to a standard analog telephone set POTS Manual Revision 1 01 System Components E Base Station Equipment The BreezeACCESS Access Units AU installed at the base station site provide all the functionality necessary to communicate with the remote Subscriber Units as well as to connect to the backbone of the service provider Each AU connects to the network through a standard IEEE 802 3 Ethernet 10BaseT RJ 45 interface There are 3 lines of Access Units with different architectures lt P Modular Base Station Equipment lt gt Standalone Micro Cell Access Unit lt gt AU I I D miniature indoor units Modular Base Station Equipment The Base Station equipment is based on the BS SH 3U chassis which is suitable for installation in 19 racks The chassis contains one or two power supply modules up to six active Access Unit Network Interface BS AU modules and an optional BS GU GPS and Alarms module Two different types of power supply modules are available the BS PS which is powered from a 48 VDC power source and the BS PS AC powered from the 110 230 VAC mains The optional use of two power supply modules is for fail safe operation through power supply redundancy Each BS
98. Layer 3 prioritization based on ToS packets with precedence in the ToS field that is higher than the value of the ToS Precedence Threshold parameter will also be routed to the Mid queue applicable to both tagged and untagged frames All other packets received from the Ethernet port will be routed to the Low queue Voice frames RTP packets generated by SUs with voice support as well as control and wireless management frames that are generated in the unit will be routed to the High queue Any frame coming from the Ethernet port which is designed to reach another BreezeACCESS unit via the wireless port will be sent to the High queue regardless of the configured Priority options M enus and Parameters EI The VLAN Traffic Priority menu allows viewing and setting the following parameters VLAN Priority Data SU only Applicable for Access link only Displays and sets the value of the VLAN Priority field for data frames that are transmitted to the wireless link All data frames are routed to the Low queue This parameter will only impact the way that other VLAN aware devices will handle the packet Valid values are O 7 The default value is O c we Packets Received from the Ethernet port with a ToS Precedence value higher than the ToS Precedence Threshold defined will be routed to the Mid queue VLAN Priority Management AU SU and GU Displays and sets the value of the VLAN Priority field for management frames in
99. LinkBridgeMode 710 3 3 5 4 BridgeParameters 4 BroadcastRelaying 710 3 3 5 5 BridgeParameters 5 UnicastRelaying 710 3 3 5 6 BridgeParameters 6 EthBroadcastingParameters 710 3 3 5 7 BridgeParameters 7 DHCPBroadcastOverrideFilter 710 3 3 5 7 1 EthBroadcastingParameters 1 PPPoEBroadcastOverrideFilter 710 3 3 5 7 2 EthBroadcastingParameters 2 Applicable to AU only Enables or disables VLAN Relaying applicable in Trunk links only Applicable to AU only A VLAN Relaying Table of up to 20 VLAN IDs of devices to which data frames are relayed when VLAN Relaying is Enabled applicable in Trunk links only Not accessible Applicable to AU only A VLAN Relaying Table entry applicable in Trunk links only Not accessible Applicable to AU only A read only table index for a VLAN entry in the VLAN Relaying Table Applicable to AU only The list of VLAN ID s in the VLAN ID Relaying Table To Remove a VLAN ID SET the corresponding entry to 0 To Add a new VLAN ID SET an entry which is currently 0 VLAN Traffic Priority Parameters Applicable to SU only Priority tagging for data frames Applicable to Access Link only Applicable to SU with voice only Priority tagging for voice frames Applicable to Access Link and Trunk Link only Applicable to AU SU and GU Priority tagging for management frames Applicable to units with a ManagementVID other than 65535 Applicable to AU and
100. Make sure that at all times the front of the antenna faces the general direction of the base station 4 For proper operation at least one green LED should be on If you cannot reach a point where at least one green LED is on try to improve the reception quality by placing the antenna at a higher point or in a different location e As the RSSI bar indicator is not accurate it is recommended to use the Continuous Link Quality Display test for more precise alignment of the antenna 5 Firmly secure the unit SU RA or the antenna to the pole we In some cases e g when the Subscriber Unit is very close to the Base Station the antenna may have to be installed at an appropriate angle in order to ensure that it is directed towards the base station antenna BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Manual ES BreezeACCESS 4 0 Commissioning Positioning the SU I or SU R Subscriber Unit with Omni Antennas for Optimal Operation To identify the best location for the unit you can either use the signal quality LED indicators on the front panel of the unit or view the Received Signal Strength Indication RSSI on the monitor In most installations alignment using the LEDs is sufficient The RSSI reading see RSSI Measurement and Maximum Data Rate Configuration Subscriber Units page 2 2 can be used when finer alignment is required e n Finding the optimal location for the Subscriber Unit is possible only after t
101. NI Stand Alone Access Unit 3 8 Modular Base Station Equipment 3 9 EM BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Description Chapter 1 alvarion N Introduction We re on your wavelength About This Chapter This chapter introduces the BreezeACCESS system its components and its functions EB BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Description Introducing BreezeACCESS BreezeACCESS IP Broadband Wireless Access system is an IP based access system that supports wireless data and voice services employing wireless packet switched data technology to support high speed IP services including fast access to the Internet and Virtual Private Networks BreezeACCESS users are provided with a network connection that is always on supporting access to the Internet and other IP services at data rates of up to 3 Mbps BreezeACCESS can also support high quality telephony using the ITU T H 323 industry standard for Voice over IP communications The system is designed for cellular like deployment allowing systems of various sizes and structures to be constructed A system may include any number of cells each containing several Access Units to better cover densely populated areas The BreezeACCESS system allows the Maximum data burst Information Rate MIR and Committed Information Rate CIR for both uplink and downlink to be defined separately for each subscriber This enables a variety of Class of Serv
102. Or Desktop universal power transformer with an AC power cable Data Voice units lt gt Mounting bracket for wall or ceiling installation lt gt A torque key for the antenna connectors SU I D units AU 1 I D Access Unit lt gt Access Unit AU I with 2 integral omni antennas Or AU I D with connectors to external antenna s 5 VDC universal power adaptor Mounting bracket for wall or ceiling installation A torque key for the antenna connectors AU I D units Monitor cable 9992 Documentation CD Other Items Required for Installation lt P Antenna and RF cable according to specific installation conditions for units with external separate antennas 4 Ethernet cable to connect the equipment to the Ethernet outlet see Table 3 1 page 3 3 lt gt Telephone cord for connecting a Subscriber Unit with voice support to a telephone set RJ 11 connector at the Subscriber Unit side lt gt Installation tools and materials For local configuration of parameters Manual Revision 1 01 Indoor SU I and AU I Units lt gt A portable PC with Terminal Emulation software and Monitor cable Monitor cable is supplied with Access Units Or lt P A portable PC equipped with an Ethernet card Telnet software and an Ethernet cable see Table 3 1 page 3 3 Items marked with an asterisk are available as options from Alvarion Table 3 1 Required type of Ethernet cable Unit Type Connection toa
103. Parameters MIB Parameter Description Values Location in Parenthesis DialingParams 710 3 4 1 brzPhonMib 1 PulseDialing 710 3 4 1 1 DialingParams 1 GateKeeperOption 710 3 4 1 2 DialingParams 2 GkGwlpAddress 710 3 4 1 3 DialingParams 3 MyTelephoneNumber 710 3 4 1 4 DialingParams 4 H323TerminallD 710 3 4 1 5 DialingParams 5 IpDialingOption 710 3 4 1 8 DialingParams 8 IpDialingindicator 710 3 4 1 9 DialingParams 9 AutomaticPrefix 710 3 4 1 10 DialingParams 10 Enables disables automatic pulse dialing detection Enables disables communicating with the Gatekeeper for call management purposes IP Address of the Gateway Gatekeeper The parameters must be specified if the GateKeeperOption is enabled The telephone number as specified in the Gateway if GateKeeperOption is disabled If the GateKeeperOption is enabled the number is transmitted to the Gatekeeper The H323 Terminal ID name to be used for calling the unit if the feature is enabled Applicable only if the GateKeeperOption is enabled Enables disables dialing using IP addresses Specifies the prefix used to identify an IP dialing string Specifies a default prefix number of Gateway trunk to be automatically inserted before the dialed number Integer disable 0 enable 1 na 255 Integer disable 0 enable 1 na 255 IP address DisplayString SIZE 0 10
104. Power off WIRELESS Wireless Link Blinking Receiving packets from the wireless link LINK Activity Off no reception of packets from the wireless link No subscribers 1 8 subscribers 00 000 9 16 subscribers 17 or more subscribers eee 460 LOAD Number of active subscriber units BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Manual ERU BreezeACCESS 4 0 Commissioning Manual Revision 1 01 BreezeACCESS Il System Manual Book 4 Operations and Administration ALA e S alvarion We re on your wavelength Operations and Administration alvarion N Table of Contents We re on your wavelength Accessing the Monitor Program sees enne emen nnn nnn nnn 1 1 Accessing the Monitor Program using the RS 232 MON Connector 1x srsrsiiieiiiiiiiii 1 2 Accessing the Monitor Program using Telnet 1 4 Operating the Monitor Program 1 6 Menus and Parameters ima 2 1 LER Q 2 2 Info Screens Menu insano 2 3 Show ABl M T eini aa 2 3 Show Basic Parameters i 2 5 Show Advanced Parameters 2 5 Show All Parameters aria 2 5 Unit Control MENU cnica 2 6 Basic Configuration Menu cesses 2 10 Site Survey MENU ini 2 12 Traffic Statistics AU and GU 2 12 Voice Statistics SU with Voice Support Only 2 15 Pe
105. RC Level Message MSG Level Warning WRN Level Error ERR Level Fatal FTL Level Log None The default selection is Fatal FTL Level Display Event Log Displays how many events are logged and selects the number of events to be displayed up to 1000 The display of each event includes the event time elapsed time since last reset the severity level and a message string The events are displayed in descending order with the most recent event displayed first sis Erase Event Log Clears the event log BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Manual EJ BreezeACCESS 4 0 Operations and Administration Basic Configuration Menu The Basic Configuration menu includes all the parameters that are necessary for the initial installation and operation of the unit Once the unit is properly installed and operational other parameters can be configured either locally using the monitor program or remotely using Telnet SNMP management or TFTP for loading to the unit a pre prepared configuration file For more information about the initial configuration of BreezeACCESS units see Book 3 Commissioning The Basic Configuration menu includes the following submenu parameters IP Parameters lt P IP Address see page 2 21 lt P Subnet Mask see page 2 21 lt P Default Gateway Address see page 2 21 lt DHCP Client see page 2 22 Air Interface Parameters lt P ESSID see page 2 24 Operator ESSID Parameters AU see page 2 24 Hoppi
106. S is used without a GU A BS than it must be configured to Idle mode When using the GU A BS for synchronizing the access units all access units must be configured as Slave units In countries where synchronization of units is not allowed for compliance with local radio regulations all access units are configured to Idle mode Configuring The Transmit Antenna SU R and SU I units only From the Basic Configuration menu select Transmit Antenna The Transmit Antenna configuration screen appears Enter the required option Antenna 1 Antenna 2 or Both Antennas Configuring VLAN Parameters 1 From the Basic Configuration menu select VLAN Support The VLAN Support menu appears 2 From the VLAN Support menu select VLAN Link Type The VLAN Link Type configuration screen appears Select the required option Hybrid Access or Trunk Link 3 From the VLAN Support menu select VLAN ID Management VLAN ID Voice and Management in subscriber units with voice support The VLAN ID Management or VLAN ID Voice and Management configuration screen appears Select the required VLAN ID value enter 65535 for no VLAN Configuring Best AU Parameters SU Only 1 From the Basic Configuration menu select Best AU Parameters The Best AU Parameters menu opens Manual Revision 1 01 Setting Basic Parameters ET we 2 From the Best AU Parameters menu select Best AU Support Select the required option Enable or Disable Co
107. Therefore only relevant information is transmitted using less bandwidth than during voice activity intervals This allows for a better overall utilization of the available bandwidth Voice Activity Detection is not applicable when using the G711 codec Voice Activity Detection is implemented automatically in G729wAnnexB and G729 Annex A w Annex B Annex B activates the silence compression Available options are Voice Activity Detection OFF Manual Revision 1 01 M enus and Parameters EI Voice Activity Detection G7231 enable when using G723 1 compression The default selection is Voice Activity Detection OFF Dialing Parameters Subscriber Units with Voice Support Only The parameters in the Dialing Parameters menu include the following options 4 Pulse Dialing Enables or disables the automatic pulse dialing detection feature to support telephones with pulse dialing The default selection is Enable lt gt Gatekeeper Option If set to Enable the unit will communicate with the Gatekeeper to resolve the destination telephone number into the IP address and to register its own phone number and IP address with the Gatekeeper The default selection is Disable lt gt GateKeeper GateWay IP Address Specifys the IP address of the Gateway Gatekeeper If the Gatekeeper Option parameter see above is set to Enable an IP address must be specified The default value is 000 000 000 000 lt gt Alternat
108. To download the configuration file from the same unit tftp 206 25 63 65 get private cmr Suconf N Activating Set Complete Operator Defaults will result in loss of connectivity If the unit is managed remotely you may lose the ability to communicate with it vis Set Partial Operator Defaults Sets all parameters to the values of the Operator Defaults configuration except for parameters that are necessary to maintain connectivity and to enable management These are the parameters included in the Basic Configuration menu with the exception of the Maximum Data Rate parameter In addition Passwords and VLAN parameters are not changed Save Current Configuration As Operator Defaults Defines the current configuration of the unit as the Operator Defaults configuration This option is only available with Administrator access rights lt gt Change Unit Name Changes the name of the unit which is also the system name in MIB2 This name is also used as the prompt of the monitor program menus Valid values A string of up to 32 printable ASCII characters 4 Change Password Changes the password s A user with Installer access rights can change the passwords for Read Only and Installer levels A user with Administrator access rights can change the passwords of all levels Valid values A string of up to 8 printable ASCII characters Table 1 1 page 1 3 lists the default passwords for each of the access levels e CI The Passw
109. Toggle TrapRTx A trap indicating power up after Reset UnitMacAddr TrapLog TrapAccessRights TrapTelnetUserlpAddress TrapParameterChanged brzacc Trap Toggle AlarmName AlarmNumber brzacc Trap Toggle AlarmName AlarmNumber Trap Toggle Appendix B pa BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Manual E BreezeACCESS 4 0 System M anual Manual Revision 1 01 e Appendix C alvarion N RSSI to dBm Conversion Table SU A E AU A E P DN 48 Eh A A N Q2 W 1 I oo CH BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Manual SU R and SU l men 85 59 88 58 e E EN EN 91 55 92 54 93 53 52 51 0 DS NO 00 I I N O 48 47 46 KE 44 Se i ed ES LONE E MEN CNN mo m I oo oo Gei co N 0 EI GA ON Nel 42 41 RE i e STI ES EEC C E ii EI dl C NENNEN BE Li er i TL i sii i i 81 78 J I i DD w N I QI ON alal n AN Go BI Y poa LA ii ON ON SE UA O ZI I i l Manual Revision 1 01 pes Ml Appendix D alvarion Parameters List Unit Control Parameters Parameter Unit Range Default Run Time Updated Change Unit Name All Up to 32 printable ASCII Empty String Yes characters All Up to 8 printable ASCII public Yes For characters access from Monitor or Telnet only Change Installer All Up to 8 printable ASCII user Yes For Password characters access from Monitor or Telnet only Chan
110. U Applicable to AU only A secondary ESSID to support upgrade of existing installations All AUs in the region should be configured to the same Operator ESSID to allow a new SU to associate with any AU Applicable to SU only Read only The ESSID of the associated AU Best AU Parameters Applicable to SU only Disable enable the Best AU selection mechanism Applicable to SU only The number of scanning attempts to collect information for the Best AU decision Applicable to SU only A table of data on neighboring AUs Not accessible Applicable to SU only An entry in the Neighbor AU Table Not accessible Applicable to SU only Read only A MAC address of an AU in the Neighbor AU Table Applicable to SU only Read only The ESSID of an AU in the Neighbor AU Table Applicable to SU only Read only The received signal strength in RSSI units of an AU in the Neighbor AU Table Applicable to SU only Read only Neighbor AU association load status in the Neighbor AU Table Applicable to SU only Read only Neighbor AU mark in the Neighbor AU Table Applicable to SU only Read only An index of an entry in the Neighbor AU Table Integer Low 0 high 1 medium 2 Integer SU 0 255 RSSI units AU 0 100 retransmissions Integer 0 99 na 255 DisplayString SIZE 31 Up to 31 printable ASCII characters case sensitive DisplayString SIZE 31 Up to 31 printable ASCII characters c
111. Units 2 4 SU R High Power Indoor Units 2 5 Base Station Equipment eee eeseeee ess 2 7 Modular Base Station Equipment 2 7 AU A E NI Standalone Micro Cell Access Unit 2 10 AU I I D Miniature Indoor Units 2 10 Networking Equipment e eee eere eee 2 12 Management Systems eeeeeeeeeee er eeee enne nnn 2 13 scr c im 2 13 Breeze DINIPIO ail iii 2 13 SpecificationS smart ren 3 1 System Specifications ooooccccoconancnconcnncnccnnannnnnnnannnnrnnannnnrranannnns 3 2 Radio and Modem esses 3 2 BreezeACCESS Il Radio Regulatory Standards 3 3 Data COMMUNICATION siria 3 4 Voice Fax Subscriber Units with voice support 3 4 Telephony Subscriber Units with voice support 3 4 IF Indoor Outdoor Communication SU A E AU A E NI AU A E BS cccoocccccccocccnnnoconcnnnonancnnnnos 3 5 Configuration and Management sssnsennssnenereesrnreesrreeene 3 5 GU RA GPS Radio osvaldo 3 5 GU RA to BS GU Communication 3 6 ENVIFOAMENAI rp 3 6 Standards Compliance General 3 6 Physical Specifications eee eese 3 7 SU A E Subscriber DIE ici 3 7 AU A E
112. Write Community Applicable to SU and AU Defines the maximum time the unit waits for an Acknowledgment ACK message before retransmission Defining a higher range causes the unit to wait a longer time for ACKs before retransmission Low Up to 10km Medium Up to 20km High Greater than 20km Applicable to SU and AU in BreezeACCESS XL family Not applicable to units that support only Flexible Hopping Definition for setting the hopping frequencies e g 3 3a band Not applicable in Flexible Hopping Definition mode Determines the beginning of the actual hopping band or single channel frequency relative to the beginning of the radio band Start of hopping band channel Start of radio band 2 X Frequency Offset Applicable to SU R SU I and AU I units only Enables the selection of the antenna s to be used for transmission Applicable to AU in BreezeACCESS II family only Determines the hopping sequence to be used Different AUs in the same geographical area should use different Hopping Sequences from the same Hopping Set The valid range is dependant on the Country Standard Applicable to AU in BreezeACCESS II family only Determines the hopping set to be used All AUs in the same geographical area should use the same Hopping Set Values Range DisplayString SIZE 31 Up to 31 printable case sensitive ASCII characters Integer Low 0 Medium 1 High 2 na 255 Integer na 255 The valid
113. You can also exit the monitor program from anywhere in the program by simultaneously pressing the Ctrl and X keys Manual Revision 1 01 Setting Basic Parameters E L The program will terminate automatically after a given period of inactivity specified by the Log Out Timer parameter 4 Reset the unit after making configuration changes for the new values to take effect BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Manual ETE BreezeACCESS 4 0 Commissioning Configuring Basic Parameters in Access and Subscriber Units Introduction The Basic Configuration menu includes all the parameters that are necessary for the initial installation and operation of BreezeACCESS units Once the unit is properly installed and operational other parameters can be configured using the monitor program or via either the Ethernet port or the wireless link using Telnet or SNMP management Refer to Book 4 Operations and Administration for detailed information on the applicable parameters Configuring IP Parameters 1 From the Basic Configuration menu select the DHCP Client menu 2 From the DHCP Client menu select the DHCP Options menu and choose the required option Disable DHCP Only or Automatic lt P If you have selected Disable configure the following parameters From the Basic Configuration menu select IP Address The IP Address configuration screen appears Enter the required IP address From the Basic Configuration menu select Subnet
114. a VLAN ID that is not a member of the unit s VLAN Relaying List will be discarded e K If VLAN Relaying is enabled and you manage your devices from behind an SU unit make sure to include in the Relaying List the VLAN ID Management or VLAN ID Management amp Voice of all units that should be managed when relaying via the wireless port of the AU unit If also VLAN Forwarding is enabled in the AU these VLAN IDs should also be included in the Forwarding List The following table summarizes the functionality of the data port for a Trunk link BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Manual E BreezeACCESS 4 0 Operations and Administration Table 2 8 VLAN Data Port Functionality Summary Trunk Link Action Data Port SU and AU Accept from Ethernet Tagged frames If Forwarding is enabled only frames with VLAN ID values which are included in the Forwarding list are forwarded Accept from Wireless Tagged frames If Forwarding is enabled only frames with VLAN ID values which are included in the Forwarding list are forwarded Hybrid Link Transfers both tagged and untagged frames since the devices connected to it can be either VLAN aware or VLAN unaware This is equivalent to defining no VLAN support as the unit is transparent to VLAN The following table summarizes the functionality of the data port for an Hybrid link Table 2 9 VLAN Data Port Functionality Summary Hybrid Link Action Data Port E m and AU Accept from Et
115. al transmission It usually uses the antenna last used for successful transmission In installations where a model that can support antenna diversity is connected to a single antenna Transmit Antenna Diversity should be configured to transmit only from that single antenna Available selections are Use Two Antennas Use Antenna No 1 Use Antenna No 2 The default selection is Use Antenna No 1 4 Receive Attenuation Control SU A E units Displays the current attenuation introduced into the receiver circuits and allows entry of a different attenuation value The available Receive Attenuation values are 0 dB no attenuation 10 dB and 25 dB The effect of inserting such attenuation in the receive circuit is equivalent to reducing the level of the received signal including both signal and noise by 2 dB when selecting 10 dB attenuation and 12 dB when selecting 25 dB attenuation The default is 0 dB lt gt ACSE Parameters The ACSE Adaptive Circuit Switched Emulation Voice Scheduler is a proprietary enhanced air protocol that provides guaranteed delay and jitter properties for voice sessions by reserving specific time slots for each active telephone call The ACSE Voice Scheduler allows the delivery of high quality voice while maintaining the inherent efficiency of statistically multiplexed packet based networks If the ACSE Voice Scheduler is enabled an AU can support a higher number of good quality voice sessions Th
116. alues Range Location in Parenthesis IpParams 710 3 3 11 brzAccessMib 11 UnitlpAddress 710 3 3 11 1 IpParams 1 SubNetMask 710 3 3 11 2 lpParams 2 DefaultGWAddress 710 3 3 11 3 IpParams 3 UseDhcp 710 3 3 11 4 IpParams 4 RunlPaddr 710 3 3 11 5 IpParams 5 RunSubNetMask 710 3 3 11 6 IpParams 6 RunDefaultIPGateway 710 3 3 11 7 IpParams 7 Access IODHCP 710 3 3 11 8 IpParams 8 Manual Revision 1 01 Applicable to all products IP address of the unit Applicable to all products Subnet mask of the unit Applicable to all products Default gateway IP address of the unit Applicable to all products DHCP client mode of operation disabled Use regular manual methods to configure IP parameters dHCP Only Use DHCP server to configure IP parameters automatic Use DHCP server to configure IP parameters If a DHCP server is not available use configured values for UnitlpAddress SubNetMask and DefaultGWAddress Applicable to all products Read only The run time IP address If DHCP is used the Run Time IP Address is the address given to the unit by the server Otherwise it is the manualy configured address Applicable to all products Read only The run time Subnet Mask If DHCP is used the Run Time Subnet Mask is the mask given to the unit by the server Otherwise it is the manualy configured mask Applicable to all products Read only The run time G
117. ambledSeqEntry 710 3 3 6 15 9 5 1 ScrambledSegTable 1 ScrambledSeqTableldx 710 3 3 6 15 9 5 1 1 ScrambledSegeEntry 1 ScrambledSeqFreqldx 710 3 3 6 15 9 5 1 2 ScrambledSegEntry 2 CallAgingTime 710 3 3 6 16 Airlnterface 16 SecurityParameters 710 3 3 6 17 Airlnterface 17 PrivacyOptionImplemented 710 3 3 6 17 1 SecurityParameters 1 AuthenticationAlgorithm 710 3 3 6 17 2 SecurityParameters 2 DefaultKeyID 710 3 3 6 17 3 SecurityParameters 3 WEPKey1 710 3 3 6 17 4 SecurityParameters 4 WEPKey2 710 3 3 6 17 5 SecurityParameters 5 WEPKey3 710 3 3 6 17 6 SecurityParameters 6 WEPKey4 710 3 3 6 17 7 SecurityParameters 7 Manual Revision 1 01 Applicable to SU and AU Erase the manually configured sequence Applicable to AU only The Spanning Factor to be used by the Enhanced Scrambling mechanism The Spanning Factor should be chosen so that the GCD Greater Common Divisor of the Spanning Factor and the Number of Frequencies would be 1 e g for 8 frequencies possible values for the Spanning Factor are 1 3 5 and 7 The SU learns the value of the Spanning Factor from the AU Applicable to SU and AU only The scrambled sequence to be supported after next reset Not accessible Applicable to SU and AU only A Scrambled Sequence Table entry Not accessible Applicable to SU and AU only Read only A Scrambled Sequence Table entry
118. an AU that is also configured to Open System The WEP algorithm is not used Shared Key Authentication enabled The authentication messages are encrypted An SU configured to use Shared Key can be authenticated only by an AU configured to use Shared Key provided they both use the same WEP Key If the required algorithem is Shared Key do the following e Define at least one of the four WEP Keys by selecting one of them from the Security Parameters menu and entering the required key e Select Default Key ID from the Security Parameters menu and enter the number of a defined WEP key e Select Authentication Algorithm from the Security Parameters menu The Authentication Algorithm menu opens e Select Shared Key NOTE The Shared Key option cannot be selected until at least one WEP Key and the appropriate Default Key ID are configured The default is Open System M enus and Parameters ESI lt P Default Key ID Defines the ID of the key to be used for encryption of transmitted authentication messages and decryption of received authentication messages Valid values are from 1 to 4 The default is WEP KEY 1 4 WEP KEY 1 through WEP KEY 4 Enters the encryption key to be used for initialization of the pseudo random number generator used in the RC4 encryption process At least one WEP Key must be configured before the Shared Key authentication mode can be used The Subscriber Unit must use the same WEP Key that is used by
119. anagement frames generated by the unit before transmission on either the Ethernet or wireless link port The tag includes the values of the VLAN ID Management and the VLAN Priority Management parameters If VLAN ID Management is 65535 No VLAN e Only untagged management frames received on either Ethernet or wireless link ports are forwarded to the unit e Management frames generated by the unit will not be tagged The following table summarizes the functionality of the internal management port in accordance with the value of the VLAN ID Management parameter The table is valid for all link types Table 2 5 Management Port Functionality AU SU without Voice Support and GU Action Management Port internal SU Receive from Ethernet Tagged frames matching VID M Untagged frames when VID M 65535 Receive from Wireless Tagged frames matching VID M AU and SU Untagged frames when VID M 65535 Transmit Tag Insert VID M PID M Legend VID M VLAN ID Management PID M VLAN Priority Management Manual Revision 1 01 M enus and Parameters Am sis VLAN ID Voice amp Management SU with voice support only Applicable for all link types Sets the VLAN ID for voice and management frames identifying remote stations for voice communication and management purposes This applies to all units that support the H 323 protocol and to management applications using protocols such SNMP TFTP ICMP Ping and Telnet All
120. anging the speed of the terminal connected to it The allowed speeds are 9600 19200 38400 57600 and 115200 baud The default value is 9600 baud 4 Log Out Timer Enters a new Log Out Timer value If the monitor program is not used for the specified time the unit will automatically exit the monitor program The allowed range is 1 to 999 minutes The default value is 5 minutes lt gt Event Log Menu Controls the event log feature The event log is an important debugging tool and a flash memory sector is dedicated for storing it Events are classified according to their severity level Trace lowest severity Message Warning Error or Fatal highest severity The severity at which events are saved in the Event Log is configurable Events from the configured severity and higher are saved and may be displayed upon request Log history can be displayed up to the full number of current active events In the log an event is defined as active as long as it has not been erased a maximum of 1000 events may be displayed The error log may be read using TFTP with remote file name lt SNMP Read Community gt log the default SNMP Read Community is public Manual Revision 1 01 M enus and Parameters EI The Event Log Menu includes the following options Event Log Policy Determines the minimal severity level All events whose severity is equal to or higher than the defined severity are logged Valid values are Log All T
121. ars Enter the required subnet mask 5 From the Basic Configuration menu select Default Gateway Address The Default Gateway Address configuration screen appears Enter the required default gateway address Manual Revision 1 01 Configuring Hopping Parameters 1 From the Basic Configuration menu select Hopping Parameters The Hopping Parameters menu opens 2 From the Hopping Parameters menu select Number of Hopping Frequencies The Number of Hopping Frequencies configuration screen appears Enter the number of hopping frequencies used by the system You may determine the number of hopping frequencies being used by the system by viewing Number of Hopping Frequencies in the Show Basic Configuration screen of any configured AU 3 From the Hopping Parameters menu select Synchronization Signal Source The Synchronization Signal Source configuration screen appears Select the required option GPS Antenna or Internal or Local from other GU Configuring VLAN Parameters 1 From the Advanced Configuration menu select Bridge Parameters The Bridge Parameters menu appears 2 From the Bridge Parameters menu select VLAN Support The VLAN Support menu appears 3 From the VLAN Support menu select VLAN ID Management The VLAN ID Management configuration screen appears Select the required VLAN ID value enter 65535 for no VLAN Resetting the Unit After completing the process of configuring the basic parameters
122. as the newactive version Note that after the next reset the Current version will be activated again If the active version is the Shadow version and you wish to continue using it after the next Reset use the following procedure 1 From the Flash Memory Control menu select 2 Use Current Version After Reset The Use Current Version After Reset menu opens 2 Select 1 Set As Default Now and press ENTER This will actually cause the names of the two versions to switch The previous Shadow version will now be called Current and vise versa The following message will be displayed UP DOWN Image FLASH will be operational UP or DOWN refers to the location in the flash memory The loading procedure is protected An attempt to load an invalid version e g using lt SnmpWriteCommunity gt fmr when trying to load a new version to units with a FLASH Type S will be rejected Manual Revision 1 01 T alvarion We re on your waveleneth Appendix B Supported MIBs and Traps BreezeACCESS agents support the following MIBs 9994 MIB II RFC1213 BRIDGE MIB RFC1286 BreezeCOM brzAccessMib BreezeCOM brzPhoneMib BreezeCOM brznetmib EB BreezeACCESS 4 0 System M anual BreezeACCESS System Object Identifiers Path breezecom OBJECT IDENTIFIER 21 3 6 1 4 1 710 iso 1 org 3 dod 6 internet 1 private 4 enterprises 1 breezecom 710 breezecomNewOID OBJECT IDENTIFIER 1 3 6 1 4 1 710 10 breezecom 10 breez
123. as two voice sessions KA Manual Revision 1 01 ACSE Number Of Retransmissions For Data The maximum number of times that a data packet that was not acknowledged will be retransmitted When the ACSE Option is enabled this parameter overrides the Number Of Retransmissions parameter see page 2 49 This parameter has no effect when the ACSE Option is disabled This parameter is applicable to all units in deployment where the ACSE Option is enabled including units that do not support voice since they are also affected by the use of the ACSE protocol Valid values are from 0 no retransmissions to 100 The default value is 6 ACSE Number Of Retransmissions For Voice AU and SU with voice support The maximum number of times that a voice packet that was not acknowledged will be retransmitted When the ACSE Option is enabled this parameter overrides the Number Of Retransmissions parameter This parameter has no effect when the ACSE Option is disabled Valid values are from 0 no retransmissions to 100 The default value is 30 Show ACSE Parameters Displays the current settings of all ACSE parameters The display in the SU includes the ACSE Option which is only configurable in the AU It also includes the ACSE Dwell Time which is set to 60 milliseconds M enus and Parameters ES Network Management Parameters AU SU and GU This feature allows protecting the unit from trials of unauthorized access by defining a se
124. ase sensitive Integer disable 0 enable 1 na 255 Integer 1 255 MAC address DisplayString SIZE 31 Up to 31 printable SCH characters case sensitive Integer notFull 0 full 1 na 255 BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Manual NeighborAuDbm 710 3 3 6 23 3 1 7 NeighborAuEntry 7 PreferredAuMacAddress 710 3 3 6 23 5 BestAu 5 TransmitLevel 710 3 3 6 24 Airlnterface 24 ACSEParameters 710 3 3 6 27 Airlnterface 27 ACSEOption 710 3 3 6 27 1 ACSEParameters 1 ACSEDwellTime 710 3 3 6 27 2 ACSEParameters 2 ACSEMaximumVoiceSessions 710 3 3 6 27 3 ACSEParameters 3 ACSENumberOfDataRetransmissions 710 3 3 6 27 4 ACSEParameters 4 ACSENumberOfVoiceRetransmissions 710 3 3 6 27 5 ACSEParameters 5 OperatorESSIDOption 710 3 3 6 28 Airlnterface 28 MaxNumOfAssociations 710 3 3 6 29 Airlnterface 29 SiteProprietary 710 3 3 6 31 Airlnterface 31 SPNumOfFreqs 710 3 3 6 31 1 SiteProprietary 1 FirstSetNumOfFreqs 710 3 3 6 31 1 1 4SPNumOfFregs 1 SecondSetNumOfFreqs 710 3 3 6 31 1 2 SPNumOfFregs 2 ThirdSetNumOfFreqs 710 3 3 6 31 1 3 SPNumOfFregs 3 Manual Revision 1 01 Applicable to SU only Read only The received signal strength in dBm of an AU in the Neighbor AU Table Applicable to SU only The MAC address of the preferred AU overriding the Best AU selection process 00 00 all zeros in address
125. ateway IP address If DHCP is used the Run Time Gateway IP Address is the address given to the unit by the server Otherwise it is the manualy configured address Applicable to all products The port to be used for communicating with a DHCP server In GU only the fromEthernetOnly option is available IP address IP address IP address Integer disable 0 dHCPOnly 1 automatic 2 IP address IP address IP address Integer fromWlanOnly 0 fromEthernetOnly 1 fromBoth 2 Appendix B EZ System Information Parameters MIB Parameter Description Values Range Location in Parenthesis Sysinfo 710 3 3 13 brzAccessMib 13 UnitHwVersion Applicable to all products Read only DisplayString 710 3 3 13 1 Hardware platform version SIZE 0 32 SysInfo 1 VoiceHwVersion Applicable only to SU with voice Read only DisplayString 710 3 3 13 2 Voice hardware platform version SIZE 0 32 SysInfo 2 SoftwareVersion Applicable to all products Read only DisplayString 710 3 3 13 3 Running software version SIZE 0 32 SysInfo 3 ShadowVersion Applicable to all products Read only Shadow DisplayString 710 3 3 13 4 software version SIZE 0 32 SysInfo 4 SupportedMibVersion Applicable to all products Read only The DisplayString 710 3 3 13 5 supported private MIB versions SIZE 0 32 SysInfo 5 UnitMacAddress Applicable to all products Read only Unit MAC address 710 3 3 13 6 hardware
126. ave the SU associated with an AU before starting the loading process or complete the loading process before the unit resets Otherwise you will have to try again until you complete the loading process When loading is completed the following message is displayed Loading operation has been completed successfully The FLASH memory can store two software versions One version is called Current and the second version is called Shadow The new version is loaded into the Shadow backup FLASH memory To check that the new firmware was loaded properly view the firmware versions stored in the FLASH using the following procedure 1 From the Main Menu select 2 Unit Control The Unit Control menu opens 2 From the Unit Control menu select 5 Flash Memory Control The Flash Memory Control menu opens BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Manual ES BreezeACCESS 4 0 System M anual 3 From the Flash Memory Control menu select S Show Flash Versions The display appears as follows Flash Versions Current Versioni 340 59 Shadow Version A Oe AG Version After Reset 3 0 39 From the Flash Memory Control menu select the active software version using the following procedures To activate the backup shadow version 1 From the Flash Memory Control menu select 1 Reset and Boot from Shadow Version The Reset and Boot from Shadow Version menu opens 2 Select 1 Reset Now and press ENTER 3 The unit resets and the Shadow version is used
127. be forced upon detecting DTMF signals Enable Proprietary If Fast Start is enabled DTMF signal will be relayed via Q 931 sessions If Fast Start is disabled DTMF signal will be relayed via H 245 sessions The default selection is Enable 4 Endpoint Type Defines the EndpointType components in H 323 messages for interoperability with other equipment using H 323 Available options are Terminal Gateway The default is Terminal 4 Fax Relay Defines the use of T 38 protocol for relaying fax messages T 38 is a protocol dedicated to fax In the T 38 architecture fax signals are demodulated at the voice fax gateway and sent over the IP network as IP fax packets using either TCP or UDP depending on the service environment TCP provides 10096 error free transmission but the downside is reduced real time performance When congestion occurs routers discard TCP packets first UDP has good real time performance since routers do not discard datagrams as readily as TCP packets However the downside of UDP is a reduced quality of service It is possible for datagrams to get lost arrive out of order or to be duplicated A redundancy mechanism can be employed to restore IFP fax data packets At the other end of the IP network the remote gateway decodes IP fax packets and regenerates fax signals Modulation methods that can be used with the T 38 format are V 21 Channel 2 V 27ter 2400 V 27ter 4800 V 29 7200 V 29 9600 V 17 7200 V 17
128. bits of the ToS field in the IP header An IP packet received from the Ethernet port will be routed to the Mid queue if one of the following conditions is met a The precedence in the ToS field is higher than the value of the ToS Precedence Threshold parameter applicable to both tagged and untagged frames b The VLAN Priority field in a tagged frame hybrid or trunk link is higher than the value of the VLAN Priority Threshold parameter All other packets received from the Ethernet port will be routed to the Low queue Valid values are O to 7 The default value is 3 M enus and Parameters EZ Ethernet Broadcast Filtering SU only Allows defining the Layer 2 Ethernet broadcast and multicast filtering capability The Ethernet Broadcast Filtering allows enhancing the security of the system and saving bandwidth on the wireless media through blocking protocols that are typically used in the customer s LAN but are not relevant for other customers e g NetBios that is used by Microsoft Network Neighborhood Enabling this feature blocks Ethernet broadcasts and multicasts the I G bit at the destination address is set to 1 This feature should not be enabled when there is a router behind the SU The Ethernet Broadcasting Filtering menu allows viewing and setting the following parameters 4 Filter Options Defines the Ethernet broadcast filtering functionality of the unit The following options are available Disable No E
129. bled parameters must be the same for all GPS modules and Access Units in the system to enable synchronized hopping 4 Synchronization Signal Source Defines the source of the synchronization signals The possible selections are eis GPS Antenna or Internal eje Local from other GU When using a single GU it should always be configured to GPS Antenna or Internal When using several daisy chained units and a GPS antenna is connected to the first Master unit than ALL units should also be configured to GPS Antenna or Internal When using several daisy chained units without a GPS antenna than the first Master unit that generates the self synchronization signals for all units unit should be configured to GPS Antenna or Internal All other units Slave units that get the synchronization Manual Revision 1 01 M enus and Parameters EZ signals from the Master unit should be configured to Local from other GU The default is GPS Antenna or Internal we we Do not connect a GPS antenna to the BS GU module when the selected Synchronization Signal Source is Local This will cause collisions of signals and may damage the equipment Alarm Parameters GU The GU module serves also as the alarms control unit for the BreezeACCESS system and auxiliary equipment It has dry contact connections to 4 external alarm inputs Alarm In 1 through Alarm In 4 that turn on upon contact closure It also receives alarm indica
130. characters The default selection is X No H323 Terminal ID IP Dialing Option Enables or disables dialing using IP addresses The default selection is Enable IP Dialing Indicator Specifys the prefix used to identify an IP Dialing string Applicable only if the IP Dialing Option parameter see above is set to Enable Digits dialed after IP Dialing Prefix are assumed to be the destination IP address 12 and 3 digit numbers are allowed 3 digit numbers are used to dial to stations in the same subnet and 12 digit number are used to dial to any IP address If a 3 digit number is dialed the Setup message is sent to the corresponding IP address in the local subnet When dialing a 12 digit number e g abcdefghi jkl the Setup message is sent directly to the IP address abc def ghijkl Valid values up to 3 phone key pad digits 0 9 A B C D The default value is Automatic Prefix Specifys a default prefix number of the Gateway trunk port to be automatically inserted and transmitted to the gateway before the dialed number The Automatic Prefix will be inserted only if the Dialing Option parameter see below is disabled or if it is enabled and the first dialed digit is different from the defined Inter Regional Prefix Valid values up to 8 phone key pad digits 0 9 A B C D The default is X no Gateway Prefix Fast Start Enables or disables the fast connect protocol which is a H 323 Version II feature
131. cie aH OT sila Book 1 3 7 Pine Frame Lene th Parameter ia Book 4 2 16 Ping Frame Timeout Parameter iii Book 4 2 16 A O iaia Book 4 2 16 Power Level Parameter asa Book 4 2 28 PPPoE Broadcast Override Filter Parameter Book 4 2 47 Preca ON esu iii Book 2 3 6 Preferred AU MAC Address Parameter Book 4 2 26 Pulse Dialing Parametros cis Book 4 2 59 H Rate A ce cda Book 4 2 51 Receive Attenuation Control Parameter sees Book 4 2 33 Registration T TEZPaPatBetet eoe e a ae ROPA IUE PRI AE Book 4 2 62 Remove Forwarding VLAN ID Parameter Book 4 2 43 Remove Relaying VLAN ID Parameter n Book 4 2 44 Reset Counters Parameter iii ciare e cieco rie rie nie nie tense een Book 4 2 15 Reset Unit Paramete aaa Book 4 2 6 Rine Frequency Paramicier ciel Book 4 2 67 Rins Back Tone Parameter sino Book 4 2 66 Ringer Frequency Parameter vu oa Book 4 2 67 RSSI COMMS UGS nas Book 3 2 2 RSSEDISplayviO pionieri Book 4 2 20 RTS Threshold Parameter iii rie riore nennen Book 4 2 49 S Save Current Configuration As Operator Defaults Parameter Book 4 2 7 Sa e tee Book 4 2 56 Security Parameters Mella Book 4 2 56 Send SNMP Traps Parameter Aa Book 4 2 36 Sery ee Par O S aa a Book 4 2 52 Service Parameters ET a a
132. cifications for different types of BreezeACCESS units EN BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Description System Specifications Radio and Modem Frequency 2 400 2 500 GHz according to country standard Central Frequency MHz Resolution Antenna SU RA 16 dBi 20 horizontal x 210 vertical vertical polarization EN 301 525 Class TS 2 compliant 16 5 dBi 60 horizontal x 10 vertical vertical polarization EN 301 525 compliant Output Power SU A E AU A E 2dBm typical LP model at antenna port 7dBm typical MP model 15dBm typical GP model 26dBm typical HP model Output control range 20dB typical SU I I D AU I I D 17 dBm H or 10 dBm L software configurable SU R 28 dBm H or 17 dBm L software configurable Maximum Input Power 20 dBm at antenna port Gross Bit Rate 1 2 3 Mbps Receive Nominal Sensitivity NENNEN Mbps 2 Mbps 3 Mbps at antenna port BER 10E 6 SU A E AU A E 87 dBm 81 dBm 73 dBm SU VI D AU I I D 81 dBm 74 dBm 67 dBm SU R 84 dBm 77 dBm 68 dBm Modulation GFSK modulation with 2 4 8 modulation states 1 2 3 bits symbol Symbol rate 1 Msymbol sec Manual Revision 1 01 BreezeACCESS Il Radio Regulatory Standards The systems support different country standards for compliance with the applicable local radio regulations The country standards are configured at the factory The country standards determine the following a Hopping frequency band and hopping
133. concerning voice and fax traffic including T 38 redundant fax traffic The displayed information includes the accumulated numbers since the last reset for transmitted and received RTP frames and bytes lt gt Display Counters Displays the current value of the following voice counters Voice Frames Transmitted Voice Frames Received Voice Bytes Transmitted Voice Bytes Received lt gt Reset Counters Resets the voice counters Per Hop Statistics AU and SU The Per Hop Statistics provide information on performance of the wireless signal at different hopping frequencies The Per Hop Statistics menu includes the following options lt P Display Counters Displays the continuously updated statistics lt gt Reset Counters Resets the Per Hop Statistics counters The Display Counters option displays various statistics for each of the hopping frequencies In addition it displays some general wireless link performance statistics BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Manual EJ BreezeACCESS 4 0 Operations and Administration Num The number of the information row assigned automatically and sequentially by the program Freq The hopping frequency according to the hopping sequence Rx The accumulated number of frames received at the specified frequency since last reset Tx The accumulated number of frames transmitted successfully at the specified frequency since last reset RTx The accumulated number of frames re t
134. cy for Tone 6 Ring Frequency If set to 0 this frequency is not used The second frequency that can be used for generating the tone Not Applicable for Ring Frequency Tone 6 If set to O this frequency is not used The level in dBm of the first frequency Freq1 Not Applicable for Ring Frequency Tone 6 The level in dBm of the second frequency Freg2 Not Applicable for Ring Frequency Tone 6 the ringing time on in the tones silence sequence of the tone the silence time off in the tones silence sequence of the tone the maximum duration of transmitting the tone to the earphone Tone generation will cease upon hang up upon off hook for Tone 6 Ring Frequency Values INTEGER proprietary 1 germany 2 sweden 3 france 4 unitedKingdom 5 belgium 6 usa 7 chile 8 na 255 Integer 1 8 Integer Dial Tone 1 Ring Back Tone 2 Busy Tone 3 Congestion Tone 4 Call In Process Tone 5 Ring Frequency 6 Error Tone 7 High Level Error Tone 8 Integer 0 3000 Hz If Ring Frequency Tone 6 valid values are 17 20 25 50 Hz Integer 0 3000 Hz na 255 Display String 31 to 3 dBm 32 is for mute Display String 31 to 3 dBm 82 is for mute Integer 100 10 000 milliseconds Integer 100 10 000 milliseconds Integer 0 10 000 seconds 0 means that the tone is not used BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Manual TimeOuts 7
135. dard and proprietary MIBs for remote setting of operational modes and parameters The same SNMP management tools can also be used for management of other system components including Switches Routers Gateways Gatekeepers and transmission equipment The Ethernet WAN can also be used to connect to other Operation support Systems including servers Customer Care systems and AAA Authentication Authorization and Admission tools BreezeMANAGE Alvarion s SNMP based BreezeMANAGE network management application provides a powerful tool for configuring controlling monitoring and effectively managing BreezeACCESS networks from a single central network management station BreezeMANAGE together with the powerful tools available through its use under leading network management platforms provides numerous benefits to operators of BreezeACCESS networks BreezeMANAGE system requirements are lt gt BreezeMANAGE for SNMPc Castle Rock Computing SNMPc version 5 0 7d or higher excluding 5 0 8 running under Windows 98 2000 NT lt gt BreezeMANAGE for HP OV under UNIX HP OpenView version 5 0 1 or higher running on a UNIX machine under Solaris Version 2 5 or higher 4 BreezeMANAGE for HP OV under NT HP OpenView version 5 0 1 or higher running on a PC under Windows NT version 4 0 or higher with service pack 5 Client Any system supported by the network management platform such as HP UX Xterm HP OV or Windows 95 98 2000 NT 4 Database A
136. e The sign is interpreted as a part of the dialed sequence End of dialing is determined by the Stop Dialing Timeout parameter Enable The sign is interpreted as indicating end of dialing sequence Telephony Signals Subscriber Units with Voice Support Only The Telephony Signals menu defines the various call progress tones that indicate the status of a telephone call the ringer parameters and some timeouts The call progress tones are generated by the Subscriber Unit in accordance with call progress information as received from the AU or the telephony network The parameters in the Telephony Signals menu include the following options lt P Telephony Country Standard Selects the call progress tones standard The following options are available i Se ege Gpe SR SR aa fs Proprietary Allows definition of specific tones as described below Germany Sweden France United Kingdom Belgium USA Chile The default selection is USA BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Manual EI BreezeACCESS 4 0 Operations and Administration lt gt lt gt Dial Tone Defines the dial tone transmitted to the earphone to indicate that the call can be supported by the system and that the caller may start dialing Ring Back Tone Defines the tone transmitted to the earphone to indicate that the telephone of the called party is ringing Busy Tone Defines the tone transmitted to the earphone to indicate that the telephone
137. e attenuation power Control dBm dBm dBm dBm s 3 p nes mrs E ea eo nes Pa ui Di p ques ui Di ui ao poa fora ea mui b pes fes s Jet Attenuation should be introduced to decrease the transmitted power in the following cases e Ina Subscriber Unit that is relatively close to the Access Unit in order to minimize the interference to signals received by the AU from other subscriber units e nan Access Unit if there is a need to decrease the transmitted power level in order to achieve relatively small cells and to minimize the interference with the operation of neighboring cells lt gt Power Level Applicable to all SU R and SU I AU I units Sets the transmit level according to the unit s specifications In SU R units there are two options High An output power level to the antenna port of 28 dBm vis Low An output power level to the antenna port of 17 dBm Manual Revision 1 01 M enus and Parameters EI we In SU I I D and AU I I D there are two options High An output power level to the antenna port of 17 dBm Low An output power level to the antenna port of 10 dBm The default is High NOTE To comply with specific regulatory requirements certain units may be supplied with the Power Level parameter set to Low without the option to change it to High In such units the Power Level parameter is not available The power level should be decreased in the following cases To comply
138. e never activate this Alarm Out gt gt gt oo ooo A Activate if ANY of the Alarms In turns ON The default for all three Alarms Out is 0 None never activate the alarm Alarms Out Control The Alarms Out Control menu allows the functionality of the Alarms Out control mechanism to be defined Its main purpose is to support manual activation deactivation of each of the Alarms Out either locally or remotely using Telnet or SNMP For each of the three Alarms Out the following control options are available lt P O Turn Alarm OFF even if it should be ON according to the definition in the Automatic Alarms Out Definition Menu Manual Revision 1 01 M enus and Parameters EZI lt P 1 Turn Alarm ON even if it should be OFF according to the definition in the Automatic Alarms Out Definition Menu lt P 2 Automatic activate deactivate according to the definition in the Automatic Alarms Out Definition Menu The default for all three Alarms Out is 2 Automatic Show Alarm Parameters Shows the current values of the Alarms In and Alarms Out parameters as well as their current status lt gt Alarms In Names And Status Displays the names and current status ON or OFF for all Alarm In indications including internal alarms as follows SS KA KA Alarm In 1 through Alarm In 4 Name according to the name defined in the Alarms In Names Menu Alarm In 5 GPS Antenna Status Alarm In 6 NA re
139. e ACSE Voice Scheduler feature does not affect voice sessions generated by external equipment and routed via the Ethernet port of the Subscriber Unit ACSE Option Applicable only for an AU that provides services to Subscriber Units with voice capabilities To enable disable the ACSE Voice Scheduler protocol The AU controls the operation of all the SUs it serves according to the configured ACSE Option The default is Disable Maximum ACSE Voice Sessions Applicable only for an AU that provides services to Subscriber Units with voice capabilities When the ACSE voice scheduler option is disabled this parameter is not applicable and instead the BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Manual ES BreezeACCESS 4 0 O perations and Administration Oe Maximum Voice Sessions parameter see page 2 32 is used The value of the ACSE Maximum Voice Sessions parameter specifies the maximum number of simultaneous ACSE voice sessions that can be conducted by the SUs associated with this AU If the number of active voice sessions reaches this number any additional SU trying to initiate a voice session will not get a dial tone As this value increases voice quality may deteriorate as more users share the same bandwidth for voice sessions The selection range is from O to 21 The default value is 21 A voice session is defined as a voice connection between an SU and an AU A session between two SUs that are served by the same AU is counted
140. e GPS satellite system BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Manual BreezeACCESS 4 0 Commissioning LED Indicators To verify correct operation of the units view the status of the relevant LED indicators SU RA RE Outdoor Units LEDs ALARM Alarm On A problem with the power amplifier or in the indication locking process of any of the synthesizers Off Normal operation WLNK Wireless link Blinking Receiving packet from the wireless link activity Off No reception of packets from the wireless link ETH Ethernet Blinking Data received from or transmitted to Ethernet activity LAN Off No activity on the Ethernet LAN AU RA RE Outdoor Units LEDs ALARM Alarm On A problem with the power amplifier or in the indication locking process of any of the synthesizers Off Normal operation 12V IN 12 VDC On 12 VDC power is supplied to the unit Power Off 12 VDC power is not available Indication ETH Ethernet Blinking Data received from or transmitted to activity Ethernet LAN Off No activity on the Ethernet LAN Manual Revision 1 01 Verifying Proper O peration SU NI and AU NI Indoor Units LEDS PWR Power supply On After successful power up indicating that 12 VDC is supplied to the outdoor unit Off Power off or DC DC converter failure 12 VDC not supplied to the outdoor unit WLNK Wireless link Blinking Receiving packets from the wireless media activity Off No reception of
141. e Gatekeeper Option Enables or disables the Alternate Gatekeeper feature For the purposes of ensuring system availability redundancy and scalability the Gatekeeper may provide the RAS signaling function by utilizing multiple physical or logical devices referred to as Alternate Gatekeepers If the Alternate Gatekeeper Option set to Automatic Discover the Alternate Gatekeeper IP address is received from the Primary GK Otherwise in Manual Discovery mode the Alternate Gatekeeper IP address is specified by the Alternate Gatekeeper IP Address parameter see below Valid selections Disable Enable Automatic Discovery Enable Manual Discovery Default selection is Disable 4 Alternate Gatekeeper IP Address Sets the Alternate Gatekeeper IP address when Alternate Gatekeeper Option parameter see above is set to Manual The default value is 000 000 000 000 lt gt Telephone Number The telephone number as specified in the Gateway if it is required by the specific type of Gateway used Valid values up to 10 digits 0 9 The default number is 0000 0 10 zeros BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Manual EI BreezeACCESS 4 0 Operations and Administration e NOTE When using a Gateway without a Gatekeeper this number must be predefined in the Gateway lt gt H323 Terminal ID The H323 Terminal ID Name to be used for calling the terminal when the caller uses this feature e g NetMeeting Valid values up to 24
142. e current values of all the parameters included in the Advanced Configuration menu When using Read Only access rights ESSID and WEP Keys are not displayed The display includes some additional useful read only information such as the Number of Hopping Frequencies SU and AU BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Manual ES BreezeACCESS 4 0 Operations and Administration Unit Control Menu The Unit Control menu includes the following options 4 Reset Unit Resets the BreezeACCESS unit and applies any changes made to the system parameters lt gt Defaults Settings Resets the unit to a predefined set of default parameters or to save the current configuration as Operator Defaults The available options are vis Set Defaults Resets the unit to a set of default parameters The following options are available ale X Cancel Request Exits to the Unit Control menu without any change NL d IN Set Complete Factory Defaults Available only with Administrator access rights Resets the unit to the set of Alvarion s standard default values These are the default values as defined in this manual for each of the parameters After the next Reset Unit command see above all parameters will revert to their Factory Defaults value except for the Passwords o PSG K Activating Set Complete Factory Defaults will result in loss of connectivity If the unit is managed remotely you may lose the ability to communicate with it 2 e t YN
143. eased to the same value for the AU Valid values are Low up to 10 km Medium up to 20 km and High more than 20 km The default setting is Low up to 10 km lt P Maximum Number of Associations Defines the upper limit for the number of Subscriber Units that can be associated with the AU in order to guarantee the required quality of service to the customers Valid values 0 512 Default value 512 e E There is no aging time for SUs An SU will be removed from the list of associated SUs only upon occurrence of any of the following 1 The AU received from another AU a SNAP frame with the SU MAC address indicating that the SU has become associated with the other AU or 2 The AU has decided that the SU aged out following its failure to acknowledge a certain number of consecutive frames transmitted to it Thus the database of associated SUs may include units that are no longer associated with the AU If the number of associated SUs has reached the value of the Maximum Number of Associations parameter additional SUs can not be served by this AU To view the current number of associated SUs use the Display Association Info option in the MAC Address Database menu To delete entries of SUs that are no longer active the AU must be reset lt gt WLAN Aging Time AU only Displays the current Call Aging Time parameter value and configures a new value The AU maintains a Call Information database that includes listings of
144. eceived from the GPS antenna Off The GPS antenna is not connected or it is not functioning properly Manual Revision 1 01 Verifying Proper O peration E SU R LEDs Power supply On After successful power up Off Power off SIGNAL Quality of Very low quality reception or not QUALITY received RF synchronized with Access Unit signal Low quality reception usually enabling 1Mbps traffic O O O Q O e Medium quality reception usually enabling 2 Mbps traffic High quality reception usually enabling 3 Mbps traffic eee ee BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Manual BreezeACCESS 4 0 Commissioning SU I SU I D LEDs POWER Power supply A After successful power up Off Power off WIRELESS Wireless Link Blinking Receiving packets from the wireless LINK Activity link Off no reception of packets from the wireless link ETHERNET Ethernet activity Blinking Reception of data from Ethernet LAN Off No reception of data from Ethernet LAN SIGNAL Quality of Very low quality reception or not QUALITY received RF synchronized with Access Unit signal Low quality reception usually enabling 1Mbps traffic O O O O O e Medium quality reception usually enabling 2 Mbps traffic ee High quality reception usually enabling 3 Mbps traffic Manual Revision 1 01 Verifying Proper O peration EZ AU 1 AU 1 D LEDs POWER Power supply On After successful power up Off
145. echanical An indoor unit with an external power supply unit MO AUD D Metal box desktop or wall mountable box Metal box desktop or wall mountable or wall mountable 15x8 7x3 7cm 0 35 kg LUE supply Plugged directly into the mains socket 2 AC power 7 5 x 3 1 x 5cm 0 385 kg unit pins 3 meter DC cable with a right angle phone plug Manual Revision 1 01 Specifications EJ SU R Subscriber Units Connectors 2 proprietary jacks 50 ohm with special SMA adapters if needed ETH 10BaseT Ethernet RJ 45 with 2 embedded LEDs Cable connection to a PC straight TEL RJ 11 jack POTS units with voice support DC IN Standard DC phone jack to external power supply Electrical All SU R units External power supply AC input power 100 240 Vr m s 47 63 Hz DC power output 5 V 5 A max Mechanical SU R excluding Metal box to or wall mountable IE 5x11 5x3 5cm 0 7 m antennas Power Supply Desktop unit 1 5m DC cable unit 1 Desktop unit 1 5m DC cable DC cable 12x 12x59x350m 9 x 3 5 12x59x350m uk 3 uk BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Manual E BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Description Manual Revision 1 01 BreezeACCESS Il System Manual Book 2 Installation Ep e km alvarion N We re on your wavelength Installation alvarion N Table of Contents We re on your wavelength IF Based Self ein un 1 1 Packing ES Ss tin 1 2 SUA E Subscriber aaa 1 2 Modular Base Station Equipm
146. ecomBreezeACCESSproducts OBJECT IDENTIFIER 2 1 3 6 1 4 1 710 10 2 breezecomNewOID 2 breezecomBreezeACCESS ACCESS OBJECT IDENTIFIER 1 3 6 1 4 1 710 10 2 1 breezecomBreezeACCESSproducts 1 breezecomBreezeACCESS General OBJECT IDENTIFIER 1 3 6 1 4 1 710 10 2 2 breezecomBreezeACCESSproducts 2 breezecomSU AE 1D breezecomBreezeACCESS ACCESS 1 SU A E 1D 710 10 2 1 1 breezecomSU AE 8D breezecomBreezeACCESS ACCESS 2 SU A E 8D 710 10 2 1 2 breezecomSU AE BD breezecomBreezeACCESS ACCESS 3 SU A E BD 710 10 2 1 3 breezecomSU AE 1D1V breezecomBreezeACCESS ACCESS 4 SU A E 1D1V 710 10 2 1 4 breezecomSU AE 8D1V breezecomBreezeACCESS ACCESS 5 SU A E 8D1V 710 10 2 1 5 breezecomSU AE BD1V breezecomBreezeACCESS ACCESS 6 SU A E BD1V 710 10 2 1 6 breezecomSU 1D breezecomBreezeACCESS ACCESS 7 SU I 1D 710 10 2 1 7 breezecomSU 8D breezecomBreezeACCESS ACCESS 8 SU I 8D 710 10 2 1 8 breezecomSU 1D1V breezecomBreezeACCESS ACCESS 10 SU I 1D1V 710 10 2 1 10 breezecomSU 8D1V breezecomBreezeACCESS ACCESS 11 SU I 8D1V 710 10 2 1 11 breezecomSU BD1V breezecomBreezeACCESS ACCESS 12 SU I BD1V 710 10 2 1 12 breezecomSU H 1D breezecomBreezeACCESS ACCESS 13 SU R 1D 710 10 2 1 13 breezecomSU R 8D breezecomBreezeACCESS ACCESS 14 SU R 8D 710 10 2 1 14 breezecomSU H BD breezecomBreezeACCESS ACCESS 15 SU R BD 710 10 2 1 15 breezecomSU R 1D1V breezecomBreezeACCESS ACCESS 16 SU R 1D1V 710 10 2 1 16 bree
147. efault values Show All User Filtering Parameters Displays the current User Filtering Option and the list of User Filtering addresses subnet masks and ranges lt gt MIR and CIR Parameters The CIR Committed Information Rate value specifies the minimum data rate guaranteed to the applicable subscriber The MIR Maximum Information Rate value specifies the maximum data rate available for burst transmissions provided such bandwidth is available Under normal conditions the actual Information Rate IR will be between the applicable CIR and MIR values IR CIR K MIR CIR where K is between O to 1 and is determined dynamically by the AU according to overall demand in the cell and the prevailing conditions that may influence the performance of the wireless link In some situations the minimum rate CIR cannot be provided This may occur as a result of high demand and poor wireless link conditions and or high demand in cells with over subscription total CIR higher than 1600Kbps When this happens actual information rate will be lower than CIR The simple solution for managing information rate in such cases results in an unfair allocation of resources as subscribers with higher CIR can actually get an IR lower than that BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Manual EI BreezeACCESS 4 0 Operations and Administration given to subscribers with lower CIR A special algorithm for graceful degradation has been incorporated into the AU ensuring tha
148. ellation feature Integer disable 0 enableManualDiscovery 1 enableAutomaticDiscovery 2 na 255 IP Address Integer disable 0 etsi3006591 DtAs 1 etsi3006591 RpAs 2 etsi3006591 Ringing 4 bellcore202Mdmf 5 bellcore202Sdmf 6 na 255 Integer disable 0 enable 1 na 255 Integer 3 60 seconds na 255 Values Integer 0 20 dB na 255 Integer disable 0 enable 1 na 255 BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Manual 1836 BreezeACCESS 4 0 System M anual VoiceCodec 710 3 4 2 4 VoiceParams 4 VoiceActivityDetection 710 3 4 2 5 VoiceParams 5 CompressionEfficiency 710 3 4 2 6 VoiceParams 6 G723FramesPerPacket 710 3 4 2 6 1 CompressionEfficiency 1 G729FramesPerPacket 710 3 4 2 6 2 CompressionEfficiency 2 G711uFramesPer Packet 710 3 4 2 6 3 CompressionEfficiency 3 G711aFramesPerPacket 710 3 4 2 6 4 CompressionEfficiency 4 Manual Revision 1 01 The relative priority of voice codecs Enables or disables the voice activity detection VAD feature when using G7231 codec Compression Efficiency parameters Number of G723 1 voice frames in an RTP packet Number of G729A voice frames in an RTP packet Number of G11 u Law voice frames in an RTP packet Number of G11 A Law voice frames in an RTP packet DisplayString SIZE 0 120 A priorities vector of up to 7 different numbers in the range 1 7 where 1 G 723 1 2 G 729
149. en the ACSE Option is enabled it counts data and RTP frames When the ACSE Option is disabled it counts only data frames Applicable to SU and AU Read only Counts the Counter number of frames submitted to the bridge via the Low queue for transmission to the wireless media When the ACSE Option is enabled it counts data and RTP frames When the ACSE Option is disabled it counts only data frames Applicable to SU and AU only when the ACSE Counter Option is enabled Read only Counts the redundant frames submitted to the bridge for transmission to the wireless media Applicable to SU and AU only when the ACSE Counter Option is enabled Read only The number of dropped data frames The data frames that were retransmitted to the extent of the maximum allowed number of retransmissions for data frames without being acknowledged number of voice frames including fax and T 38 BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Manual For future use Applicable to SU and AU only when the ACSE Option is enabled Read only The number of voice frames including fax and redundant T 38 frames transmitted to the wireless media The count includes one count for each frame that was transmitted successfully excluding retransmissions BreezeACCESS 4 0 System M anual FramesDroppedVoice 710 3 3 8 2 3 14 WlanCounters 14 TotalRetransmittedFrames 710 3 3 8 2 3 15 WlanCounters 15 RetransmittedFramesData 710 3 3 8 2 3 16 WlanCounters 1
150. ency domains Valid values are from 0 to 9 The default value is 2 BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Manual EI BreezeACCESS 4 0 Operations and Administration NY NOTE The Number of Dwells to Retransmit is not applicable to ACSE voice frames since voice is sensitive to delay All ACSE voice frames will be retransmitted within the same dwell up to the maximum number of retransmissions allowed as defined by the ACSE Number Of Retransmissions For Voice parameter lt gt Number of Retransmissions to Decrease Rate The number of unsuccessful retransmissions that will cause an automatic decrease in the data rate before the next retransmission the lower the data rate the higher the probability that the packet will be properly received and acknowledged Valid values are from O to 10 The default value is O meaning that the rate will be decreased immediately following an unsuccessful transmission attempt at the current rate Minimum Contention Window The BreezeACCESS system uses a special mechanism based on detecting the present of a carrier signal Carrier Sense Multiple Access CSMA and analyzing the information contained in the transmissions of the AU to estimate the activity of other SUs served by the same AU The target is to minimize collisions in the wireless media resulting from trials of more than one unit to transmit at the same time The contention window is the time that a unit will wait from the time it has decided that
151. ent 1 2 Standalone AU A E NI Access Unit 1 3 Other Items Required for Installation 1 3 Guidelines for Selection of Equipment Locations 1 5 AU RA and AU RE rr 1 5 SU RA and SURE circa 1 5 Jet ee 1 5 IGIOOFEGBIPRICNT EET 1 6 Installing the Outdoor Unit 1 7 The Outdoor Unit Bottom Panel 1 7 Pole Mounting the Outdoor Unit 1 9 Connecting the Antenna Cable SU RE and AU RE 1 12 Installing the SU NI and AU NI Indoor Unit 1 13 Installing the SU NI AU NI Unit eeceeceeeee ee eeees 1 14 Installing Modular Base Station Equipment 1 15 BS SH Slot Assignments ii 1 15 IOB ue MARRE m 1 15 the BS PSA 0 E 1 16 TEPS AU taa 1 18 BS SH Chassis and Modules Installation Procedure 1 19 Installing the GU A BS GPS and Alarms System 1 21 ES el ugi E et WEE 1 21 Installing the GU RA GPS Antenna es 1 23 Installing the BS GU Module 1 24 Daisy chaining Two or More BS GU Modules 1 24 Indoor SOR UNS siones asa 2 1 PaCKINO LISIS sons is 2 2 SUR SU BSO NDS UMIE ia 2 2 Other Items Required for Installation 2 2 Installation Guidelines
152. er Book 4 2 35 Network Management Parameters Book 4 2 35 Network Management Parameters Menu Book 4 2 35 Networkine Equipment ins Book 1 2 12 Noco Pimes Parame Er aliis Book 4 2 16 Number of Associations Since Last Reset Parameter Book 4 2 4 Number of Dwells to Retransmit Parameter Book 4 2 49 Number of Failures in Multi Rate Decision Window Parameter Book 4 2 52 Number of Hopping Frequencies Parameter Book 4 2 71 Number of Retransmissions Parameter eese eene Book 4 2 49 Number of Retransmissions to Decrease Rate Parameter Book 4 2 50 Number of Scanning Attempts Parameter Book 4 2 26 O Operator ESSID Paramotor alari Book 4 2 24 Outdoor Units Bottom Pane asia dote D Book 2 1 7 Installanonia dasel oa Book 2 1 7 Pole MOMIA siii Book 2 1 9 P Packing Lists IRE Ad le D cn Book 2 1 2 RRE E E E Book 2 1 3 ED an Book 2 3 2 Ee ae Book 2 1 3 BoRS Ad Baer reentry ini n iii Book 2 1 3 Boo e EE Book 2 1 2 EE Book 2 1 2 CUAD a Book 2 1 3 SU D EE Book 2 1 2 WD Lacie Book 2 3 2 oriali Book 2 2 2 AA ae ilo Alieni ab Book 4 2 15 Performance Parametros Book 4 2 49 Performance Parameters Meninas Book 4 2 49 Per Rate OUN e Book 4 2 19 Book 4 2 20 Physical pe
153. er Units The Continuous Link Quality Display test allows a continuously updated display of the average Received Signal Strength Indication RSSI As the test measures only the desired signal of properly received frames it is a good indication of the quality of the received signal amp NOTE NY The RSSI bar display is meaningful only after the Access Unit you wish to associate with is operational and the basic parameters in the Subscriber Unit were properly configured Otherwise the unit will not be able to synchronize and associate with the Access Unit As the RSSI measurement is performed on received frames its results are meaningless as long as the unit is not associated with an Access Unit 1 From the Main Menu select Site Survey The Site Survey menu opens From the Site Survey menu select Continuous Link Quality Display On the screen you will see a continuously updated display of RSSI measurements The display can be in either dBm units or RSSI units To change the display option select RSSI Display in the Site Survey menu and choose the required option To stop the Continuous Link Quality Display test press the Esc key 2 From the Basic Configuration menu select Maximum Data Rate The Maximum Data Rate configuration screen appears 3 Configure the value of the Maximum Data Rate parameter according to the following table taking into account a 3 dB safety margin above the applicable sensitivity level Maximum Data
154. ersion of the voice module lt gt Unit Status Displays the current status of the SU There are two possible values SCANNING The SU is searching for an AU with which to associate sie ASSOCIATED The SU is associated with an AU lt AU MAC Address Displays the MAC address of the AU with which the unit is currently associated If the unit is not associated with any AU the address will be that of the IEEE broadcast address FF FF FF FF FF FF The following parameter appears for Access Units only lt gt Current Number of Associations Displays the total number of SUs associated with this AU This number may include units that are not currently active as there is no aging algorithm for associated SUs NOTE An SU will be removed from the list of associated SUs only upon occurrence of any of the following 1 The AU received from another AU a SNAP frame with the SU MAC address indicating that the SU has become associated with the other AU or 2 The AU has decided that the SU aged out following its failure to acknowledge a certain number of consecutive frames transmitted to it The following parameter appears for GPS Modules only lt gt Unit Status Indicates the status of the GPS antenna Either one of the following messages may be displayed sis UTC is available date time This message indicates that the GPS antenna has synchronized with the satellite system and that the BS GU is functioning proper
155. ese eene Book 4 2 74 Basic Contraloria cadi ii Book 4 2 10 Brtdss Paramete ei a N Book 4 2 37 Dialme Parameters a ri Book 4 2 59 Ethermet Broadcast Eterno ecen Book 4 2 47 ele uge Book 4 2 71 RS q KEE Book 4 2 3 IP Parame O II ES ee Book 4 2 21 O NEE Book 4 2 2 Network Management Parameters Book 4 2 35 Performance Parameters us Book 4 2 49 Secun y Parameters 2h ira dii Book 4 2 56 SEL VICE Palmese Book 4 2 52 Show Advanced Parameters ee t bee ea pero o er NER Sedo ne Book 4 2 5 Show Alarm Parameters oc v eg ru MEE eo ERE En Book 4 2 75 Show XI Parameters pep RR e ER EIS e UE ERA EDS tee e Eee adis Book 4 2 5 Show Basic Parameters dicas Book 4 2 5 SHOW nib dean Book 4 2 3 ME SUEY CY ila Book 4 2 12 Telephony E us a a iets Book 4 2 65 UNICO std Book 4 2 6 MOICS Parametros Book 4 2 57 Mliiero C ell Access SE Book 1 2 10 Min Flash Detect Timeout Parameter eese Book 4 2 67 Minimum Contention Window Parameter creen Book 4 2 50 MIR AU OS Ul EE Book 4 2 54 MIR SU t0 AU Parametros rss Book 4 2 54 MIR and CIR Parameters cu eere e RE Rer te ere oH Qu exa FEE t ese Book 4 2 53 Book 4 2 64 Book 4 2 65 MIWCIR Option Paramete srerenena nu Book 4 2 54 Multi Rate Decision Window Size Parameter Book 4 2 51 MultisRate Support Parameter annie Book 4 2 51 N Network Management Filtering Paramet
156. eshold The threshold is in RSSI units AUWirelessQualityT RAP 20 An AU trap indicating that the quality of the wireless link with a specific SU has changed and dropped below On or has improved above Off a threshold defined by WirelessTrapThreshold The threshold is a percents retransmissions as percentage of total transmissions PowerUpFromReset 101 MonitorStatus TRAP 102 A trap indicating that a log in or log out has been performed via the Monitor port or Telnet Includes the log in access right and the IP address of the PC performing Telnet if access is via Monitor the address is 0 ParameterChangedTRAP 103 An AU or SU trap indicating a change in a CIR MIR IP Filter Accounting or VLAN parameter GpsAlarmInTRAP 104 A GU trap indicating a change in alarm in status GpsAlarmOutTRAP 105 A GU trap indicating a change in alarm out status A GU trap indicating a change in UTC status On status is when the GU module receives UTC information from the GPS antenna This information is useful only if the GU GpsUTOstatusTRAP 106 receives also PPS signals from the GPS antenna indicated by an on status of Alarm In 5 GPS Antenna Alarm Manual Revision 1 01 An AU trap indicating a new TrapSUMacAddr association with an SU TrapSUMacAdar TrapSUMacAdar AssociatedAU LastAUMacAddress TrapRssiQuality TrapLastRssiQuality TrapToggle UnitMacAddress TrapRssiQuality Trap
157. ess The counters in the AU are reset when there is a new association with an SU including reassociations RSSI Display Option AU and SU In BreezeACCESS units running SW versions 3 X and below all measurements of received RF signal levels are displayed using arbitrary RSSI units From version 4 0 onward the conventional dBm measurement units can be used However to support users that prefer to continue using RSSI units the RSSI Display dBm option selects the measurement units to be used for displaying received signal level values Available selections dBm RSSI Default selection RSSI Manual Revision 1 01 M enus and Parameters EZ Advanced Configuration Menu The Advanced Configuration menu provides access to all the parameters including the parameters that are available through the Basic Configuration menu The Advanced Configuration menu provides access to the following menus gt gt ooo lt gt IP Parameters AU SU and GU see page 2 21 Air Interface Parameters AU and SU see page 2 22 Network Management Parameters AU SU and GU see page 2 35 Bridge Parameters AU and SU see page 2 37 VLAN Parameters GU see page 2 37 Performance Parameters AU and SU see page 2 49 Service Parameters AU and SU see page 2 52 Security Parameters AU and SU see page 2 56 Voice Parameters SU with voice support see page 2 57 Dialing Parameters SU with voice support see page 2
158. ess enable 1 of the setting in the SU na 255 The option exists in the SU only for compatibility with AUs running SW versions 3 X and lower in which case the MIR CIR support feature is controlled at the SU MirAUtoSU Applicable to SU only Sets the Maximum Integer 710 3 3 1 2 Information Rate MIR from AU to SU 32 2200 Kbps ServiceParameters 2 Must be higher than CirAUtoSU MirSUtoAU Applicable to SU only Sets the Maximum Integer 710 3 3 1 3 Information Rate MIR from SU to AU 32 2200 Kbps ServiceParameters 3 Must be higher than CirSUtoAU CirAUtoSU Applicable to SU only Sets the Committed Integer 710 3 3 1 4 Information Rate CIR from AU to SU 0 2200 Kbps ServiceParameters 4 Must be lower than MirAUtoSU CirSUtoAU Applicable to SU only Sets the Committed Integer 710 3 3 1 5 Information Rate CIR from SU to AU 0 2200 Kbps ServiceParameters 5 Must be lower than MirSUtoAU MaxDelay Applicable to SU only Sets the maximal time Integer 710 3 3 1 6 packets may be delayed by the CIR MIR 300 10 000 milliseconds ServiceParameters 6 mechanism Above the configured maximal period the packets are discarded MaxBurstDuration Applicable to SU and AU Sets the maximum Integer 710 3 3 1 7 time during which iinactivity bonusi time can be 0 2000 milliseconds ServiceParameters 7 accumulated for future burst transmissions GracefulDegradationLimit Applicable to AU only Sets the maximum limit In
159. etros Book 4 2 25 Best AU Support Parameter assiali Book 4 2 26 Breeze ACCESS EIntrOduet OB rias Book 1 1 2 Breeze CONE casita dd ER deem Dues ed Book 1 2 13 Beez MANAGE je enel ideo Mete Nen lai Book 1 2 13 Bidse Acing Time E ide Book 4 2 48 o Book 4 2 37 Bidee Parameters E dia dios Book 4 2 37 Broadcast Relaying Parameter i Book 4 2 48 BS AU hallo sac Book 2 1 18 BS PS salon camelie bio Book 2 1 15 Piece Book 2 1 3 BS PS AC Insider a Book 2 1 16 o ehr Tis E Book 2 1 3 BS SH istallare Book 2 1 15 Packs EISE o ii oa e honed dii ti ee inni ii Book 2 1 2 BS SH AC eege ee Book 2 1 2 Busy en leleine Book 4 2 66 C CAdenes Didi Book 4 2 67 Cadence Off Parameter 22 esci deve bada Book 4 2 66 CISCO Book 4 2 67 Cadence On Parameter aula Book 4 2 66 Call Agpins Time Parameter ceresna Book 4 2 31 Called Party Release Timeout Parameter sss Book 4 2 67 Carrier Sense Level Parameter auna Book 4 2 50 Change Password Parametel asis a ter tne aan Book 4 2 7 Change Unit Name Parameter o ida Book 4 2 7 CIR AU to SU Parameter ascii Book 4 2 54 CIR SU 0 AU Parametros Book 4 2 55 Commissioning AL IN and AL OUT Connectors iene Book 3 3 2 Aligning External SU I D Antenna Book 3 2 5 Aligning External SU R Antennas eese Book 3 2 5 Aligning SU lt A E Antenna iaia i Book 3 2 3 Configuring Basic Parameters ira
160. f 2 na 255 BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Manual ES BreezeACCESS 4 0 System M anual Network Management Parameters MIB Parameter Description Location in Parenthesis NwMngParameters 710 3 3 4 brzAccessMib 4 AccessToNwMng 710 3 3 4 1 NwMngParameters 1 NwMngFilter 710 3 3 4 2 NwMngParameters 2 mnglpFilterTable 710 3 3 4 3 NwMngParameters 3 mnglpFilterEntry 710 3 3 4 3 1 mnglpFilterTable 1 NwMnglpAddress 710 3 3 4 3 1 1 mnglpFilterEntry 1 NwMnglp Tableldx 710 3 3 4 3 1 2 mnglpFilterEntry 2 DeleteOneNwlpAddr 710 3 3 4 4 NwMngParameters 4 DeleteAIINwIpAddrs 710 3 3 4 5 NwMngParameters 5 AccessToNwTrap 710 3 3 4 6 NwMngParameters 6 mngTrapTable 710 3 3 4 7 NwMngParameters 7 mngTrapEntry 710 3 3 4 7 1 mngTrapTable 1 NwMngTrapCommunity 710 3 3 4 7 1 1 mngTrapEntry 1 NwMngTrapAddress 710 3 3 4 7 1 2 mngTrapEntry 2 Manual Revision 1 01 Network Management parameters Applicable to AU and SU The port to be used for remote management wlanOnly Management E from Wireless port only ethOnly Management enabled from Ethernet port only bothWlanEth Management enabled from both Wireless and Ethernet ports Applicable to AU SU and GU Disables or enables IP address based filtering of management messages SNMP Telnet TFTP on one of the ports or on both ports In GU only disable and activateOnEthPort op
161. figuring IP Parameters i 1 6 Configuring ESSID Parameters esses 1 7 Configuring Frequency Hopping Parameters AU Only 1 7 Configuring The Transmit Antenna SU R and SU I units only i 1 8 Configuring VLAN Parameters 1 8 Configuring Best AU Parameters SU Only 1 8 Configuring Preferred AU Mac Address SU Only 1 9 Configuring Security Parameters 1 9 Resetting the Unit ii 1 9 Configuring Parameters in GU A BS Units 1 10 INNOGUCHO qM RE ER E T 1 10 Configuring IP Parameters 1 10 Configuring Hopping Parameters 1 11 Configuring VLAN Parameters 1 11 Resetting the Unit et ios 1 11 Optimizing the Wireless Link eere HI nn 2 1 RSSI Measurement and Maximum Data Rate Configuration Subscriber Units erre iii 2 2 Aligning the Antenna of the SU A E Subscriber Unit 2 3 Positioning the SU I or SU R Subscriber Unit with Omni Antennas for Optimal Operation 2 4 Aligning the External Antenna of SU R and SU I D Units 2 5 EM BreezeACCESS 4 0 Commissioning Connecting External Alarm Devices 3 1 Connecting External Devices to the GU BS AL IN and or AL OUT
162. financial liabilities Alvarion and its resellers or distributors are not liable for injury damage or violation of regulations associated with the installation of outdoor units or antennas Installing the BS GU module we When adding the BS GU to an active base station it is recommended to start by reconfiguring the AU previously defined as Master to Slave then immediately inserting and configuring the Number of Hopping Frequencies parameter in the BS GU module Otherwise both the Master AU and the BS GU will send conflicting synchronization signals to the Slave AUs During this process connectivity with the Subscriber Units will be interrupted It is recommended to perform the upgrade during a planned downtime or at a time of minimal traffic Properly configuring the value of the Number of Hopping Frequencies parameter in the BS GU is mandatory for proper operation of the base station All other parameters of the BS GU module may be configured later as they do not impact the operation of the system Inserting the BS GU Module and Connecting It to the Antenna l Carefully insert the BS GU module into any of the free suitable slots in the BS SH chassis and push firmly until it is securely locked Close the captive screws attached to the module 2 Connect the 9 pin micro D Type connector of the GPS cable to the SYNC IN connector the top left connector of the BS GU module e we Deactivate the power to the BS GU unit before connect
163. formula ocanning Time secs N C 0 019 N Number of scanning attempts C Number of channels in the hopping sequence 0 019 seconds is the time spent on each channel dwell time while in scanning mode Preferred AU MAC Address Defines a specific AU with which the SU should associate Gaining control of the SUs association is a powerful tool in network management The Preferred AU MAC Address parameter is intended for Manual Revision 1 01 M enus and Parameters 227 applications where there is a need to dictate the preferred AU with whom the SU should associate To prevent the SU from associating with the first viable AU it finds the Best AU Support mechanism should be enabled Once the SU has identified the preferred AU based on its MAC address it will associate with it and terminate the scanning process If the preferred AU is not found the SU will associate with an AU according to the decision reached using the best AU algorithm Valid values MAC address string The default value for the Preferred AU MAC Address is 00 00 00 00 00 00 12 zeros meaning that there is no preferred AU Show Best AU Parameters and Data Displays the applicable information NA P4 y Neighboring AU Data table Displayed for each AU that the unit can communicate with the following parameters MAC Address Received signal strength RSSI or dBm Mark The computed quality mark for the AU Full The association load s
164. g the 48VDC power source to the module The color codes of the cable wires are Black 48 VDC Red Return The power switch turns the mains power to the power supply ON and OFF Table 1 7 BS PS LEDs Functionality Mme rom 48 VDC is available and power supply is on SV The SV power supply module is OK and power is consumed at least one BS AU module is inserted The 12V power supply module is OK and power is consumed at least one AU RA RE unit is connected The BS PS AC The BS PS AC is an AC to DC converter that provides power to all the modules installed in the BS SH chassis The BS PS AC front panel is shown in Figure 1 11 page 1 17 Manual Revision 1 01 IF Based Equipment EE O D e gt Q OVER TEMP Figure 1 11 BS PS AC Front Panel The BS PS AC provides a power input connector marked AC IN for connecting the AC power cable to the mains The ON OFF power switch controls the connection of the mains power to an AC to DC converter Table 1 8 BS PS AC LEDs Functionality Nme rom Green LED Indicates that the 3 3V power supply module is OK 3 3V power supply is not used by current Breeze ACCESS modules 12V Green LED Indicates that the 12V power supply module is OK OVER TEMP Red LED Indicates an Over Temperature condition in the power supply module V Green LED Indicates that the 5V power supply module is OK m NOTE we If the Over Temp indication stays on for more than 10
165. g the level at which the SU receives transmissions from the AU downlink RSSI If the measured RSSI is less than a certain threshold it is recommended to decrease the Maximum Data Rate of the SU in accordance with Table 3 6 including a 3 dB safety margin For best results it is recommended to also acquire the RSSI results from the AU indicating the level at which the AU receives transmissions from the specific SU uplink RSSI and to use the lower of the two numbers BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Manual ES BreezeACCESS 4 0 O perations and Administration The AU learns the Maximum Data Rate used by each SU during the association process and uses this rate for transmissions to the specific SU Allowed values are 1 2 3 Mbps The default value is 3 Mbps Manual Revision 1 01 M enus and Parameters ES Table 2 4 Recommended Maximum Data Rate Maximum Data 3Mbps 2Mbps 1Mbps Rate SU A E RSSI gt 70 dBm 785 dBm lt RSSI lt 70 dBm RSSI lt 78 dBm SU I I D RSSI gt 64dBm __ 71dBm lt RSSI lt 64dBm RSSI lt 71dBm SU R RSSD 65dBm 74dBm lt RSSI lt 65dBm RSSI lt 74dBm lt gt Acknowledge Delay Limit Increases the range of the system through increasing the time that the unit can wait for acknowledgements Increasing the range however may decrease the overall performance and achievable network throughput It should be increased only to support ranges of over 10 km If the range was increased for one SU it must be incr
166. ge Read only Password Change Administrator Password Up to 8 printable ASCII private Yes For characters access from Monitor or Telnet only Console Speed 9600 19200 38400 57600 9600 No 115200 Log Out Timer 1 999 minutes S Event Log Policy All Log All TRC Level Fatal FTL Level Yes Message MSG Level Warning WRN Level Error ERR Level Fatal FTL Level Log None Di BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Manual Site Survey Parameters Parameter Unit Range Default Run Time Updated RSSI Display AU SU RSSI dBm RSSI Yes Option IP Parameters Parameter Unit Range Default Run Time Updated IP Address IP address 10 0 0 1 Subnet Mask IP address 255 0 0 0 Default Gateway All IP address 0 0 0 0 No Address All Disable Disable No DHCP Only Automatic DHCP Option Access to DHCP AU SU From Wlan Only AU From From Ethernet Only Ethernet Only From Both Ethernet amp Wlan SU From Wlan Only Manual Revision 1 01 Appendix D Air Interface Parameters Parameter Unit Range Default Run Time Updated ESSID AU SU Up to 31 printable ASCII ESSID1 No characters Operator ESSID AU Disable Enable Enable No Option Operator ESSID AU Up to 31 printable ASCII ESSID1 No characters Deme AU ite sie ue CN ES s0 Tommee mm I 55 00 00 00 00 00 Number of Scanning 2 Attempts Preferred AU MAC Address MAC Address o P preferred Transmit Power AU A E Control SU A E IF based unit
167. gh Yes characters Alarm In 4 U Alarm Out Names G Up to 31 printable ASCII Alarm Out 1 Yes characters through Alarm Out 3 Automatic Alarm GU 1 10 N None A Any N None for all 3 Yes Out Definition Alarm Outs Alarm Out Control GU On Off Automatic Automatic for all Yes 3 Alarm Outs Manual Revision 1 01 edi l n d ex We re on your wavelength A Access Link Pierini Book 4 2 40 Access to DHCP Parameter ccc ccc cccceccescescceccecceccecceccsceeseess Book 4 2 22 Access to Network Management Parameter Book 4 2 35 Access Units PN er e i Book 1 2 10 Acknowledge Delay Limit Parameter Book 4 2 31 ACSE Number Of Retransmissions For Data Parameter Book 4 2 34 ACSE Number Of Retransmissions For Voice Parameter Book 4 2 34 ACOE ODHOD IA ppi ante nappa Book 4 2 72 ACSE ODptOBParatelet rire Book 4 2 33 ACSE Parameters Parameter urla Book 4 2 33 Add Forwarding VLAN ID Parameter Book 4 2 43 Add Relaying VLAN ID Parameter Book 4 2 43 Advanced Configuration Men Book 4 2 21 Air Interface Parameters Men Book 4 2 22 AL In and AL OUT Connectors eeeeen ener nnne Book 3 3 2 Alarm Parameters Menu Book 4 2 73 Alarms In Names And Status Parameter ee Book 4 2 75 Alarms In Names Men Book
168. gleChannel3 8GHz 42 BreezeACCESS V frgs_7GHzISMUsFCC 74 frg5_7GHzInternational 75 frg5_7GHzFlexibleHopping 37 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Manual E BreezeACCESS 4 0 System M anual MaxDataRate 710 3 3 6 10 Airlnterface 10 TransmitPowerControl 710 3 3 6 11 Airlnterface 11 RxAttenuationControl 710 3 3 6 12 Airlnterface 12 MaximumVoiceSessions 710 3 3 6 14 Airlnterface 14 FlexSubBandDef 710 3 3 6 15 Airlnterface 15 AddSubBand 710 3 3 6 15 1 FlexSubBandDef 1 DelSubBand 710 3 3 6 15 2 FlexSubBandDef 2 ErazeAllSubBands 710 3 3 6 15 3 FlexSubBandDef 3 SubBandTable 710 3 3 6 15 4 FlexSubBandDef 4 SubBandEntry 710 3 3 6 15 4 1 SubBandTable 1 SubBand 710 3 3 6 15 4 1 1 SubBandEntry 1 Manual Revision 1 01 Applicable to SU and AU The maximum transmission data rate Applicable to IF based units AU A E and SU A E only Enables reducing the transmit power level The maximum available value is for maximum power A lower value reduces the transmitted power The resulting transmit power level depends on the maximum power supported by the unit and on the attenuation of the IF cable Applicable to IF based SU SU A E only Enables to set the attenuation in the receive path to 0 10 or 25dB The effect of inserting such attenuation in the receive circuit is equivalent to reducing the level
169. gs for optional desktop installation BS PS DC power supply DC power cable Documentation CD S SH AC Base Station Chassis BS SH AC Chassis with blank panels Rubber legs for optional desktop installation BS PS AC AC Power Supply AC Power Cable o ooom 9949299 Documentation CD AU A E BS Access Units up to six per chassis lt gt Outdoor unit AU RA with integral antenna Or AU RE with a connector to an external antenna not included Pole mounting kit for the outdoor unit BS AU Network Interface module lt lt Monitor cable Manual Revision 1 01 IF Based Equipment ESJ BS PS DC Power Supply one or two per chassis lt P BS PS power supply module lt P DC power cable BS PS AC Power Supply one or two per chassis lt P BS PS AC power supply module lt P AC power cable GU A BS GPS and Alarms System lt gt BS GU module lt P GU RA GPS antenna and receiver lt 1 threaded mounting pole for the GU RA GPS antenna lt P Antenna Mounting kit Standalone AU A E NI Access Unit lt gt Outdoor unit AU RA with integral antenna Or AU RE with a connector to an external antenna not included Pole mounting kit for the outdoor unit AU NI indoor unit Wall mounting kit for the AU NI unit AU PS power supply with a mains power cord Monitor cable 99924929 Documentation CD Other Items Required for Installation lt P IF cable available from Alvarion in different lengths
170. hadow backup FLASH memory To check that the new firmware was loaded properly view the firmware versions stored in the FLASH using the following procedure 1 From the Main Menu select 2 Unit Control The Unit Control menu opens 2 From the Unit Control menu select 5 Flash Memory Control The Flash Memory Control menu opens BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Manual E BreezeACCESS 4 0 System M anual 3 From the Flash Memory Control menu select S Show Flash Versions The display appears as follows Flash Versions Current Versioni 340 59 Shadow Version A Oe AG Version After Reset 3 0 39 From the Flash Memory Control menu select the active software version using the following procedures To activate the backup shadow version 1 From the Flash Memory Control menu select 1 Reset and Boot from Shadow Version The Reset and Boot from Shadow Version menu opens 2 Select 1 Reset Now and press ENTER 3 The unit resets and the Shadow version is used as the newactive version Note that after the next reset the Current version will be activated again If the active version is the Shadow version and you wish to continue using it after the next Reset use the following procedure 1 From the Flash Memory Control menu select 2 Use Current Version After Reset The Use Current Version After Reset menu opens 2 Select 1 Set As Default Now and press ENTER This will actually cause the names of the two version
171. hapter This chapter describes the basic installation of BreezeACCESS IF based equipment including SU A E subscriber units modular base station equipment and stand alone AU A E NI access units It includes the following sections lt gt Packing Lists page 1 2 lists the equipment that is packed with each BreezeACCESS IF based unit lt gt Guidelines for Selection of Equipment Locations page 1 5 gives tips and guidence for locating BreezeACCESS equipment for optimum performance Installing the Outdoor Unit page 1 7 explains how to install the outdoor elements of BreezeACCESS systems Installing the SU NI and AU NI Indoor Unit page 1 13 outlines the installation procedures for SU NI and AU NI units Installing Modular Base Station Equipment page 1 15 outlines the installation procedures for modular base station equipment Installing the GU A BS GPS and Alarms System page 1 21 outlines the installation procedures for a GPS and Alarms system gt ETE BreezeACCESS 4 0 Installation Packing Lists SU A E Subscriber Unit lt gt SU NI Indoor unit lt gt Outdoor unit SU RA with integral antenna Or SU RE with a connector to an external antenna not included SU PS power supply with a mains power cord Pole mounting kit for the outdoor unit Wall mounting kit for the SU NI unit lt lt Modular Base Station Equipment BS SH Base Station Chassis BS SH chassis with blank panels Rubber le
172. he Access Unit you wish to associate with is operational and the basic parameters were properly configured Otherwise the unit will not be able to synchronize and associate with the Access Unit As the RSSI measurement is performed on received frames its results are meaningless as long as the unit is not associated with an Access Unit lt P In SU I units Verify that the WIRELESS LINK indicator LED on the front panel of the unit is lit indicating that the unit is associated with the Access Unit If the WIRELESS LINK LED is not lit try to improve reception by changing the location of the unit lt P Check the SIGNAL QUALITY L M and H LEDs For proper operation at least one L LED should be on The higher the number of LEDs that are on the better the quality of the link Change the location of the unit to identify the optimal position If you are using the Continuous Link Quality Display test search for the location with the highest RSSI reading Manual Revision 1 01 O ptimizing the Wireless Link 28 Aligning the External Antenna of SU R and SU I D Units For Subscriber Units with directional antenna s you can either use the signal quality LED indicators on the front panel of the unit or view the Received Signal Strength Indication RSSI on the monitor In most installations alignment using the LEDs is sufficient The RSSI reading see RSSI Measurement and Maximum Data Rate Configuration Subscriber Units page 2 2 can be
173. he SU NI and AU NI Indoor Unit 1 13 Installing Modular Base Station Equipment 1 15 Installing the GU A BS GPS and Alarms System 1 21 Indoor eh BE CW Rn a E 2 1 PACckINQUEISTS iodo 2 2 Installation Guidelines 2 4 Installing SU R Indoor Units 2 6 Indoor SU sJLand AUS UNITS ssi 3 1 PACKING LISTS M 3 2 Installation Guidelines 3 4 Installing SU I I D and AU I I D Units 3 7 System Manual Book 3 Commissioning Setting Basic Parameters geed 1 1 Accessing the Monitor Program 1 2 Configuring Basic Parameters in Access and Subscriber Units 1 6 Configuring Parameters in GU A BS Units 1 10 Optimizing tne Wireless LINK sonora 2 1 RSSI Measurement and Maximum Data Rate Configuration Subscriber UnitS cir aa 2 2 Aligning the Antenna of the SU A E Subscriber Unit 2 3 Positioning the SU I or SU R Subscriber Unit with Omni Antennas for Optimal Operation 2 4 Aligning the External Antenna of SU R and SU I D Units 2 5 Connecting External Alarm Devices ali
174. he down link from the AU to the SU The MIR value cannot be lower than the corresponding CIR value Valid values are from 32 to 2200 Kbps The default value is 128 Kbps MIR SU to AU SU only Sets the Maximum Information Rate of the up link from the SU to the AU The MIR value cannot be lower than the corresponding CIR value Valid values are from 32 to 2200Kbps The default value is 128Kbps CIR AU to SU SU only Sets the Committed Information Rate of the down link from the AU to the SU The CIR value cannot be higher than the corresponding MIR value Valid values are from 0 to 2200Kbps The default value is 64Kbps Manual Revision 1 01 M enus and Parameters EI CIR SU to AU SU only Sets the Committed Information Rate of the up link from the SU to the AU The CIR value cannot be higher than the corresponding MIR value Valid values are from 0 to 2200Kbps The default value is 64Kbps sie Maximum Burst Duration SU and AU Sets the maximum time for accumulating burst transmission rights according to the Burst Duration algorithm Valid values O 2000 milliseconds Default value 5 milliseconds allowing a maximum burst of 0 005 X CIR Kbps after an inactivity period of 5 milliseconds or more Maximum Delay SU only Sets the maximum permitted delay in the buffers system Some applications are very sensitive to delay If relatively high delays are permitted such applications may s
175. her Items Required for Installation lt P Antenna and RF cable according to specific installation conditions 4 Ethernet cable to connect the equipment to the Ethernet outlet see Table 2 1 page 2 3 lt P Telephone cord for connecting a Subscriber Unit with voice support to a telephone set RJ 11 connector at the Subscriber Unit side lt gt Installation tools and materials For local configuration of parameters lt P A portable PC with terminal emulation software and monitor cable monitor cable is supplied with Access Units Or lt gt A portable PC equipped with an Ethernet card and with Telnet software and an Ethernet cable see Table 2 1 page 2 3 Items marked with an asterisk are available as options from Alvarion Manual Revision 1 01 Indoor SU R Units EI Table 2 1 Required Type of Ethernet Cable Unit Type Connection toa Connection to a PC hub BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Manual ES BreezeACCESS 4 0 Installation Installation Guidelines This section describes the installation guidelines and the various considerations that must be taken into account when planning the installation Location of the Unit lt P The unit can be placed on a desktop or a shelf or can be attached to a wall lt gt The unit should be installed as near as possible to the antenna models with detached antenna The RF cable connecting the unit to the antenna should be as short as possible to guarantee m
176. hernet Accept from Ethernet Ethernet Voice Priority Tag Option SU with voice support only Supports priority for voice frames RTP packets in units with VLAN ID Management amp Voice of 65535 No VLAN If enabled a Priority Tag that includes the value of the VLAN Priority Voice parameter and a zero value in the VID field will be inserted into all voice frames RTP packets generated by the unit before transmission to the Wireless or Ethernet port Valid selections are Enable and Disable Default selection is Disable VLAN Forwarding AU and SU Applicable for trunk link only Defines the VLAN ID values that will be included in the VLAN Forwarding List If the VLAN Link Type is defined asa Manual Revision 1 01 M enus and Parameters EZ we E al AN Ne dis A dis ale din Trunk Link and the VLAN Forwarding option is enabled a received data frame with a VLAN ID that is not a member of the unit s VLAN Forwarding List will be discarded The VLAN Forwarding parameter provides the following options VLAN Forwarding Support Enables or disables the VLAN Forwarding feature Available selections are Disable and Enable The default selection is Disable Add Forwarding VLAN ID Adds a VLAN ID to the VLAN Forwarding List One VLAN ID can be entered each time The maximum number of VLAN IDs in the VLAN Forwarding List is 20 Valid values are 1 to 4094 Remove Forwarding VLAN ID
177. hold level for decision on existence of a carrier signal indicating a transmission from another unit Applicable to AU and GU The time spent on each radio channel hop Applicable only when the ACSEOption is disabled Applicable to SU and AU The minimum frame size that requires an RTS CTS handshake Applicable to SU and AU Multi Rate parameters Applicable to SU and AU Enables disables the multi Rate decision mechanism Applicable to SU and AU The size of the decision window for the multi Rate mechanism the number of consecutive transmission or retransmission attempts Applicable to SU and AU The number of failures in the decision window that will cause the window to be defined as unsuccessful GPS Hopping Parameters Applicable to GU Only The Number of Hopping Frequencies used in the AUs controlled by the GU Integer 0 100 Integer 0 9 Integer 0 10 Integer 7 255 Integer max1Mbps 1 max2Mbps 2 max3Mbps 3 na 255 DisplayString 255 to 255 dB Integer t32KiloMicroseconds 32 t64KiloMicroseconds 64 t128KiloMicroseconds 128 na 255 Integer 20 1600 bytes Integer disable 0 enable 1 na 255 Integer 1 50 na 255 Integer 1 to Decision Window Size na 255 Integer 0 99 na 255 Appendix B EZ SyncSignalSource Applicable to GU Only The source of the Integer 710 3 3 7 12 1 synchronization signal gpsAntennaOrinternal 1 GpsHoppingParams 2 When
178. hose IP addresses match one of the entries in the Set Network Management IP Addresses list If the Access to Network Management parameter is configured to From Both Ethernet amp Wireless Link than there is no IP address based filtering on the wireless port sis Activate Management IP Filter On Wlan Port Applicable only if the Access to Network Management parameter is configured to either From Wireless Link Only or From Both Ethernet amp Wireless Link The unit can be managed from the wireless link port only by stations whose IP addresses match one of the entries in the Set Network Management IP Addresses list If the Access to Network Management BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Manual ES BreezeACCESS 4 0 O perations and Administration parameter is configured to From Both Ethernet amp Wireless Link then there is no IP address based filtering on the Ethernet port Activate Management IP Filter On Both Ethernet amp Wlan Ports Applicable with all options of the Access to Network Management parameter The unit can be managed from the port s defined by the selected option of the Access to Network Management parameter only by stations whose IP addresses match one of the entries in the Set Network Management IP Addresses list In the GU only the Disable and Enable Management IP Filtering on Ethernet Port options are available The default selection is Disable lt gt Set Network Management IP Addresses Displays the IP
179. hose sent to addresses that the AU recognizes as being on its wired Ethernet side The default selection is Forward Unknown lt gt Bridge Aging Time AU and SU Displays the current value for bridge aging time for learned addresses of devices on both the wired and wireless sides not including BreezeACCESS units and allows entry of a new value The available range is 100 to 2000 seconds The default value is 300 seconds for AUs and for SUs with bridge functionality SU BD and SU BD1V For all other SUs it is 1800 seconds lt gt Broadcast Relaying AU only Determines whether the unit performs broadcast relaying When Broadcast Relaying is enabled broadcast packets originating in devices on the wireless link are transmitted by the AU back to the wireless link devices as well as to the wired LAN If disabled these packets are sent only to the local Manual Revision 1 01 M enus and Parameters E lt gt wired LAN and are not sent back to the wireless link Disable Broadcast Relaying if you are sure that all broadcast messages from the wireless link will be destined to the wired LAN The default selection is Enable Unicast Relaying AU only Determines whether the unit performs Unicast relaying When Unicast Relaying is enabled Unicast packets originating in devices on the wireless link can be transmitted back to the wireless link devices If this parameter is disabled these packets are not sent to the wireless
180. hould be installed and grounded at the point where the cable enters the building The arrestor is connected to the unit at one end and to the antenna at the other end The professional installer you choose must be knowledgeable about lightning protection The installer must install the lightning protector in a way that maximizes lightning protection AL 1 Lightning Arrestor Part No 872905 5 ft 1 5m N Male to N Female is available from Alvarion BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Manual ES BreezeACCESS 4 0 Installation XE Detached outdoors antennas should be installed ONLY by experienced antenna installation professionals who are familiar with local building and safety codes and wherever applicable are licensed by the appropriate government regulatory authorities Failure to do so may void the BreezeACCESS Product Warranty and may expose the end user to legal and financial liabilities Alvarion and its resellers or distributors are not liable for injury damage or violation of government regulations associated with the installation of detached antennas Manual Revision 1 01 Indoor SU I and AU I Units Installing SU I I D and AU I I D Units Connectors and LEDs The unit provides the following interfaces ETHERNET Figure 3 1 SU I Rear Panel lt gt An Ethernet connector marked ETH for connecting the unit to the network See Table 3 1 page 3 3 for information on the required type of Ethernet cable
181. ice CoS packages bandwidth allocations and traffic shaping schemes In addition the system supports Virtual LANs based on IEEE 802 10 enabling secure operation and Virtual Private Network VPN services as well as allowing tele workers or remote offices to conveniently access their enterprise networks The system also supports Layer 2 traffic prioritization according to IEEE 802 1p and ToS based Layer 3 traffic prioritization according to RFC791 BreezeACCESS II operates in the 2 4 GHz ISM band in Time Division Duplex TDD mode It employs wireless packet data switching technology utilizing Frequency Hopping Spread Spectrum FH SS radios A BreezeACCESS based system consists of the following 4 Customer Premise Equipment CPE BreezeACCESS Subscriber Units lt gt Base Station Equipment BSE BreezeACCESS Access Units and supporting equipment lt gt Networking Equipment Standard Routers and or Gateways Gatekeepers supporting connections to the Internet and or the PSTN or private telephony network lt gt Management Systems SNMP based Management Billing and Customer Care and other Operations Support Systems Manual Revision 1 01 Chapter 2 p alvarion System Components About This Chapter This chapter describes the BreezeACCESS system components It includes the following sections lt gt Subscriber Units Customer Premises Equipment page 2 2 describes BreezeACCESS equipment installed at
182. index Applicable to SU and AU only Read only A Frequency Index in the Scrambled Sequence Table Applicable to AU only The aging time for a voice call in the Call Info database Security Parameters Applicable to SU and AU Read Only Enable disable the privacy option Normally set to active Applicable to SU and AU only Enables disables the authentication option openSystem authentication messages are not encrypted sharedKey Authentication messages are encrypted Applicable to SU and AU only The ID of the key to be used for encryption the authentication messages Applicable to SU and AU only Encryption WEP Key 1 Accessible only with SNMP Write Community Applicable to SU and AU only Encryption WEP Key 2 Accessible only with SNMP Write Community Applicable to SU and AU only Encryption WEP Key 3 Accessible only with SNMP Write Community Applicable to SU and AU only Encryption WEP Key 4 Accessible only with SNMP Write Community Integer cancelOperation 0 eraseAll 1 Integer From 1 to Number of Frequencies provided it meets the GCD requirement DisplayString SIZE 10 Integer 1 50 000 seconds 1 No aging Integer notActive 0 active 1 Integer openSystem 0 sharedKey 1 Integer 1 4 DisplayString SIZE 10 Ten hexadecimal n DisplayString SIZE 10 Ten hexadecimal digits DisplayString SIZE 10 Ten hexadecimal digits DisplayString SIZE 1
183. ing 25 1000 5000 Frequency Table 2 13 Parameters of Call Progress Tones and Ringer France AN Frequency 1 Frequency 2 Duration s Tone Freq Level Freq Level On ms Off Hz dB Hz dB ms Busy 425 18 o o oo 500 Error 18 High Level Error Ring 25 1500 3500 Frequency Dial Tone Ring Back Buy Congestion 425 Ur 0 o mm D Ee BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Manual EJ BreezeACCESS 4 0 Operations and Administration Table 2 14 Parameters of Call Progress Tones and Ringer United Kingdom Ka Frequency 1 Frequency 2 Duration s Tone Freq Level Freq Level On ms Off Hz dB Hz dB ms Ring Back 400 18 450 18 400 200 Error Frequency Table 2 15 Parameters of Call Progress Tones and Ringer Belgium o 1 Frequency 1 Frequency 2 Duration s Tone Freq Level Freq Level On ms Off Hz dB Hz dB ms Error 425 18 High Level Error Ring 29 1000 3000 Frequency Error Manual Revision 1 01 M enus and Parameters E Table 2 16 Parameters of Call Progress Tones and Ringer Chile reem Tee Cadence Duration 6 Hz dB Hz dB p b o b p 6 o fo fo b o po Dm 6 o mm p ca s ca 6 d 120 1000 mm 400 400 400 400 400 400 20 Table 2 17 Timeouts Min Flash Max Flash Disconnect Inter digit Called Detect ms Detect ms Release s 220 320 320 120 1000 1000 100 120 12 Hopping Parameters
184. ing an Access unit configure the following parameters in addition to the ESSID 2 From the Basic Configuration menu select Operator ESSID Parameters From the Operator ESSID Parameters menu select Operator ESSID Option The Operator ESSID Option configuration screen appears Select Enable or Disable as required If Enable is selected select Operator ESSID from the Operator ESSID Parameters menu Enter the required Operator ESSID If Disable is selected the Operator ESSID does not need to be configured NOTE The ESSID and the Operator ESSID are case sensitive Configuring Frequency Hopping Parameters AU Only 1 From the Basic Configuration menu select the Hopping Set option The Hopping Set configuration screen appears Enter the required hopping set number 2 From the Basic Configuration menu select the Hopping Sequence option BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Manual ETE BreezeACCESS 4 0 Commissioning The Hopping Sequence configuration screen appears Enter the required hopping sequence number 3 If you are configuring an AU BS Modular Access Unit the Hopping Sync parameter must be configured lt P Select Hopping Sync from the Basic Configuration menu The Hopping Sync configuration screen appears Select the required hopping sync option Idle Slave or Master Ga Only one unit in the BS SH chassis should be configured as a Master unit All other units should be configured as Slave units If only one AU B
185. ing it to a GPS antenna Switch on the BS GU only after the GPS antenna has been connected Daisy chaining Two or More BS GU Modules If two or more BS GU modules are installed in different collocated BS SH chassis use a synchronization cable supplied separately to connect the SYNC OUT connector of the first Master module to the SYNC IN connector of the second module The SYNC OUT of this second module may be connected to the SYNC IN of a third module and so on Manual Revision 1 01 Chapter 2 nenti Indoor SU R Units About This Chapter This chapter explains how to install BreezeACCESS SU R units and includes the following sections lt gt Packing Lists page 2 2 lists the equipment that is packed with each BreezeACCESS SU R unit lt gt Installation Guidelines page 2 4 gives general tips and instructions for installing BreezeACCESS SU R units lt P gt Installing SU R Indoor Units page 2 6 outlines the installation procedures for SU R units EN BreezeACCESS 4 0 Installation Packing Lists SU R Subscriber Unit The SU R units are shipped with the following units and accessories The exact packing list varies depending on system configuration and ordered equipment 4 SU Runit lt P Antenna unit Two clip on omni antennas Or A wall window mountable antenna Or A high gain outdoor antenna lt gt A power supply lt gt Wall mounting kit for the SU R unit lt gt An Ethernet cable straight Ot
186. inimum power loss Keep the units well away from sources of heat such as radiators air conditioners and so on lt gt Units with voice support should be installed at a distance of at least 3m from an indoor antenna to prevent interference to telephony services If a directional indoor antenna is used do not install the unit in the area covered by the antenna s radiation pattern Location of the Antenna s lt gt Any physical object in the path between two units can cause signal attenuation Common obstructions are buildings and trees If a units antenna is installed indoors the walls and or windows between the two sites are physical obstructions Any buildings or other physical structure such as trees mountains or other natural geographic features higher than the antenna and situated in the path between the two sites can constitute obstructions lt P Install indoor antennas as close as possible to a window or wall if a window is not accessible facing the required direction Avoid metal obstacles such as metal window frames or metal film anti glare windows in the transmission path Install outdoor antennas high enough to avoid any obstacles which may block the signal lt gt Position the antennas clear of metal furniture and away from moving metal objects such as metal fans or doors Antenna Diversity Multipath propagation is to be expected when there are potential reflectors between the Access Unit and Subscriber Uni
187. inter regional calls at the unit Otherwise it will be forwarded as dialed Dialing Prefix Option Enables or disables the dialing prefix support capability BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Manual E BreezeACCESS 4 0 Operations and Administration Valid options are Disable Enable Enable amp Block Inter Regional Prefix Default selection is Disable Inter Regional Prefix Defines the prefix indicating an inter regional call This is also the first digit in the two digits string indicating an international call Valid values One phone key pad digit 0 9 A B C D and X no prefix Default value O International Prefix Defines the second digit in the two digits string indicating an international call Valid values One phone key pad digit 0 9 4 A B C D and X no prefix Default value 0 lt gt Registration TTL Defines the registration Time To Live Registration is the process by which an endpoint informs the Gatekeeper of its Transport Addresses and alias addresses Registration must occur before any calls are attempted and may occur periodically as necessary for example at endpoint power up After Registration process has finished an endpoint will no longer send Registration Request RRQ messages So GK may become unavailable for the endpoint after its reset To exclude this possibility a keep alive mechanism should be applied An endpoint s registration with a Gatekeeper ma
188. ions Table 1 2 IF Cables Cable Type RG 58 RG 213 LMR 200 LMR 240 LMR 400 Indoor Equipment The Indoor unit should be installed as close as possible to the point where the IF cable enters the building The location of the indoor unit should also take into account the need to connect it to a power mains outlet and to the CPE is we The system complies with the ETS 300 385 standard and is protected against secondary lightning strikes when its outdoor unit is properly grounded according to the applicable country specific industry standards for protection of structures against lightning The system complies with EN 61000 4 5 test level 3 2kV Manual Revision 1 01 IF Based Equipment ET Installing the Outdoor Unit The Outdoor Unit Bottom Panel The SU RA and AU RA outdoor units include the radio and an integral high gain flat antenna located on the front of the unit The SU RE and AU RE outdoor radio units have an RF connector for connection to an external antenna Ground screw o B i ERR DI RSSI Figure 1 1SU RA RE Bottom Panel Table 1 3 SU RA RE LEDs Ethernet activity Blinking Data received from or transmitted to Ethernet LAN Off No activity on the Ethernet LAN Wireless link Blinking Receiving packet from the wireless link activity Off No reception of packets from the wireless link Alarm indication On A problem with the power amplifier or in the locking p
189. is read na 255 Airlnterface 9 only showing the Country Standard The available values represent settings that set in the factory are dependent on the specific radio band In BreezeACCESS MMDS it is BreezeACCESS II read only read only showing Flexible frqSiteProprietary 3 Hopping Definition frqiSMEuropeETSI 4 In BreezeACCESS XL products frglSMUsFCC 5 that support only Flexible Hopping fralSMJapan 6 Definition for setting the hopping frgiSMKorea 7 frequencies e g 3 3a band it is frgiSMAustralia 8 read only showing Flexible frgiSMisrael 9 Hopping Definition frgiSMNetherlands 11 In other BreezeACCESS XL frgiSMFrance 12 products supporting the use of the frqlSMSpain 13 Hopping Band parameter for setting frgisMCanada 14 the hopping frequencies this is frqlnternational 22 read write enabling the selection of frqFlexibleHopping 37 a fixed Hopping Band Single frqSingleChannel2_4GHz 41 Channel operation or Flexible frglSMMexico 67 Hopping Definition MMDS read only In BreezeACCESS V units that are frqFlexibleHopping 37 configured to support only BreezeACCESS 2 6b ISM US FCC hopping standard it is frqFlexibleHopping 37 read only Otherwise it is read frq2_6GhzHoppingSequence10MHz 44 write supporting the selection of frq2_6GhzHoppingSequence12MHz 45 ISM US FCC ISM International frq2_6GhzHoppingSequence14MHz 46 and Flexible Hopping Definition frq2_6GhzHoppingSequence24MH
190. ision on an on hook condition Valid values O 2 000 milliseconds Inter Digit Timeout Applicable only for pulse dialing The minimum time between two consecutive pulses to be considered as separating between two digits Valid values O 2 000 milliseconds Called Party Release Timeout The minimum time for an on hook signal on the called party side to be considered as call disconnect Valid values O 10 000 seconds The following tables provide details concerning the values of the parameters of the various call progress tones and the ringer as well as the Timeouts for the available country standards BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Manual EI BreezeACCESS 4 0 Operations and Administration Table 2 10 Parameters of Call Progress Tones and Ringer Germany MEE Frequency 1 Frequency 2 Duration s Tone Freq Level Freq Level On ms Off Hz dB Hz dB ms High Level Error Ring 25 1000 5000 Frequency Table 2 11 Parameters of Call Progress Tones and Ringer USA cl Frequency 1 Frequency 2 Duration s Tone Freq Level Freq Level On ms Off Hz dB Hz dB ms Ring Back 440 19 480 19 1000 3000 en High Level Error Ring 20 1000 3000 Frequency Manual Revision 1 01 M enus and Parameters EI Table 2 12 Parameters of Call Progress Tones and Ringer Sweden TA Frequency 1 Frequency 2 Duration s Tone Freq Level Freq Level On ms Off Hz dB Hz dB ms High Level Error R
191. isplays the current values of the SNMP Traps parameters lt gt Show Network Management Parameters Displays the current values of the Network Management parameters Bridge Parameters AU SU and GU The Bridge Parameters sub menu includes the following parameters sets lt P Virtual LAN VLAN parameters lt P ToS parameters lt gt Ethernet Broadcast Filtering parameters lt P Other Bridging parameters VLAN Parameters lt P VLAN Support Defines the parameters that are related to the VLAN aware Virtual LAN aware feature of BreezeACCESS units Each VLAN includes stations that can communicate with each other but cannot communicate with stations belonging to different VLANs The VLAN also provides the ability to set traffic priorities for transmission of certain frames The information related to the VLAN is included in the VLAN Tag Header which is inserted in each frame between the MAC header and the data VLAN implementation in BreezeACCESS units supports frames routing by port information i e each port is connected to only one VLAN The VLAN Support option allows viewing and setting of the following parameters sis VLAN ID Data SU unit only Applicable for Access links only Sets the VLAN ID for data frames identifying the VLAN to which the unit belongs Valid values 1 to 4094 Default value 1 Frames received from the Wireless link port e Only tagged frames with VLAN ID VID value equal to the VLAN I
192. issions Applicable to SU and AU only when the ACSE Counter Option is enabled Read only The total number of retransmissions of voice frames including fax and T 38 redundant frames counts all unsuccessful transmissions retransmissions Applicable to SU and AU Read only The Counter number of transmit errors that have occurred ME Applicable to SU and AU Read only The Counter number of transmit errors that have occurred due to an hardware problem Applicable to SU and AU Read only The Counter number of transmit errors that have occurred because transmission has been aborted before completion due to internal problems in the DSP Applicable to SU and AU Read only The Counter number of transmit errors that have occurred because transmission was cancelled due to the modem being busy receiving data Applicable to SU and AU Read only The Counter number of transmit errors that have occurred because of an Acknowledge Timeout a frame that was not acknowledged within the time defined by the Acknowledge Delay Limit parameter Applicable to SU and AU Read only The Counter number of transmit errors that have occurred because of an internal timeout in the modem Applicable to SU and AU Read only The Counter number of transmit errors that have occurred because of a CRC error in the ACK message Applicable to SU and AU Read only The Counter number of transmit errors that have occurred because RTS was sent but CTS was
193. ith Voice Support l Plug the output jack of the power transformer into the DC input jack marked DC IN located on the bottom panel of the unit 2 Connect the supplied universal power transformer to a power outlet 110 220VAC 3 Use a straight Ethernet 10BaseT cable to connect the Ethernet port marked ETH to a PC or to a hub s uplink port Use a crossed EthernetlOBaseT cable to connect to a hub 4 For units with voice support use the standard RJ 11 cable connected to the telephone set to connect the telephone to the telephone port marked TEL BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Manual EN BreezeACCESS 4 0 Installation Manual Revision 1 01 Chapter 3 nenti Indoor SU and AU I Units About This Chapter This chapter explains how to install BreezeACCESS SU I and AU I units and includes the following sections lt gt Packing Lists page 3 2 lists the equipment that is packed with each BreezeACCESS SU I and AU I units lt gt Installation Guidelines page 3 4 give general tips and instructions for installing BreezeACCESS SU I and AU I units lt Installing SU I I D and AU I I D Units page 3 7 outlines the installation procedures for SU I and AU I units EN BreezeACCESS 4 0 Installation Packing Lists SU I I D Subscriber Unit lt P Subscriber Unit SU I with 2 integral omni antennas Or SU I D with connectors to external antenna s lt gt Power Supply 5 VDC universal power adaptor Data only units
194. l your IP address and verify that the telephone including the ringing circuits functions properly Manual Revision 1 01 Verifying Proper O peration EI amp Verifying Proper Operation of the GU RA GPS Antenna NOTE It may take up to 10 minutes from the time the GU RA GPS antenna is powered up until it is fully synchronized with the GPS satellite system When the unit is operating properly the PWR and OK green LEDS should be on indicating that the unit is supplying power to the GPS antenna and that the GPS antenna is functioning properly If the OK LED is not on check the functionality of the GPS antenna as follows 1 From the Main Menu select Info Screens The Info Screens menu opens 2 From the Info Screen menu select Show Unit Status and view the Unit Status display You should see one of the following messages UTC is available date time This message indicates that the GPS antenna has synchronized with the satellite system and that the BS GU is functioning properly The message may include an incorrect time and date such as a date in 1999 this indicates that the GPS antenna has not yet synchronized with the GPS satellite system Or UTC time is not available This message indicates that the BS GU is not getting timing signals from the GPS antenna If the antenna is functioning and properly connected to the module a probable reason might be that the antenna has not yet synchronized with th
195. le rate 1 Mbps the transmission rate will be decreased to the next available rate following a failed window The Multi Rate menu includes the following parameters ej Multi Rate Support Enables or disables the Multi Rate decision algorithm When enabled the algorithm supports increase decrease of transmission rates in the range from 1 Mbps to the current value of the Maximum Data Rate parameter Enabling the algorithm has no effect if the Maximum Data Rate is 1 Mbps The default selection is Enable Multi Rate Decision Window Size Sets the size of the decision window The size of a window is measured as the number of consecutive transmission or retransmission attempts Increasing the size of the window will increase the probability that it will be a successful window thus slowing down the decision to degrade to a lower rate and accelerating the decision to upgrade to a higher rate Valid values are from 1 to 50 The default value is 12 BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Manual ES BreezeACCESS 4 0 Operations and Administration Number of Failures in Multi Rate Decision Window Sets the maximum number of failures allowed in a decision window A window is defined as successful only if the number of failures is not higher than this number A transmission attempt is defined as a failure if an ACK was not received upon the first transmission attempt Increasing the value of this parameter will increase the probability that it
196. les it is recommended to verify connectivity with the base station prior to drilling holes in the locations intended for the SU R unit and or the indoor antenna The template on the packaging box can be used to mark the locations of the screws on the wall drill right through the markings on the box After insertion of the anchors and screws hang the unit on the two screws with the bottom panel the side with the connectors facing downward Connecting the Omni Antennas 1 Connect the omni antennas to antenna ports 1 and or 2 on the sides of the unit Push each antenna connection carefully into a port with the antenna facing downward and carefully turn the antenna upward to firmly lock it 2 Extend the antennas upward vertically in relation to the floor to achieve vertical polarization Connecting a Detached Antenna 1 Connect the special adapter to antenna port 1 marked 1 on the side of the unit Push the adapter carefully into the hole using the alignment markings on the adapter and the unit and turn it 180 degrees to firmly lock it 2 Connect the antenna cable to the adapter If you use a heavy cable secure the cable so as to prevent applying excessive force on the adapter and connector Connecting the Unit to the Power Supply and to the CPE The unit operates on a power input of 5VDC supplied by the power transformer included with the unit Manual Revision 1 01 Indoor SU R Units E Figure 2 1 SU R Unit w
197. less media After transmission of a data frame the unit waits for an acknowledgement ACK message from the receiving unit Some control and wireless management frames as well as broadcast and multicast frames that are sent to more than one unit are not acknowledged If an ACK is not received after a predefined time determined by the Acknowledge Delay Limit parameter see page 2 31 the unit will retransmit the frame until it receives an ACK If an ACK is not received before the number of retransmissions has reached a maximum predefined number Number of Retransmissions parameter see page 2 49 it stops retransmitting and drops the frames lt gt Total transmitted frames to wireless Displays the number of frames transmitted to the wireless media The total includes one count for each data or RTP frame internally generated voice frame that was transmitted successfully excluding retransmissions as well as the number of transmitted control and wireless management frames If the ACSE Option see page 2 33 is enabled then in addition to the total count there are also separate counters for the total number of data frames voice RTP frames and beacon frames The voice frames include fax frames This is true also for Subscriber Units that do not support voice in cells where the ACSE Option parameter in the AU is enabled In this case the Voice count should be O lt gt Total submitted frames bridge Displays the total number of da
198. less otherwise noted lt P Alvarion Ltd reserves the right to alter the equipment specifications and descriptions in this publication without prior notice No part of this publication shall be deemed to be part of any contract or warranty unless specifically incorporated by reference into such contract or warranty lt P The information contained herein is merely descriptive in nature and does not constitute a binding offer for the sale of the product described herein alvarion N Table of Contents We re on your wavelength System Manual Book 1 System Description Igel fi eg Le e 1 1 Introducing BreezeACCESS eeee eese 1 2 System COMPONECNS ire 2 1 Subscriber Units Customer Premises Equipment 2 2 Base Station Equipment cccccssssseeeccessseeeecesseeseeenseesseeees 2 7 Networking Equipment eere eeee eere 2 12 Management Systems eeeeceeeeeee eee ee enn nena 2 13 SPECINCAtIONS aorta ra 3 1 System Specifications eec eceeee ee eeeeeee KEE 3 2 Physical Specifications 3 7 System Manual Book 2 Installation IF Based Sekt ig Le GE 1 1 PaCKINO LISIS c 1 2 Guidelines for Selection of Equipment Locations 1 5 Installing the Outdoor Unit 1 7 Installing t
199. levels Manual Revision 1 01 Accessing the M onitor Program ES Table 1 1 Default Passwords e we Following three unsuccessful login attempts using incorrect passwords from either the monitor port or via Telnet the monitor program will be blocked for five minutes To enable access to the monitor program during that time the unit must be reset via SNMP or by disconnecting reconnecting power BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Manual BreezeACCESS 4 0 O perations and Administration Accessing the Monitor Program using Telnet 1 Connect a PC to the Ethernet port of the unit See the table below to determine the type of cable Configure the PC s IP parameters to enable connectivity with the unit the default IP Address is 10 0 0 1 Run the Telnet application Table 1 2 Required Type of Ethernet Cable Unit Type Connection to a Connection to a PC Hub All SU R Units and Subscriber Units that Straight NA support a single Ethernet device SU 1D SU 1D1V Subscriber Units excluding SU R Units Crossed Straight that support multiple Ethernet devices SU 8D SU 8D1V SU BD SU BD1V 2 The Select Access Level menu appears Select the access level according to your authorized access level You will be requested to enter your password After entering the correct password press Enter The Main Menu appears Manual Revision 1 01 Accessing the M onitor Program ET NY BreezeACCESS AU BS Official Release Version
200. ll Mounting Plate Connecting Antenna s to the Units For installation convenience a torque key is included with all BreezeACCESS SU ID and AU ID units e K The use of improper tools for tightening antenna connection cables to BreezeACCESS units may result in damage to the cable connectors Manual Revision 1 01 Indoor SU I and AU I Units Use the included torque key to tighten the cable s to the connector s on the side of the unit The key is designed to prevent over tightening of the screws and protects the connectors from damage Tighten the cable s to the connector s using the torque Key Figure 3 7 Tightening the Cable s to the Connector s If excessive pressure is applied to tighten the screws the torque key will break NOTE Do not attempt to tighten the screws any further This may damage the connectors on the BreezeACCESS unit Connecting the Unit to the Power Supply and to the CPE The unit operates on a power input of 5VDC supplied by the power transformer included with the unit 1 Plug the output jack of the power transformer into the DC input jack marked DC IN 5V located on the side of the unit 2 Connect the power transformer to a power outlet 110 220VAC 3 Use an Ethernet 10BaseT cable to connect a PC or a hub to the Ethernet port located on the rear panel of the unit See Table 3 1 page 3 3 for details on the required type of the Ethernet cable 4 For Sub
201. long Figure 1 3 page 1 10 shows the locations of the U bolt holes band grooves and screw holes on the rear side of the outdoor unit Figure 1 4 page 1 10 illustrates the method of installing an outdoor unit on a pole using the brackets and open ended screws e NOTE B WES Make sure to install the unit with the bottom panel the panel with the IF connector facing downward BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Manual ES BreezeAC CESS 4 0 Installation Grooves for Insertion of 9 16 Metal Band Size B U Bolt Holes 3 Pole Size A U Bolt Holes 2 Pole Bracket Screw Holes Figure 1 3 Holes Grooves Screw Holes Q a I C a ON des dort Ca Ce Di i Ta Figure 1 4 3 Pole Mounting Installation Using the Special Brackets NOTE we When inserting the open ended screws make sure to insert them with the grooves pointing outwards these grooves are intended to allow fastening of the screws with a screwdriver Manual Revision 1 01 IF Based Equipment En The integral antenna of the AU RA is relatively long The top of the antenna should also be secured to the pole as shown in Figure 1 5 Washer Spring washer Nut Figure 1 6 Pole Mounting the AU RA Top View O NOTE The top of the AU RA antenna must be secured to the pole only in order to keep it from moving due to strong winds or other adverse conditions Do not over tighten the screws in order to avoid damaging the ante
202. lvarion N Connecting External Alarm Devices About This Chapter This chapter explains how to connect external devices to the AL IN and AL OUT connectors of the Base Station unit ER BreezeACCESS 4 0 Commissioning Connecting External Devices to the GU BS AL IN and or AL OUT Connectors Open ended cables are available from the company for connecting to the module external alarm inputs through the AL IN connector and or activating external devices through the AL OUT connector See the tables that follow for descriptions of the connectors pins functionality For details on defining and using the alarm inputs and output refer to Book 4 Operation and Administration e WARNING K The load of the Alarm Out AL OUT connector should not exceed 24 V 1 A max Alarms In Cable AL IN Connedior mi Alarm Input Ami I Brown GE een In I CI DREES DENEN NL RN The other side of the cable is supplied open ended Manual Revision 1 01 External Devices RESI Alarms Out Cable AL OUT Connector The other side of the cable is supplied open ended BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Manual EN BreezeACCESS 4 0 Commissioning Manual Revision 1 01 Chapter 4 alvarion N Verifying Proper Operation About This Chapter This chapter explains how to confirm that the BreezeACCESS system is functioning properly and includes the following sections lt gt Verifying Connectivity page 4 2 explains how to ensure tha
203. ly The message may include an incorrect time and date such as a date in 1999 This indicates that the GPS antenna has not yet synchronized with the GPS satellites system Or sis UTC time is not available This message indicates that the BS GU is not getting timing signals from the GPS Manual Revision 1 01 M enus and Parameters ES antenna If the antenna is functioning and properly connected to the module this may be because the antenna has not yet synchronized with the GPS satellite system Show Basic Parameters The Show Basic Parameters menu displays the current values of the parameters included in the Basic Configuration menu see Basic Configuration Menu page 2 10 When using Read Only access rights the ESSID and WEP Keys are not displayed The display includes some additional useful read only information such as the Number of Hopping Frequencies in SU and AU Show Advanced Parameters The Show Advanced Parameters menu enables access sub menus that display the current values of the parameters included in the applicable sub menus of the Advanced Configuration menu see Advanced Configuration Menu page 2 21 When using Read Only access rights the ESSID Air Interface Parameters and WEP Keys Security Parameters are not displayed The display includes some additional read only information such as Number of Hopping Frequencies Air Interface Parameters Show All Parameters The Show All Parameters menu displays th
204. ly Defines user filtering options disable No filtering iPOnly Only IP protocol frames pass userDefinedAddrOnly Only frames from user defined IP addresses pass pPPoE Only Only PPPoE frames pass Applicable to SU only An IP Filter Table of up to 8 user defined addresses or address groups to be used if the selected User Filtering option is userDefinedAddrOnly Not accessible Applicable to SU only An IP Filter Table entry Not accessible Applicable to SU only An IP address of an IP Filter Table entry Applicable to SU only An IP Mask of an IP Filter Table entry Either a mask or a range but not both can be used to define an address group Applicable to SU only An addresses range for the IP Filter Table entry The first address in the range is the IP address iPID Either a mask or a range but not both can be used to define an address group Applicable to SU only Read only A table index for the IP Filter Table entry Applicable to SU only Deletes a single selected entry from the IP Filter Table Applicable to SU only Deletes all entries from the IP Filter Table Integer disable 0 iPOnly 1 userDefinedAddrOnly 2 pPPoEOnly 3 na 255 IP Address IP Address Integer O 255 Integer 1 8 Integer off 0 firstEntry 1 secondEntry 2 thirdEntry 3 fourthEntry 4 fifthEntry 5 sixthEntry 6 seventhEntry 7 eighthEntry 8 na 255 Integer off 0 deleteAll 1 of
205. means that the tone is not used sis Cadence Off The silence time off in the tones silence sequence of the tone Valid values are 100 10 000 milliseconds O 0 means no silence a continuous tone Duration The maximum duration of transmitting the tone to the earphone Tone generation will cease upon hang up Manual Revision 1 01 M enus and Parameters ESI Valid values are O 10 000 seconds 4 Ring Frequency Defines the ring frequency parameters that define the ringing of the telephone set if the selected Telephony Country parameter is Proprietary The following parameters can be defined KA KA e Ringer Frequency the frequency of activating the Ringer Valid values are 17Hz 20Hz 25Hz 50Hz Cadence On The ringing time on in the ringing silence sequence of the Ringer Valid values are 100 10 000 milliseconds Cadence Off The silence time on in the ringing silence sequence of the Ringer Valid values are 100 10 000 milliseconds Duration The maximum duration of activating the ringer Ringing will cease upon detecting off hook condition Valid values are O 10 000 seconds 4 Timeouts Defines the following timeouts KA Min Flash Detect Timeout and Max Flash Detect Timeout A short on hook time that is between the values of these two parameters will be considered as Hook Flash Valid values O 2 000 milliseconds Disconnect Timeout The minimum time for dec
206. media This parameter is only set in the AU AII the SUs learn it from the AU during the association process The valid values depend on the applicable hopping standard see Table 3 2 on page 31 The default value is 1 lt gt Hopping Set Displays the selected hopping set Each hopping standard has 3 hopping sets The Hopping Set selected in this screen determines which hopping sequences are available in the Hopping Sequence screen Always use the same hopping set per site with different hopping sequences to minimize the possibility of collisions on the wireless media This parameter is set only in the AU All the associated SUs learn its value from the AU during the association process Valid values are from 1 to 3 The default value is 1 Table 2 1 Country Standards Supported by BreezeACCESS II Hopping Standard Channels Sequences per Hopping Set rb mem am Ne lt gt Hopping Sync BS AU only Displays the current Hopping Sync status of the unit and allows defining a new status When several AUs that use the same hopping set and different hopping sequences are co located their operation should be synchronized in terms of hopping sequence initialization and timing If a BS GU GPS module is not used for synchronization then one AU must be specified as a Master unit and all other units must be specified as Slave units BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Manual EZI BreezeACCESS 4 0 Operations and Administration When a BS GU i
207. mes that were discarded internally bad frames and duplicate frames Applicable to SU and AU Read only The Counter number of dropped frames The frames that were retransmitted to the extent of the maximum allowed number of retransmissions without being acknowledged Applicable to SU and AU only when the ACSE Counter Option is enabled Read only The number of data frames transmitted to the wireless media The count includes one count for each data frame that was transmitted successfully excluding retransmissions Applicable to AU only when the ACSE Option is Counter enabled Read only The number of beacons transmitted to the wireless media The count includes one count for each beacon that was transmitted successfully excluding retransmission attempts Applicable to SU and AU Read only The total Counter number of data and RTP frames submitted to the bridge for transmission to the wireless media The count does not include control and management frames and retransmissions Applicable to SU and AU Read only Counts the Counter number of frames submitted to the bridge via the High queue for transmission to the wireless media When the ACSE Option is enabled it counts data and RTP frames When the ACSE Option is disabled it counts only data frames Applicable to SU and AU Read only Counts the Counter number of frames submitted to the bridge via the Mid queue for transmission to the wireless media Wh
208. meters appears including the IP Address Subnet Mask and Default Gateway Address parameters To configure any of the IP parameters use the following procedure 1 From the Main Menu select 3 Basic Configuration The Basic Configuration menu opens 2 To configure the IP Address select 1 IP Address 3 To configure the Subnet Mask select 2 Subnet Mask 4 To configure the Default Gateway Address select 3 Default Gateway Address 5 Reset the unit in order for the new configuration to apply LE BreezeACCESS 4 0 System M anual 6 To verify the connection ping the unit s IP address Verify that ping replies are being received The procedure to be used depends on the unit s FLASH memory type Identify the FLASH memory type by using the monitor program connecting the PC to the unit either directly or via Telnet From the Main Menu select 1 Info Screens From the Info Screen menu select 1 Show Unit Status The last line of the Unit Status display will indicate the FLASH type type F or type S Use the TFTP utility with the following syntax to perform the upgrade tftp i hostaddress put sourcefile destinationfile Where i is for binary mode hostaddress is the IP address of the unit to be upgraded put defines that the PC client will send a file to the hostaddress and destinationfile is the name of the file to be loaded Manual Revision 1 01 Appendix A ES Loading an Upgrade to a Unit with FLASH Ty
209. ms in increments of 200 milliseconds 200 400 600 60000 The default value is 200 ms Manual Revision 1 01 M enus and Parameters Eu lt P Start Sending Starts transmission of ping frames lt gt Stop Sending Stops the transmission of ping frames The test will end automatically once the number of pings that were sent have reached the value specified in the No of Pings parameter described above The Stop Sending option can be used to end the test before completing the specified number of pings or if continuous pinging was selected 4 Show Ping Test Values To display the current values of the ping test parameters the transmission status sending or not the number of pings sent and the number of pings received acknowledged frames Continuous Link Quality Display Available in SU Only This option displays a continuously updated table that includes information on the quality of the received signal Received Signal strength Indication or RSSI Press any key to abort the test Each line includes the number of frames that were received since the last measurement total Rx the average RSSI in dBm or RSSI units according to the RSSI Display Option for these frames avrDBM avrRSSI and the Error rate number of retransmitted frames in the last 100 transmitted frames The Error rate is meaningful only when there is traffic from the SU to the AU It is recommended to use the Ping Test see page 2 16 with
210. n accordance with Bellcore 202 standard The Caller ID parameter is supported only by units using a Voice card HW revision D and higher The following options are available KA KA Manual Revision 1 01 Disable ETSI DT AS CID signaling in accordance with ETSI ETS 300 659 1 using Dual Tone Alerting Signal to indicated to the called terminal that CID data transmission is to be expected ETSI RP AS CID signaling in accordance with ETSI ETS 300 659 1 using Ringing Pulse Alerting Signal to indicate to the called terminal that CID data transmission is to be expected ETSI During Ringing CID signaling in accordance with ETSI ETS 300 659 1 transmitting CID data during the first long silence between two ring patterns Bellcore MDMF CID signaling in accordance with Bellcore 202 using Multiple Data Message Format MDMF which includes a name field in addition to the date time and number M enus and Parameters EI RA Bellcore SDMF CID signaling in accordance with Bellcore 202 using Single Data Message Format SDMF which includes the date time and number lt Stop Dialing Timeout The inactivity time following the last dialed digit that will be identified by the unit as an indication to end of dialing Valid range 3 to 60 seconds Default value 5 seconds lt P Stop Dialing Indicator Uses the sign to indicate end of dialing thus to speed the dialing process The options are KA s Disabl
211. n the AU The Operator ESSID can be used to enhance flexibility and reduce configuration effort when adding new Subscriber Units to operational installations in which different ESSIDs were configured for different sectors that actually belong to the same network In such installations all AUs should be configured with the same Operator ESSID The ESSID as well as the Operator ESSID are included in the AU s Beacon amp Probe Response management frames The SU shall regard such frames if the ESSID or Operator ESSID matches its own ESSID The ESSID of the AU with which the SU is associated is defined as the Run Time ESSID to be used by the SU when communicating with the AU The Run Time ESSID is included Manual Revision 1 01 M enus and Parameters EI in the list displayed upon selecting either Show Air Interface Parameters or Show Basic Parameters options in the SU In new installations where all units are configured with the same ESSID Operator ESSID need not be used The following parameters are available vis Operator ESSID Option Enables disables the use of the Operator ESSID when communicating with SUs The default is Enable Operator ESSID Defines the Operator ESSID Valid values a string of up to 31 printable ASCII characters case sensitive The default value is ESSIDI1 Best AU Selection Parameters In BreezeACCESS systems with software version 3 0 and below an SU can associate with any AU it can communica
212. na Polarization Antenna polarization must be the same at either end of the link In most applications the preferred orientation is vertical polarization Above ground propagation of the signal is better when it is polarized vertically For omni antennas make sure that the antennas are extended upward vertically in relation to the floor to achieve vertical polarization To verify polarization of detached antennas refer to the assembly instructions supplied with the antenna set Antenna Seal When using outdoor antennas you must seal the antenna connectors against rain Otherwise the antennas are not suitable for use in outdoor installations Lightning Protection Lightning protection is designed to protect people property and equipment by providing a path to ground for the lightning s energy The lightning arrestor diverts the strike energy to the ground along a deliberate and controlled path instead of allowing it to choose a random path Lightning protection for a building is more forgiving than protection of electronic devices A building can withstand up to 100 000 volts but electronic equipment may be damaged by just a few volts Lightning protection entails connecting an antenna discharge unit also called an arrestor to each cable as close as possible to the point where it enters the building It also entails proper grounding of the arrestors and of the antenna mast if the antenna is connected to one The lightning arrestor s
213. nctionality of the internal management and voice ports in accordance with the value of the VLAN ID Voice Management parameter The table is valid for all link types See VLAN Link type Access Link and Trunk Link for some restrictions when configuring this parameter BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Manual BreezeACCESS 4 0 O perations and Administration Table 2 6 Management and Voice Ports Functionality SU with Voice Support Action Management Port internal Voice RTP Port internal SU SU with Voice Receive from Tagged frames matching VID M Nor applicable Ethernet Untagged frames when VID M 65535 Receive from Tagged frames matching VID M Tagged frames matching VID M Wireless Untagged frames when Untagged frames when VID M 65535 VID M 65535 Transmit Tag Insert VID M PID M If VID M 65535 and Voice Priority Tag option are enabled Tag insert VID 0 PID V If VID M not equal to 65535 insert VID M and PID V Legend VID M VLAN ID Voice and Management PID M VLAN Priority Management PID V VLAN Priority Voice sis VLAN Link Type AU and SU Defines the link type which actually defines the functionality of the VLAN aware capability of the unit Available options are Hybrid Link Trunk Link and Access Link Access Link is available only in SUS The default selection is Hybrid Link ale Access Link SU only Transfers frames while tagging untagging them because all devices connected to i
214. nfiguring Preferred AU Mac Address SU Only lt gt If Best AU Support is enabled you may elect to set the Preferred AU MAC Address parameter by selecting Preferred AU MAC Address from the Best AU Parameters menu and entering the MAC address of the preferred AU Configuring Security Parameters 1 From the Basic Configuration menu select Security Parameters The Security Parameters menu opens 2 If the required authentication algorithm is Open System select Authentication Algorithm from the Security Parameters menu The Authentication Algorithm menu opens Select Open System 3 If the required algorithm is Shared Key do the following lt P Define at least one of the four WEP Keys by selecting one of them from the Security Parameters menu and entering the required key lt P Select Default Key ID from the Security Parameters menu and enter the number of a defined WEP key lt P Select Authentication Algorithm from the Security Parameters menu The Authentication Algorithm menu opens Select Shared Key NOTE The Shared Key option cannot be selected until at least one WEP Key and the appropriate Default Key ID are configured Resetting the Unit After completing the process of configuring the basic parameters the unit should be reset so that all new settings are applied l From the Main Menu select Unit Control The Unit Control menu opens 2 From the Unit Control menu select Reset Unit The Reset Unit
215. nformation rate for each of the supported SUs under changing demand conditions based on the configured CIR and MIR values BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Manual EI BreezeACCESS 4 0 Operations and Administration When the Mir Only Option is enabled the MIR CIR algorithm is overridden and is forced to operate with MIR values only e g the AU attempts to enable all SUs to transmit receive information at the specified MIR value When enabled the graceful degradation algorithm which is a part of the CIR MIR algorithm is also disabled The default is Disable Show MIR CIR Parameters Displays the current values of the MIR and CIR parameters In SUs the display includes the Run Time MIR CIR Option which is the actual status of the option may be different from the MIR CIR Option selected in the SU because it is controlled by the AU lt gt Show Service Parameters Displays the current values of the Service Parameters Security Parameters AU and SU Unauthorized wireless connection is prevented by using the Wired Equivalent Privacy WEP algorithm defined in the IEEE 802 11 Wireless LAN standard The WEP is based on RSA s RC4 encryption algorithm The following parameters are available in the Security Parameters menu lt gt Authentication Algorithm Determines the operation mode of the unit The available options are RA SS Manual Revision 1 01 Open System An SU configured to Open System can be authenticated only by
216. ng DisplayString BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Manual BreezeACCESS 4 0 System M anual Special Operations Parameters MIB Parameter Description Values Range Location in Parenthesis SpecialOp 710 3 3 9 brzAccessMib 9 RadioBand Applicable to AU and SU Read only DisplayString SIZE 15 710 3 3 9 1 Identifies the product family band 2 4 BreezeACCESS Il MMDS 2 6a 2 6b 3 3a SpecialOp 3 3 5a 3 5a1 3 5b 3 5ab 3 6b 3 8 5 7 SD 5 7 D D Note Additional Special Operations parameters are reserved for factory use only Manual Revision 1 01 Appendix B EI Unit Control Parameters MIB Parameter Location in Parenthesis UnitControl 710 3 3 10 brzAccessMib 10 ResetUnit 710 3 3 10 1 UnitControl 1 SetDefaults 710 3 3 10 2 UnitControl 2 UnitName 710 3 3 10 3 UnitControl 3 FlashMemoryControl 710 3 3 10 4 UnitControl 4 ConsoleSpeed 710 3 3 10 5 UnitControl 5 MonitorLogoutTimer 710 3 3 10 6 UnitControl 6 UnitPasswords 710 3 3 10 7 UnitControl 7 ReadOnlyPassword 710 3 3 10 7 1 UnitPasswords 1 InstallerPassword 710 3 3 10 7 2 UnitPasswords 2 AdminPassword 710 3 3 10 7 3 UnitPasswords 3 Event og 710 3 3 10 10 UnitControl 10 Applicable to all products Resets the unit and applies new parameter values Applicable to all products Sets unit configuration to Defaults values after the next reset com
217. ng SU with Disable Enable Enable voice Gatekeeper Option SU with Disable Enable Disable voice Gatekeeper SU with IP address 0 0 0 0 Gateway IP Address voice Alternate SU with Disable Enable Disable Gatekeeper Option voice Alternate SU with IP address 0 0 0 0 voice Telephone Number SU with Up to 10 decimal digits 0000000000 voice H323 Terminal ID SU with Up to 24 characters X No terminal ID No voice IP Dialing Option SU with Disable Enable Enable Yes voice IP Dialing Indicator SU with up to 3 phone key pad digits S Yes voice 0 9 A B C D Z O Z O O O Z Gatekeeper IP Address No Automatic Prefix SU with up to 8 phone key pad digits X No prefix Yes voice 0 9 A B C D Fast Start SU with Disable Enable Enable Yes voice SU with voice Speech Unrestricted Restricted Speech Information Transfer Capability 3 1KHz audio Unrestricted with tones Video Dialing Prefix SU with Disable Enable Enable amp Block Disable Yes Option voice Inter Regional Prefix O Yes Inter Regional SU with One phone key pad digit 0 9 Prefix voice A B C D and X no prefix International Prefix SU with One phone key pad digit 0 9 voice A B C D and X no prefix Registration TTL SU with 0 not active 1 65535 voice DTMF Relay SU with Disable Enable Enable Enable voice Proprietary Manual Revision 1 01 Yes ll O O Appendix
218. ng Sequence see page 2 22 Hopping Set see page 2 23 Hopping Sync AU BS see page 2 35 Transmit Antenna SU R SU I I D see page 2 33 gt gt gt Best AU Parameters SU see page 2 26 Best AU Support Preferred AU MAC Address 4 Maximum Data Rate SU see page 2 29 VLAN Parameters lt gt VLAN ID Management AU and SU without voice support see page 2 38 lt P gt VLAN ID Voice amp Management SU with voice support see page 2 39 lt gt VLAN Link Type see page 2 40 Manual Revision 1 01 M enus and Parameters E Security Parameters lt P Authentication Algorithm see page 2 56 Default Key ID see page 2 57 WEP Key 1 see page 2 57 Ar lt P WEP Key 2 see page 2 57 lt P WEP Key 3 see page 2 57 4 WEP Key 4 see page 2 57 E KS All parameters in the Basic Configuration menu are also available in the appropriate submenus of the Advanced Configuration menu BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Manual EU BreezeACCESS 4 0 Operations and Administration Site Survey Menu The Site Survey menu provides various tests and counters for verifying the quality of the wireless link and the proper operation of the unit These tests can be used to help determine where to position the units for optimal coverage to align antennas and to assist in troubleshooting Traffic Statistics AU and SU The traffic statistics can be used to monitor interpret and analyze the
219. ng used e g Smoke Detector 1 or Main Door BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Manual E BreezeACCESS 4 0 Operations and Administration Each Alarms In Name can contain up to 31 printable ASCII characters Case sensitive The default names are Alarm In 1 through Alarm In 4 Alarms Out Names The Alarms Out Names menu allows names for each of the three external devices that can be connected to the AL OUT connector to be defined These names can reflect the specific environment in which the module is being used e g Alarm Light 1 Each Alarms Out Name can contain up to 31 printable ASCII characters Case sensitive The default names are Alarm Out 1 through Alarm Out 3 Automatic Alarms Out Definition The Automatic Alarms Out Definition menu allows you to define the conditions under which each of the 3 Alarms Out are to be activated when operating in Automatic mode The available options for each of the three Alarms Out are lt gt 1 Activate if Alarm In 1 turns ON 2 Activate if Alarm In 2 turns ON 3 Activate if Alarm In 3 turns ON 4 Activate if Alarm In 4 turns ON 5 Activate if Alarm In 5 GPS Antenna Status turns ON 6 Not Applicable Alarm In 6 is not defined 7 Activate if Alarm In 7 PS1Over Temperature turns ON 8 Activate if Alarm In 8 PS2 Over Temperature turns ON 9 Activate if Alarm In 9 PS1 Power turns ON 10 Activate if Alarm In 10 PS2 Power turns ON N Non
220. nna BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Manual EI BreezeACCESS 4 0 Installation Connecting the Antenna Cable SU RE and AU RE Connect an RF cable between the ANT connector located on the top panel of the unit and the antenna Connecting the Ground and IF Cables The ground terminal marked and the IF cable connector marked IF are located on the bottom panel of the unit l Connect one end of the ground cable to the ground terminal and tighten the ground screw firmly Connect the other end of the ground cable to a protective ground connection 2 Connect the coaxial cable to the IF connector Verify that the length of the IF cable is sufficient and that it can easily reach the indoor unit e n Make sure to switch off the power at the indoor unit prior to connecting disconnecting the IF cable to from the outdoor unit Manual Revision 1 01 IF Based Equipment Installing the SU NI and AU NI Indoor Unit f 12vDC ETHERNET ZI Figure 1 7 SU NI with Voice Support Rear Panel Soon O Power O M WLNK ai MON ech Figure 1 8 SU NI AU NI Front Panel e E The rear panel pictured above in Figure 1 7 is a SU NI with voice support AU NI units and SU NI units that belong to Subscriber Units without voice support are identical except that they have no TEL port BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Manual BreezeACCESS 4 0 Installation Table 1 6 SU NI AU NI LEDs Power Supply On
221. not received RTS collision Applicable to SU and AU Read only The Counter number of transmit errors that have occurred because there was not enough time left to transmit the message prior to the end of the Dwell Applicable to SU and AU Read only The total Counter number of data frames received from the wireless media including duplicate frames Applicable to SU and AU Read only The total Counter number of data frames received from the wireless media and routed via the receive High queue including duplicate frames Applicable to SU and AU Read only The total Counter number of data frames received from the wireless media and routed via the receive Low queue including duplicate frames Appendix B BadFragmentsReceived 710 3 3 8 2 3 31 WlanCounters 31 DuplicatedFramesDiscarded 710 3 3 8 2 3 32 WlanCounters 32 InternallyDiscardedMirCir 710 3 3 8 2 3 33 WlanCounters 33 VoiceCounters 710 3 3 8 2 4 TrafficStatistics 4 VoiceTrafficTxFrames 710 3 3 8 2 4 1 VoiceCounters 1 Voice TrafficRxFrames 710 3 3 8 2 4 2 VoiceCounters 2 Voice Traffic TxBytes 710 3 3 8 2 4 3 VoiceCounters 3 VoiceTrafficRxBytes 710 3 3 8 2 4 4 VoiceCounters 4 VoiceTrafficResetCounters 710 3 3 8 2 4 5 VoiceCounters 5 PerRateCounters 710 3 3 8 2 5 TrafficStatistics 5 ResetPerRateCounters 710 3 3 8 2 5 1 PerRateCounters 1 PerRateCountersSU 710 3 3
222. ntennas you must seal the antenna connectors against rain Otherwise the antennas are not suitable for use in outdoor installations Lightning Protection Lightning protection is designed to protect people property and equipment by providing a path to the ground for the lightning s energy The lightning arrestor diverts the strike energy to the ground along a deliberate and controlled path instead of allowing it to choose a random path Lightning protection for a building is more forgiving than protection of electronic devices A building can withstand up to 100 000 volts but electronic equipment may be damaged by just a few volts Lightning protection entails connecting an antenna discharge unit also called an arrestor to each cable as close as possible to the point where it enters the building It also entails proper grounding of the arrestors and of the antenna mast if the antenna is connected to one The lightning arrestor should be installed and grounded at the point where the cable enters the building The arrestor is connected to the unit at one end and to the antenna at the other end The professional installer you choose must be knowledgeable about lightning protection The installer must install the lightning protector in a way that maximizes lightning protection BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Manual ES BreezeAC CESS 4 0 Installation Installing SU R Indoor Units Wall Mounting the Unit e E To avoid drilling unnecessary ho
223. ntrols the supply of 12 VDC power to the outdoor unit via the IF cable The momentary RESET position of this switch is for resetting the outdoor unit In the OFF position power is not supplied to the outdoor unit even when the BS AU unit is still on BS SH Chassis and Modules Installation Procedure 1 Install the BS SH chassis in a 19 cabinet or place on an appropriate shelf table When mounting the BS SH chassis on a desktop screw on the rubber legs shipped with the unit To prevent over heating leave a free space of at least 1 U between the upper lower covers of the chassis and other units 2 Connect a ground cable between the ground terminal located on the back panel of the BS SH chassis and a grounding point or to the rack when appropriate BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Manual ET BreezeACCESS 4 0 Installation 3 Carefully insert the BS PS or BS PS AC Power Supply and the BS AU modules into their intended slots and push firmly until they are securely locked Before inserting the modules verify that the switches of all BS AU modules are in the OFF position Close the captive screws attached to each module Place blank covers over all the unused slots 4 Connect the IF cable s to the connector s marked IF located on the front panel s of the BS AU module s as shown in Figure 1 12 page 1 18 The other side of the IF cable should already be connected to the outdoor unit 5 If a BS PS DC power supply is used connect the D
224. ny database supported by the network management platform such as Oracle Sybase Informix or Ingress BreezeCONFIG The BreezeCONFIG ACCESS configuration utility can also be used to manage BreezeACCESS system components It is an SNMP based application that provides a consistent view of the network and the system administrator can use it to control a large number of units from a single location BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Manual EZ BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Description BreezeCONFIG has the following system requirements lt gt Windows 95 98 NT 2000 Me XP lt gt 128 MB RAM recommended 64 MB Minimum Some of the features BreezeCONFIG supports are Verifying units status and current configuration Changing the configuration of a selected unit Simultaneously changing the configuration of multiple units Viewing traffic statistics and performance data Monitoring traps gt oo Performing firmware upgrade to a single or multiple units we The BreezeCONFIG utility can be downloaded from the Alvarion Web site www alvarion com Manual Revision 1 01 Chapter 3 alvarion N Specifications We re on your wavelength About This Chapter This chapter lists the technical specifications of BreezeACCESS and includes the following sections lt gt System Specifications page 3 2 outlines the technical specifications of the BreezeACCESS system lt gt Physical Specifications page 3 7 lists the physical and electical spe
225. onents EI Figure 2 5 BreezeACCESS GU A BS System Components The BreezeACCESS BS GU module is designed to be inserted into the BS SH 19 base station chassis to provide hopping synchronization signals to the BS AU Access Unit modules The card uses timing signals derived from signals received from the GU RA GPS antenna These signals generated by the GPS global satellites network allow accurate synchronization of systems located in different locations Any number of base stations can be synchronized guaranteeing that all AUs Access Units hop in unison from frequency to frequency In addition the GPS signal insures that all units begin their pre defined hopping sequence at the same time The BS GU module is connected to the GU RA GPS antenna via a cable that carries power from the module to the antenna timing signals from the antenna to the module and management signals between the two units The BS GU also provides synchronization signals to other BS GU modules by daisy chaining any number of modules allowing a single GU RA GPS antenna to synchronize multiple AUs in several collocated BS SH chassis When a GU RA GPS antenna is not connected to the module or if the connected GPS antenna is not functioning properly the BS GU module provides self generated synchronization signals to all AUs BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Manual EJ BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Description Daisy chained BS GU modules use the synchronization signals gene
226. ons and Administration Ss Since the system supports both Layer 2 and Layer 3 prioritization a frame will be routed to the Mid queue if one of the following conditions is met a The precedence in the ToS field is higher than the value of the ToS Precedence Threshold parameter applicable to both tagged and untagged frames b The VLAN Priority field in a tagged frame is higher than the value of the VLAN Priority Threshold parameter Valid values are 0 7 The default value is 4 Show VLAN Parameters Displays the current values of the VLAN Support parameters ToS Priority Parameters AU and SU lt gt ToS Priority To set voice priority parameters to support end to end IPv4 Type of Service ToS Layer 3 prioritization according to RFC 791 The ToS Priority menu includes the following parameters oy Manual Revision 1 01 Voice Packets ToS SU with voice support only Sets the value of the Type of Service ToS field in the IP header of voice frames RTP packets If the router gateway in the base stations supports quality of service based on IPv4 ToS the value of this parameters should be configured according to the definitions of the router gateway in order to take advantage of the QoS feature and to ensure that voice packets will be handled accordingly Valid values are 0 255 The default value is O ToS Precedence Threshold AU and SU ToS based prioritization is in accordance with the precedence
227. ords are not changed upon setting the unit to default values either Partial or Complete BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Manual ES BreezeACCESS 4 0 Operations and Administration lt gt Flash Memory Control Selects the active software version The following options are available sie Reset and Boot from Shadow Version Activates the Shadow backup software version The unit resets automatically and loads the shadow firmware e Use Current Version After Reset Defines the current version as the one that will be activated and used after the next reset The flash memory can store two software versions One version is called Current and the other is called Shadow New software versions are loaded as the Shadow version You can select the Shadow version as the new active version by selecting Reset and Boot from Shadow Version However after the next reset the Current version will be activated again If you wish to continue using the currently active version after the next reset select Use Current Version After Reset The parameters configured in the unit are not changed as a result of downloading new software versions unless the new version includes additional parameters or other changes in the list of parameters New parameters are loaded with their default values lt P Console Speed Defines the speed at which the unit communicates with the terminal running the terminal emulation program This parameter must be changed prior to ch
228. orts multiple Crossed Straight Ethernet devices SU 8D SU 8D1V SU BD SU BD1V Manual Revision 1 01 IF Based Equipment E Guidelines for Selection of Equipment Locations we we NOTE Outdoor units and antennas should be installed ONLY by experienced installation professionals who are familiar with local building and safety codes and wherever applicable are licensed by the appropriate government regulatory authorities Failure to do so may void the BreezeACCESS product warranty and may expose the end user or the service provider to legal and financial liabilities Alvarion and its resellers or distributors are not liable for injury damage or violation of regulations associated with the installation of outdoor units or antennas Select appropriate locations for the outdoor unit and for the indoor equipment using the following guidelines lt P The outdoor unit can be pole or wall mounted Its location should allow easy access to the unit for installation and testing 4 The higher the antenna the better the achievable link quality Units with an external antenna should be installed as near as possible to the antenna AU RA and AU RE The AU RA unit with its integrated antenna or the external antenna connected to the AU RE unit should be installed where it provides coverage of all Subscriber Terminals in the area it is intended to serve The higher the AU RA or the antenna the better coverage it can provide NOT
229. otocol Only only PPPoE frames pass Ethernet type 0x8863 and 0x8864 The default selection is Disable Set User Filter Address Displays the current User Filter IP addresses Allows you to enter up to 8 IP addresses to be Manual Revision 1 01 M enus and Parameters EI used if the User Defined Addresses Only option was selected in the User Filtering Option above The default for all addresses is 000 000 000 000 vis Set User Filter Mask Displays the current masks Allows you to enter subnet masks for each of the User Filter IP Address entries The default for all subnet masks is 255 255 255 255 sis Set User Filter Range Defines a range of addresses for each of the User Filter IP Address entries the range includes the base address Valid values O 255 The default value is O not used e m You may use either Mask or Range but not both to define a group of user filter addresses If IP broadcast packets should reach the devices connected behind the SU unit the Broadcast IP address should be included in the configured User Filter Address entries sis Delete a User Filtering Entry Displays the current list of IP addresses subnet masks and ranges Enter the list number from O to 7 to delete the entry from the list the list number will be replaced by the default values Delete All User Filtering Entries Deletes all User Filtering entries and replaces them with the d
230. ower supply unit Connect the mains power plug to a mains power outlet 5 Verify that the Power LED marked PWR located on the front panel of the unit as shown in Figure 1 8 page 1 13 is lit Manual Revision 1 01 IF Based Equipment Lin Installing Modular Base Station Equipment BS SH Slot Assignments The base station chassis has ten slots 8 Middle slots BS AU modules Extreme slots Power supply modules Figure 1 9 BS SH Chassis Slot Assignments The two wide slots on both sides of the shelf accommodate the BS PS or BS PS AC power supply modules The shelf is designed to support power supply redundancy through the use of two power supply modules If a single power supply is used it can be inserted in any of the two available slots When using two power supply modules both modules must be the same type either both BS PS or both BS PS AC The remaining eight slots can accommodate up to six active BS AU modules Two extra slots are for an optional BS GU GPS module and or for future use Active BS AU modules can be installed in any of the eight slots Unused slots should be covered by blank panels The BS PS The BS PS provides power to all the modules installed in the BS SH chassis The BS PS front panel is shown in Figure 1 10 page 1 16 BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Manual ES BreezeACCESS 4 0 Installation Figure 1 10 BS PS Front Panel The BS PS provides a power input connector marked 48V for connectin
231. pe F e Use the following table to determine which source file name to use according to the unit s type Source File Name AU AXF BS SU AXF SU SU with Voice AXF SUV AXF GU X refers to the software version number up to 5 decimal digits e g for software release 4 0 40 X 4040 Use the SNMP write community lt SnmpWriteCommunity gt dwn the default write community is private to define the destination filename For example to load the upgrade file A3011F BS to an AU whose IP address is 206 25 63 65 use the following syntax tftp i 206 25 63 65 put A3011F BS private dwn NOTE If you are upgrading a Subscriber Unit which is not associated with an AU the unit will reset every five minutes approximately and the following message will be displayed FTL file src wpscan c line 262 Too large number of scanning attempts The unit will reset and it will take more than a minute before you can re establish the connection to it You should either have the SU associated with an AU before starting the loading process or complete the loading process before the unit resets Otherwise you will have to try again until you complete the loading process When version loading is completed the following message is displayed Loading operation has been completed successfully The FLASH memory can store two software versions One version is called Current and the second version is called Shadow The new version is loaded into the S
232. playString Integer on 1 off 2 MAC address Integer monitorLogin 1 monitorLogout 2 telnetLogin 3 telnetLogout 4 Integer cirOrMir 1 ipFilter 2 billing 3 vlan 4 Integer notLoggedin 0 readOnly 1 installer 2 administrator 3 factory 4 IP address Integer 1 10 DisplayString Integer 0 100 BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Manual BreezeACCESS 4 0 System M anual EI i Traps SUassociatedAUTRAP 2 AUdisassociatedT RAP 3 An AU trap indicating that an SU has been disassociated from the AU The AU decides that an SU has been disassociated from it and remove it from the ADB after receiving from another AU a SNAP frame with the SU MAC address The SNAP frame indicating a network topology change where the SU has associated with another AU will be received if both AUs are connected to the same Ethernet backbone AUagingTRAP 4 An AU trap indicating that an SU was aged out and removed from the ADB following its failure to acknowledge a certain number of consecutive frames transmitted to it SUassociated TRAP 6 An SU trap indicating association with an AU In addition to the MAC address information of the AU the trap also includes information on the average RSSI of frames received from the AU SUWirelessQualityTRAP 7 An SU trap indicating that the quality of the wireless link has changed and dropped below On or has improved above Off defined by the WirelessTrapThr
233. pleteFactory All parameters revert to Factory Defaults values partialFactory All parameters revert to Factory Defaults values except the parameters required for maintaining wireless connectivity completeOperator All parameters revert to Operator Defaults values partialOperator All parameters revert to Operator Defaults values except the parameters required for maintaining wireless connectivity Applicable to all products The unit name Applicable to all products Reset And Boot From Shadow Version Activates the backup version Use Current Version After Reset The currently active version is activated after reset Applicable to all products The communication speed of the Monitor port Applicable to all products Time out of management programs Monitor Telnet Automatic exit if the program is inactive for the defined time Applicable to all products The User read only password Applicable to all products The Installer password Applicable to all products The Administrator password This is also the SNMP Write Community String Applicable to all products Event Log parameters Values Range Integer cancel 0 resetSystemNow 1 Integer cancel 0 completeFactory 1 partialFactory 2 completeOperator 1 partialOperator 2 DisplayString SIZE 32 A string of up to 32 printable ASCII characters Integer Cancel 0 resetAndBootFrom ShadowVersion 1 useCurrentVersion AfterRe
234. property Verify that the outdoor unit and the antenna mast when using external antenna are grounded so as to provide protection against voltage surges and static charges Make sure that the installation of the outdoor unit antenna and cables is performed in accordance with all relevant national and local building and safety codes ET BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Description Important Notice This user s manual is applicable to BreezeACCESS units using software version 4 0 or later and is delivered subject to the following conditions and restrictions lt gt This manual contains proprietary information belonging to Alvarion Ltd Such information is supplied solely for the purpose of assisting explicitly and properly authorized users of BreezeACCESS lt P No part of its contents may be used for any other purpose disclosed to any person or firm or reproduced by any means electronic and mechanical without the express prior written permission of Alvarion Ltd lt P The text and graphics are for the purpose of illustration and reference only The specifications on which they are based are subject to change without notice lt gt The software described in this document is furnished under a license The software may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of that agreement Information in this document is subject to change without notice Corporate and individual names and data used in examples herein are fictitious un
235. r Hop Statistics AU and SU 2 15 Ping Test AU SU and GU _ 2 16 Continuous Link Quality Display Available in SU Only oocccoocncccccncccnccccccncccnnoconononnnnnnnnnnos 2 17 MAC Address Database Available in AU Only 2 17 Per rate Counters AU and SU sssessuss 2 19 RSSI Display Option AU and SU 2 20 Advanced Configuration Menu 2 21 IP Parameters AU SU and GU 2 21 Air Interface Parameters AU and SU 2 22 Network Management Parameters AU SU and GU 2 35 Bridge Parameters AU SU and GU 2 37 Performance Parameters AU and SU 2 49 Service Parameters AU and SU 2 52 EM BreezeACCESS 4 0 Operations and Administration Security Parameters AU and SU 2 56 Voice Parameters Subscriber Units with Voice Support Only 2 57 Dialing Parameters Subscriber Units with Voice Support Only 2 59 Telephony Signals Subscriber Units with Voice Support Only 2 65 Hopping Parameters GU 2 71 Alarm Parameters GU sarita 2 73 Configuration Dowhnload Upload sip obicere Redit vC DUERME 3 1 Chapter 1 r
236. r di alvarion N Accessing the Monitor Program About This Chapter This chapter explains how to access the monitor program It also describes how to use the monitor program to set up configure and manage BreezeACCESS Broadband Wireless Access system units This includes the Subscriber Units SUs Access Units AUs and GPS and Alarms modules GUs EN BreezeACCESS 4 0 Operations and Administration Accessing the Monitor Program using the RS 232 MON Connector l Use the monitor cable to connect the MON connector of the unit to the COM port of your ASCII ANSI terminal or PC The COM port connector on the monitor cable is a 9 pin D type plug we The GU BS GPS and Alarms module does not have an external MON port It does have an internal MON port that can be used in laboratory conditions consult Alvarion technical support for further details It is recommended to use Telnet to access the monitor program of the GU BS 2 Run a terminal emulation program such as HyperTerminal V 3 Set the communication parameters to the following Baud Rate 9600 Data Bits 8 Stop Bits 1 Parity None Flow Control Xon Xoff Connector Connected COM port 4 Press Enter The Select Access Level menu appears Select the access level according to your authorized access level You will be requested to enter your password After entering the correct password press Enter Table 1 1 page 3 lists the default passwords for each of the access
237. rameters If a DHCP Server is not found within approximately 40 seconds use the currently configured IP parameters The default is Disable Access to DHCP To define the port through which the unit is allowed to communicate with a DHCP server The options are ale X From Wlan Only From Ethernet Only X From Both Ethernet amp Wlan The default for an Access Unit is From Ethernet Only The default for a Subscriber Unit is From Wlan Only K The Access to DHCP option is not available in the GU as this module does not have a wireless link interface lt P Show IP Parameters Displays the current values of the IP Parameters Air Interface Parameters AU and SU Hopping Frequencies Setting Parameters lt gt Hopping Sequence Displays the Hopping Sequence of the unit A hopping sequence is a pre defined series of channels frequencies that are used in a specific pseudo random order as defined in the sequence The unit hops from frequency to frequency according to the selected sequence When more than one AU is co located in the same area it is recommended to assign different hopping sequences to each AU Hopping Sequences are grouped in three hopping sets see Hopping Set parameter below When setting up multiple AUs in the same Manual Revision 1 01 M enus and Parameters EZ site always choose hopping sequences from the same Hopping Set to reduce the possibility of collisions on the wireless
238. ransmitted at the specified frequency since last reset avrDBM The average RSSI Received Signal Strength Indication in dBm avrRSSI or RSSI units according to the RSSI Display Option of all the frames received at the specified frequency since the last reset If no frames have been received the avrRSSI 1s NA Not Available The Rx Tx and RTx per hop counters accumulate the number of applicable frames since last reset The counters can also be reset using the Reset Counters option in either the Per Hop Statistics menu or in the Traffic Counters menu The general rate Frames per second statistics is the average rate during the last 64 hops The display is continuously updated Press any key to exit Ping Test AU SU and GUJ The Ping Test menu includes the following options lt gt Destination IP Address Displays the IP address of the destination unit for pinging Allows entering an IP address 4 x 3 digit octets separated by dots The default IP address is 192 000 000 001 No of Pings Enter the number of ping attempts per session The allowed range is from O to 9999 Select O for continuous pinging The default value is 1 Ping Frame Length Enter the ping packet size The allowed range is from 60 to 1472 bytes The default value is 64 bytes Ping Frame Timeout Enter the ping frame timeout which is the amount of time in ms to wait between ping attempts The allowed range is from 200 to 60000
239. rated by the first unit in the chain the Master unit The BS GU module also supports the management of alarm inputs and outputs The module receives Alarms In indications from other BreezeACCESS modules in the base station shelf internal alarms and external alarms from other devices via the AL IN connector Alarms Out management allows activation of external devices upon occurrence of user defined events using relays via the AL OUT connector AU A E NI Standalone Micro Cell Access Unit The AU A E NI is aline includes Standalone Access Units that are very similar to the AU A E BS units the only difference being that the indoor unit the AU NI is a Standalone desktop or wall mountable unit rather than a 19 module Figure 2 6 BreezeACCESS AU NI Unit The AU RA RE outdoor units are identical to those of the AU A E BS line with the same output power levels The AU NI indoor unit is powered from the mains 100 250 VAC through an external power transformer and connects to the network through a standard IEEE 802 3 Ethernet 10BaseT RJ 45 interface A coaxial Intermediate Frequency IF cable connects between the AU NI indoor unit and the outdoor unit This cable carries 440 MHz IF signals power 12 VDC and management and control signals from the indoor unit to the outdoor unit AU I D Miniature Indoor Units The AU I I D line includes miniature units that are designed for indoor desktop or wall mount installations and comprise
240. re 1 2 and 3 Mbps The default is the minimum possible rate 1Mbps lt P Multi Rate Link quality dynamically changes due to various environmental conditions Dynamically switching between the possible transmission rates increases the probability of using the maximum rate for the current radio link quality at any given moment Decreasing the rate one step improves the receiver sensitivity by 6 8dB When enabled the transmission rate decisions are made separately for each unit This algorithm is completely separated from the retransmission mechanism defined by Number of Retransmission and Number of Dwells to Retransmit parameters The algorithm provides Access Units with simultaneous adaptive support for multiple Subscriber Units at different rates The decision on the rate of each transmission first attempt is based on counting transmissions retransmissions and successful windows A window is defined as N consecutive transmission or retransmission attempts defined by the Multi Rate Decision Window Size parameter A successful window is a window in which the number of failed transmissions is not higher than a defined threshold A transmission is defined as failed if an ACK was not received after the first transmission of a frame If the current rate is lower than the maximum available rate the transmission rate will be increased to the next available rate following a successful window If the current rate is higher than the minimum availab
241. rities according to the following order G729 G723 1 G71lulaw G711 Alaw The range is 1 to 7654321 The default is 2134 4 Compression Efficiency Specifys the number of voice frames to be packed into one RTP Real Time Protocol frame The higher the value of the Frames per Packet parameter the higher are the delay introduced reduced quality and the higher is the number of simultaneous voice sessions that can be supported by the AU There is a separate setting for each of the voice codecs that are supported by the unit The allowed range differs among codecs in accordance with the different packet sizes 30 ms for G723 1 10 ms for G729 and 5 ms for G711 The valid values and default values are G723 Frames Per Packet Valid range 1 8 Default value is 2 G729 Frames Per Packet Valid range is 1 12 Default value is 6 If upgrading from a previous version this value must be set to 6 if ACSE Option is enabled covers all G729 codecs including G729Annex A G729wAnnexB and G729AnnexAwAnnexB G711u law Frames Per Packet Valid range is 1 16 Default value is 12 G711A law Frames Per Packet Valid range is 1 16 Default value is 12 e When the ACSE Option is enabled this parameter is not applicable and the default value is always used lt gt Voice Activity Detection Enables or disables the use of Voice Activity Detection VAD When the VAD algorithm is enabled silence intervals are identified
242. rocess for generating the basic hopping sequence Standard mode this mode automatically scrambles the frequencies according to the algorithm used in SW version 3 x and lower It is suitable for up to 6 frequencies Enhanced mode this mode automatically scrambles the frequencies according to a new algorithm Manual mode The user defines the hopping sequence using the frequencies indexes Applicable to SU and AU Manual scrambling definition Configuring the sequence using the frequenciesi indexes DisplayString SIZE 10 DisplayString SIZE 10 Integer space1_75MHz 0 space 1MHz 1 space2MHz 2 na 255 DisplayString SIZE 244 Up to 244 printable ASCII characters in one of the following formats 1 A1 2 B2 C3 G4 no spaces DisplayString SIZE 244 Up to 244 printable ASCII characters in one of the following formats 1 A1 2 B2 C3 G4 no spaces Integer standardMode 1 manualMode 2 enhancedMode 3 Display String Up to 244 printable ASCII characters Allowed Range of Indexes 1 to Number of Channels Sequence Length must be equal to Number of Channels Use a comma to separate between entries BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Manual EJ BreezeACCESS 4 0 System M anual EraseManualSequence 710 3 3 6 15 9 3 ScramblingDefinition 3 SpanningFactor 710 3 3 6 15 9 4 ScramblingDefinition 4 ScrambledSeqTable 710 3 3 6 15 9 5 ScramblingDefinition 5 Scr
243. rocess of any of the synthesizers Off Normal operation BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Manual ETE BreezeACCESS 4 0 Installation Table 1 4 SU RA RE Bar Display Description Yellow LED Power On power is present Off power is not received from the indoor unit 8 Green LEDs Received signal strength Received RF signal level indication indication in 4 dB resolution starting from 91 dBm Red LED High RF signal level Received signal level is 40 dBm or higher Ground screw Figure 1 2 AU RA RE Bottom Panel Manual Revision 1 01 IF Based Equipment Table 1 5 AU RA RE LEDs Ethernet activity Blinking Data received from or transmitted to Ethernet LAN Off No activity on the Ethernet LAN 12V IN Power On 12 VDC power is supplied to the unit Off 12 VDC power is not available Alarm indication On A problem with the power amplifier or in the locking process of any of the synthesizers Off Normal operation Pole Mounting the Outdoor Unit The outdoor unit can be secured to the pole using one of the following options lt P Special brackets and open ended screws supplied with each unit There are two pairs of screw holes on the back of the unit allowing use of the special brackets with various pole widths lt P U bolts size A inner installation holes up to 2 pole lt P U bolt size B outside installation holes up to 3 pole lt P Metal bands 9 16 wide minimum 12
244. rs 710 3 3 8 2 3 TrafficStatistics 3 TotalTxFrames ToWireless Applicable to SU and AU Read only The Counter 710 3 3 8 2 3 1 number of frames transmitted to the wireless WlanCounters 1 media The count includes one count for each data or RTP frame that was transmitted successfully excluding retransmissions and also the number of transmitted control and management frames Manual Revision 1 01 Appendix B TotalRxFramesFromWireless 710 3 3 8 2 3 2 WlanCounters 2 TotalRetransmittedFragments 710 3 3 8 2 3 3 WlanCounters 3 WlanFramesDropped 710 3 3 8 2 3 4 WlanCounters 4 TransmittedFramesToWirelessData 710 3 3 8 2 3 5 WlanCounters 5 TransmittedFramesToWirelessVoice 710 3 3 8 2 3 6 WlanCounters 6 TransmittedFramesToWirelessBeacon 710 3 3 8 2 3 7 WlanCounters 7 TotalSubmittedFrames 710 3 3 8 2 3 8 WlanCounters 8 SubmittedFramesHigh 710 3 3 8 2 3 9 WlanCounters 9 SubmittedFramesMid 710 3 3 8 2 3 10 WlanCounters 10 SubmittedFramesLow 710 3 3 8 2 3 11 WlanCounters 11 SubmittedFramesVoice 710 3 3 8 2 3 12 WlanCounters 12 FramesDroppedData 710 3 3 8 2 3 13 WlanCounters 13 Applicable to SU and AU Read only The total Counter number of frames that were received from the wireless media The count includes data and control and management frames including beacons received from the AU The count does not include fra
245. rwardingEntry Applicable to AU and SU A VLAN Forwarding 710 3 3 5 2 7 2 1 Table entry applicable in Trunk links only VlanForwarding Table 1 Not accessible VlanForwardingldx Applicable to AU and SU A read only table Integer 710 3 3 5 2 7 2 1 1 index for a VLAN entry in the VLAN 0 19 VianForwardingEntry 1 Forwarding Table VlanldForwarding Applicable to AU and SU The list of VLAN Integer 710 3 3 5 2 7 2 1 2 ID s in the VLAN ID Forwarding Table To 1 4094 VlanForwardingEntry 2 Remove a VLAN ID SET the corresponding O remove entry entry to 0 To Add a new VLAN ID SET an entry which is currently 0 VLANRelaying VLAN Relaying Feature Parameters 710 3 3 5 2 8 VLANSupport 8 Manual Revision 1 01 Appendix B VlanRelayingSupport 710 3 3 5 2 8 1 VLANRelaying 1 VlanRelayingTable 710 3 3 5 2 8 2 VLANRelaying 2 VlanRelayingEntry 710 3 3 5 2 8 2 1 VlanRelaying Table 1 VlanRelayingldx 710 3 3 5 2 8 2 1 1 VlanRelayingEntry 1 VlanidRelaying 710 3 3 5 2 8 2 1 2 VlanRelayingEntry 2 VLANTTrafficPriority 710 3 3 5 2 9 VLANSupport 9 VlanDataPriority 710 3 3 5 2 9 1 VLANTrafficPriority 1 VlanVoicePriority 710 3 3 5 2 9 2 VLANTrafficPriority 2 VlanManagementPriority 710 3 3 5 2 9 3 VLANTrafficPriority 3 PriorityQueueThreshold 710 3 3 5 2 9 4 VLANTrafficPriority 4 BridgeAgingTime 710 3 3 5 3 BridgeParameters 3 LanToWireless
246. s B dai Power Level SU R SU I Low High High AU I Transmit Antenna SU R Use Two Antennas Use Antenna SU I AU I Use Antenna No 1 Number 1 Use Antenna No 2 Receive Attenuation SU A E IF 0 10dB 25dB Control based units Maximum Data AU SU 1 2 and 3Mbps 3Mbps Rate Acknowledge Delay AU SU Low Medium High Low Limit Maximum Number 512 512 Yes of Associations Call Aging Time Km 1 no aging 2 50 000 seconds 1800 seconds Maximum Voice Sessions ACSE Option AU and GU Disable Enable ACSE Maximum Voice Sessions BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Manual O O O ES BreezeACCESS 4 0 System M anual ACSE Number Of Retransmissions For Data ACSE Number Of AU SU with Retransmissions For voice Voice Manual Revision 1 01 Appendix D EI Network Management Parameters Parameter Unit Range Default Run Time Updated Access To Network AU SU From Wlan Only From Both Management From Ethernet Only Ethernet amp Wlan From Both Ethernet amp Wlan Network Disable Disable No Management Activate Management IP Filter Filtering On Ethernet Port Activate Management IP Filter On Wlan Port not available in GU Activate Management IP Filter On Both Ethernet amp Wlan Ports not available in GU mE uu Set Network Management IP Address IP address 0 0 0 0 all 3 entries Send SNMP Traps Disable Traps Sending Disable Traps Enable Traps Sending Sending SNPM Traps IP IP address 0 0 0
247. s Supports definition of prefix strings indicating an inter regional or international call The algorithm supports dialing plans where one specific digit is used as the prefix for inter regional calls and two specific digits are used as the prefix for international calls where the first one is the same as the inter regional call prefix It can also support dialing plans in which the inter regional prefix should be removed at the CPE before the dialed number is transferred to the system The dialing plan support algorithm incorporated into the units operates as follows e Ifthe Dialing Prefix Option is disabled the unit will insert the Automatic Prefix if defined before the dialed number Otherwise it will be forwarded as dialed e If the Dialing Prefix Option is set to Enabled and the first dialed digit differs from the Inter Regional Prefix the unit will insert the Automatic Prefix if defined before the dialed number Otherwise it will be forwarded as dialed e If the Dialing Prefix Option is set to Enable amp Block Inter Regional Prefix and the first dialed digit differs from the Inter Regional Prefix the unit will insert the Automatic Prefix if defined before the dialed number If the first dialed digit is the Inter Regional Prefix and the second one differs from the International Prefix indicating an inter regional call the first digit the Inter Regional Prefix will be removed before forwarding the dialed number thus blocking
248. s Override Filter Manual Revision 1 01 Appendix D Range Default Run Time Updated LAN to WLAN Reject Unknown Forward Forward Unknown Yes Bridging Mode Unknown 100 2000 seconds AU SU BD No SU BD1V 300 All other SUs 1800 Broadcast Relaying Disable Enable Unicast Relaying Disable Enable Performance Parameters Parameter Unit Range Default Run Time Updated RTS Threshold AU SU 20 1600 bytes AU 1600 SU 60 Number of AU SU 1 100 1 Retransmissions Number of AU SU 0 10 Retransmissions to Decrease Rate Number of Dwells AU SU 2 to Retransmit Minimum AU SU 7 255 31 Contention Window Carrier Sense Level AU SU AU A E SU A E in dBm AU A E SU A E SU R SU I AU I in RSSI 85dBm units SU R SU I AU I 50 RSSI Rate Multi Rate Support AU SU Disable Enable Multi Rate Decision AU SU 1 5 Window Size Number of Failures AU SU 1 to Multi Rate Decision in Multi Rate window Size 12 Decision Window DuellTime AUandGU 32 64 12 um E No No No No No No Yes No No No No BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Manual BreezeACCESS 4 0 System M anual Service Parameters Parameter Unit Range Default Run Time Updated User Filtering Disable Disable Option IP Only User Defined Addresses Only PPPoE Protocol Only Set User Filter SU IP address 8 entries 0 0 0 0 all 8 Yes Address entries Set User Filter Mask SU IP address 8 entries eh E be Oe e ebe Yes all
249. s for each of the access levels Manual Revision 1 01 Setting Basic Parameters ES Table 1 1 Default Passwords Read Only we NOTE Following three unsuccessful login attempts using incorrect passwords from either the monitor port or via Telnet the monitor program will be blocked for five minutes To access the monitor program during this time the unit must be reset via SNMP or by disconnecting reconnecting power BreezeACCESS AU BS Official Release Version 4 0 40 Release Date Thu Dec 20 20 21 36 2001 Main Menu 1 Info Screens 2 Unit Control 3 Basic Configuration 4 Site Survey 5 Advanced Configuration X EE gt gt gt Figure 1 1 Main Menu Administrator Access Rights SU and AU The appearance of the Main Menu varies in accordance with the set access level lt P For users with Read Only access rights only the Info Screens option is displayed Users with this access level cannot access the Unit Control Basic Configuration Site Survey and Advanced Configuration menus lt P For users with Installer access rights the first four menu items Info Screens Unit Control Basic Configuration and Site Survey are displayed Users with this access level cannot access the Advanced Configuration menu lt P For users with Administrator access rights the full Main Menu will be displayed These users can access all the menu items BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Manual ER
250. s the total number of frames intended to the SU that were dropped because they were retransmitted to the extent of the maximum allowed number of retransmissions without being acknowledged Applicable to AU Only Read only Counts the total number of frames that were received from the SU over the wireless link Applicable to AU Only Read only The value configured in the relevant SU for the CIR SU to AU parameter Applicable to AU Only Read only The value configured in the relevant SU for the MIR SU to AU parameter Applicable to AU Only Read only The value configured in the relevant SU for the CIR AU to SU parameter Applicable to AU Only Read only The value configured in the relevant SU for the MIR AU to SU parameter Applicable to AU Only Read only The value configured in the applicable SU for MaxDelay parameter Applicable to AU Only Read only The status of the relevant SU Applicable to AU Only Read only The SW version of the relevant SU Applicable to AU Only Read only The average received signal level based on frames received by the AU from the relevant SU in RSSI units Applicable to AU Only Read only The average received signal level based on frames received by the AU from the relevant SU in dBm units Integer 0 2200 Kbps Integer 32 2200 Kbps Integer 0 2200 Kbps Integer 32 2200 Kbps Integer associated 1 authenticated 2 notAuthenticated 3 DisplayStri
251. s to switch The previous Shadow version will now be called Current and vise versa The following message will be displayed UP DOWN Image FLASH will be operational UP or DOWN refers to the location in the flash memory The loading procedure is protected An attempt to load an invalid version e g using lt SnmpWriteCommunity gt fmr when trying to load a new version to units with a FLASH Type F will be rejected Manual Revision 1 01 Appendix A ES Loading an Upgrade to a Unit with FLASH Type S Use the following table to determine which source file name to use according to the unit s type AU AXS BS SU AXS SU SU with Voice AXS SUV AXS GU X refers to the software version number up to 5 decimal digits e g for software release 4 0 40 X 4040 Use the SNMP write community lt SnmpWriteCommunity gt fmr default write community is private to define the destination filename For example to load the upgrade file A3011S SU to an SU whose IP address is 206 25 63 55 use the following syntax gt tftp i 206 25 63 55 put A3011S SU private fmr NOTE If you are upgrading a Subscriber Unit which is not associated with an AU the unit will reset every five minute approximately and the following message will be displayed FTL file src wpscan c line 262 Too large number of scanning attempts The unit will reset and it will take more than a minute before you can re establish the connection to it You should either h
252. s used all AUs must be configured to Slave mode Available options are vis Idle No synchronization stand alone operation Master The AU that serves as a Master unit providing synchronization signals to the Slave units vis Slave An AU that operates as a Slave The default is Idle we Synchronization is not allowed by the radio regulations in certain countries In units using such standards the Hopping Sync option is not supported See Table 2 1 page 2 23 for information on synchronization support in the standards of various countries e When using a GPS system for synchronization all AUs in the chassis must be set to Slave ESSID Parameters The ESSID is a string used to identify a wireless network It prevents the unintentional merging of two co located wireless networks An SU can only associate with an AU that has an identical ESSID To facilitate easy additions of SUs to existing deployments where different ESSIDs are used in neighboring sectors a secondary global ESSID namely Operator ESSID is available in the AU lt gt ESSID The ESSID Extended Service Set ID of the unit Use different ESSIDs to segment the wireless access network and add security to your network Valid values A string of up to 31 printable ASCII characters case sensitive The default value is ESSID 1 lt gt Operator ESSID Parameters AU only The Operator ESSID is a secondary ESSID that can only be configured i
253. s with Molex 83421 9014 or similar 3 non latching relays rating 24 V DC or AC 1A max AL IN 9 pin Micro D Type jack Molex 83619 9003 mates with Molex 83421 9014 or similar AL OUT 9 pin Micro D Type jack Molex 83619 9003 mates with Molex 83421 9014 or similar BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Manual ES BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Description Modular Base Station Equipment Electrical 250 W for a fully equipped chassis 1 PS 6 AU 1 GU BS PS DC power input 48 V 5 2 A max DC power output 12 V 5 V BS PS AC AC power input 85 256 VAC 47 65 Hz DC power output 12 V 5 V 3 3 V not used BS AU 5 VDC 12 VDC from the power supply module s via the back plane AU RA AU RE 12 VDC from the BS AU over the IF cable AU BS BS AU Power consumption 25 W module plus AU REor AU RA outdoor unit BS GU 5 VDC 12 VDC from the power supply module s via the back plane GU RA 12 VDC from the BS GU over the connecting cable Mechanical Mar wwe mins Wo AU RE Metal box pole or wall mountable 30 6 x 12 x 4 7 cm 1 58 kg AU RA Metal box plus an integral antenna poll or wall 72 5 x 13x 6 2 cm 3 0 kg mountable 30 6 x 12x 4 7 cm 72 5 x 13 x 1 5 cm BS GU Indoor module of the GU A BS 12 9 x 3 5 x 23cm 0 22 kg GU RA A plastic tubular enclosure pole mountable 15 5 x 12 7 cm 0 363 kg Manual Revision 1 01 Specifications E SU I D Connectors Antenna SU I D 2 x SMA jacks 50 ohm ETH 10Base T Ethernet R
254. scriber Units that support voice use the telephone cord to connect the telephone port located on the rear panel of the unit to the user s telephone set BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Manual E BreezeACCESS 4 0 Installation Manual Revision 1 01 BreezeACCESS Il System Manual Book 3 Commissioning D di e S alvarion We re on your wavelength Using This Guide After completing the installation process as described in Book 2 Installation the basic parameters must be configured to ensure that the unit operates properly and to provide wireless connectivity Once the basic parameters have been configured properly additional parameters can be remotely configured via either the Ethernet port or the wireless link using Telnet or SNMP management For further information concerning any of the parameters described in this section consult Book 4 Operation and Administration Commissioning alvarion N Table of Contents We re on your wavelength Setting Basic Parameters cina 1 1 Accessing the Monitor Program 1 2 Accessing the Monitor Program using the RS 232 MON Connector assoaenneneennenennnnnnenrennnnrrrenenreenenenne 1 2 Accessing the Monitor Program using Telnet 1 4 Operating the Monitor Program 1 4 Configuring Basic Parameters in Access and Subscriber Units 1 6 INTO CHO NE TREE 1 6 Con
255. se This reset 1 includes the following counters AdbTxFrames Total AdbTxFrames1M AdbTxFrames2M AdbTxFrames3M AdbRTxFramesTotal AdbRTxFrames1M AdbRTxFrames2M AdbRTxFrames3M AdbTxDroppedFrames AdbRxFrames Total Applicable to AU Only Not accessible MAC Address Database table Applicable to AU Only Not accessible An entry in the MAC Address Database table Applicable to AU Only Read only The index of Integer an entry in the MAC Address Database table Applicable to AU Only Read only The MAC MAC Address Address of an SU entry in the MAC Address Database table Applicable to AU Only Read only The value Integer configured in the relevant SU for the Maximum 1 2 or 3 Mbps Data Rate parameter Applicable to AU Only Read only The current Integer transmit rate to the SU 1 2 or 3 Mbps Applicable to AU Only Read only Counts the Counter total number of frames excluding retransmissions that were transmitted to the SU over the wireless link Applicable to AU Only Read only Counts the Counter total number of frames excluding retransmissions that were transmitted to the SU over the wireless link at 1Mbps Applicable to AU Only Read only Counts the Counter total number of frames excluding retransmissions that were transmitted to the SU over the wireless link at 2Mbps Appendix B AdbTxFrames3M 710 3 3 8 5 2 1 8 AdbEntry 8 AdbRTxTotal 710 3 3 8 5 2 1 9 Adb
256. seconds the power supply module will shut itself offautomatically to prevent damage BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Manual ES BreezeACCESS 4 0 Installation O WARNING If two power supply modules are used in the same chassis for redundancy both power supplies must be of the same type Do not use a mix of AC and DC power supply modules in the same chassis The BS AU Y BS AU PARO O WLNK ALRMO O MASTER Figure 1 12 BS AU Front Panel Manual Revision 1 01 IF Based Equipment Table 1 9 BS AU LEDs Power supply On After successful power up 12 VDC indicating that 12 VDC 1s supplied to the outdoor unit Off Power off or DC DC converter failure 12 VDC not supplied to the outdoor unit Wireless link activity Blinking Receiving packets from the wireless media Off No reception of packets from the wireless media ALRM Alarm On Loss of hopping synchronization in Slave mode MASTER On The unit is configured as Master The BS AU provides the following interfaces 4 An Ethernet connector marked ETH for connecting the BS AU to the network A straight Ethernet cable should be used to connect the module to a hub router or switch lt gt An IF connector for connecting the BS AU to an outdoor unit AU RE or AU RA lt gt A MON connector for connecting an ASCII terminal with terminal emulation software for configuration and maintenance purposes The switch on the BS AU front panel co
257. sequences b Support of synchronization among Access Units AU A E BS units In some countries such synchronization is not permitted The following table provides a summary of the supported country standards Standard MHz per Hopping Set Support vc 240002463 ew a Novia BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Manual EN BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Description Data Communication Standard Compliance IEEE 802 3 CSMA CD VLAN support Based on IEEE 802 1Q Layer 2 Traffic Prioritization Based on IEEE 802 1p Layer 3 Traffic Prioritization ToS according to RFC791 MIR Maximum Information Rate Programmable for each user separately for uplink and and CIR Committed Information downlink Range 0 2200 Kbps 1 Kbps resolution Rate Voice Fax Subscriber Units with voice support Standard Compliance ITU T H 323 Ver 2 VoIP standard Compression G 711 A Law and p Law 64 Kbps transparent G 723 1 6 3 Kbps G 729 8 Kbps G 729 G 729 with Annex A and or Annex B Silence Compression G 723 1 Voice Activity Detection VAD G 729 Annex B Echo Cancellation ITU T G 168 and G 131 According to T 38 Protocol Telephony Subscriber Units with voice support Max 300m 26 AWG Manual Revision 1 01 Specifications NES IF Indoor Outdoor Communication SU A E AU A E NI AU A E BS IF Frequency 440 MHz Maximum IF Cable Attenuation 15 dB Configuration and Management Management Options a Via the MON port u
258. served for future use Alarm In 7 PS1 Over Temperature over temperature indication for BS PS Power Supply module 1 which is the module inserted in the left most slot of the chassis Alarm In 8 PS2 Over Temperature over temperature indication for BS PS Power Supply module 2 which is the module inserted in the right most slot of the chassis Alarm In 9 PS1 Power power fail indication for BS PS Power Supply module 1 which is the module inserted in the left most slot of the chassis Alarm In 10 PS2 Power power fail indication for BS PS Power Supply module 2 which is the module inserted in the right most slot of the chassis gt Dieu we In some installations only one Power Supply module either PS1 or PS2 may be used lt gt Alarms Out Names Definitions Control and Status Displays the following information for each of the three Alarms Out EN Name Name according to the name defined in the Alarms In Names Menu Definition NONE Alarm In or ANY according to the configuration in the Automatic Alarms Out Definition Menu Control OFF ON or AUTO according to the configuration in the Alarms Out Control Menu Status ON or OFF BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Manual 276 BreezeACCESS 4 0 Operations and Administration Manual Revision 1 01 Chapter 3 _rr_ di alvarion gt Configuration Download Upload About This Chapter This chapter describes the method of configuring a large number of
259. set 2 Integer s9600bps 1 s19200bps 2 s38400bps 3 s57600bps 4 s115200bps 5 Integer 1 999 minutes DisplayString SIZE 8 Up to 8 printable ASCII characters DisplayString SIZE 8 Up to 8 printable ASCII characters DisplayString SIZE 8 Up to 8 printable ASCII characters BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Manual KS BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Manual EventLogPolicy 710 3 3 10 10 1 EventLog 1 NumberOfEventsInLogFile 710 3 3 10 10 2 EventLog 2 EraseEventLog 710 3 3 10 10 3 EventLog 3 SaveCurrentConfigurationAs OperatorDefaults 710 3 3 10 12 UnitControl 12 ExitMonitorOrTelnet 710 3 3 10 13 UnitControl 13 Applicable to all products Determines which events will be stored in the Event Log Event from the configured level and higher are stored and can be displayed using the Monitor or by getting a the log file using TFTP Applicable to all products Read only The number of events in the Event Log file Applicable to all products Deletes all entries from the Event Log file Applicable to all products Saves the current configuration as Operator Defaults Applicable to all products Exit the monitor program Integer logAll 1 message 2 warning 3 error 4 fatal 5 logNone 6 Integer Integer cancel 0 erase 1 Integer cancel 0 saveAsDefaults 1 Integer cancelOperation 0 exit 1 IP Parameters MIB Parameter Description V
260. sing terminal emulation with the built in monitor program b Telnet using the monitor program c TFTP using the Configuration upload download utility d SNMP Remote Management Access From Wired LAN Wireless Link Management Access a Multilevel password Protection b Configuration of remote access direction from Ethernet only from wireless link only or from both sides c Configuration of IP addresses of authorized stations SNMP Agents SNMP ver 1 client MIB II Bridge MIB Private BreezeACCESS MIB Security a Association protocol ESSID b RC4 WEP option encryption of the authentication process c VLAN according to IEEE 802 1Q d IP level filtering for user addresses or protocols e Access direction and IP address filtering for management Allocation of IP Parameters Configurable or automatic DHCP client Software Upgrade Via TFIP GU RA GPS Radio LT frequency C A code SPS continuous tracking receiver BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Manual ES BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Description GU RA to BS GU Communication Physical interface RS 422 Cable Type EIA RS 4223x 2x 26AWG 1 x 2 x 24 AWG FTP Shielded 3 x 26 AWG twisted pairs for RS 422 communication and 1x 24 AWG pair for power supply Cable Impedance 100 15 ohm 1 MHZ RS 422 pairs DC Resistance RS 422 pairs 145 ohm km Power supply pair 94 ohm km Environmental Operating 40 C to 55 C GU RA 40 C to 85 C Temperature Indoor equipment 0 C to 4
261. speech 0 unrestricted 1 restricted 2 audio 3 unrestrictedTones 4 video 5 na 255 Integer disable 0 enable 1 enableProprietary 2 na 255 Integer disable 0 enable 1 enableBlocklnter RegionalPrfx 2 na 255 DisplayString SIZE 0 1 One phone keypad digit 0 9 A D or X X means no Inter Regional Prefix is defined DisplayString SIZE 0 1 One phone keypad digit 0 9 A D or X X means no International Prefix is defined Integer 0 fi 65535 Integer terminal 1 gateway 2 na 255 Integer disable 0 enable 1 na 255 Integer 0 5 na 255 Integer forward 1 reverse 2 forwardToReverse 3 reverseToForward 4 na 255 Appendix B ES AlternateGkOption 710 3 4 1 24 DialingParams 24 AlternateGkIPAddress 710 3 4 1 25 DialingParams 25 CallerlD 710 3 4 1 26 DialingParams 26 StopDialingIndicator 710 3 4 1 27 DialingParams 28 StopDialing TimeOut 710 3 4 1 28 DialingParams 28 Setting the Alternate Gatekeeper feature EnableManualDiscovery the Alternate Gatekeeper IP address is specified by the Alternate Gatekeeper IP Address parameter EnableAutomaticDiscovery the Alternate Gatekeeper IP address is received from the Primary GK To set the Alternate Gatekeeper IP address when Alternate Gatekeeper Option is set to enableManualDiscovery To defines whether the unit will support generation of Caller
262. t are VLAN unaware Thus the unit cannot transfer tagged frames The following table summarizes the functionality of the data port for an access link Manual Revision 1 01 M enus and Parameters 20 Table 2 7 VLAN Data Port Functionality Summary Access Link Data Port SU Accept from Ethernet Untagged frames Accept from Wireless Tagged frames matching VID D Tag Insert VID D PID D to wireless Legend VID D VLAN ID Data PID D VLAN Priority Data B Trunk Link Transfers only tagged frames because all devices connected to it are VLAN aware al VN Only tagged data frames received on Ethernet or wireless link ports are forwarded e XE It is not recommended to configure a unit as a Trunk Link with VLAN ID Management or VLAN ID Voice amp Management of 65535 as it will not forward any NO VLAN management frames to its other port It will be impossible to manage devices connected behind the unit that are also configured with NO VLAN If the VLAN Forwarding option is enabled a received data frame with a VLAN ID that is not a member of the unit s VLAN Forwarding List will be discarded C ble we If VLAN Forwarding is enabled make sure to include in the Forwarding List the VLAN ID Management or VLAN ID Voice amp Management of all units that should be managed via the wireless port of the unit If the VLAN Relaying option is enabled in an AU a WLAN relayed data frame with
263. t of IP addresses from which management of the unit Telnet TFTP SNMP ICMP is allowed excluding transmission of messages generated in the unit such as Traps or Ping Test frames This feature also supports the possibility of defining the direction from the wireless media or from the wired Ethernet or from both from which such access is allowed The Network Management Parameters menu includes the following options lt Access to Network Management Defines the port through which the unit can be managed The options are the following From Wlan Only From Ethernet Only From Both Ethernet amp Wlan The default selection is From Both Ethernet amp Wlan NOTE The Access to Network Management option is not available in the GU as this module does not have a wireless link interface 4 Network Management Filtering Enables disables management filtering If management filtering is enabled the unit can only be managed by stations whose IP addresses match one of the entries in the Set Network Management IP Addresses see next parameter that are connected to the unit via the defined port s Available options are Disable No IP address based filtering sis Activate Management IP Filter On Ethernet Port Applicable only if the Access to Network Management parameter is configured to either From Ethernet Only or From Both Ethernet amp Wireless Link The unit can be managed from the Ethernet port only by stations w
264. t the degradation of performance for each individual subscriber will be proportional to its CIR The MIR CIR algorithm uses buffers to control the flow of data To average the performance over time a special Burst Duration algorithm is employed to enable higher transmission rates after a period of inactivity If no data was received from the Ethernet port during the last N seconds the unit is allowed to transmit N times its CIR value without any delay For example after an inactivity time of 0 5 second a unit with CIR 64 Kbps can transmit up to 64 Kbits x 0 5 32 Kbits without any delay MIR CIR Option Enables or disables the CIR MIR support feature In cells where the AU and all SUs use SW version 4 0 and higher the MIR CIR Option in the AU controls the operation of the whole cell The MIR CIR Option in the SU is thus meaningless as the setting of the option in the AU will override possible conflicting setting in any of the served SUs The option is available in the SUs only for compatibility with previous versions to support operation in cells where the AU uses SW version 3 X and lower Default selection is Disable c NY The value of the MIR CIR option parameter must be the same for all Subscriber Units served by the same AU i e Enable for all SUs or Disable for al SUs Otherwise throughput to from all SUs in the cell may be reduced significantly eis MIR AU to SU SU only Sets the Maximum Information Rate of t
265. t your BreezeACCESS and the equipment connected to them are operating properly 4 LED Indicators page 4 4 lists the LEDs found on BreezeACCESS units and their meanings ETE BreezeACCESS 4 0 Commissioning Verifying Connectivity Verifying the Ethernet Connection Once you have connected the unit to an Ethernet outlet verify that the Ethernet Integrity indicator the yellow LED embedded in the Ethernet connector is on indicating that the unit is connected to an Ethernet segment The Ethernet Activity indicator the green embedded LED should blink whenever the unit receives or transmits traffic on the Ethernet port Verifying Data Connectivity Subscriber Unit From a user s PC or from a portable PC connected to the unit ping the Access Unit or try to connect to the Internet Verifying Telephone Connectivity Subscriber Units with Voice support To verify correct operation of the telephone a test telephone with the default telephony parameters and a known IP address should be connected to the system the location of the test telephone is determined by the system administrator Perform the following steps to verify telephone connectivity l UseIP dialing to call the test telephone dial followed by the 12 digit IP address of the test telephone Verify connectivity During the conversation verify that the other party has your IP address 2 After terminating the call the other party should use the test telephone to cal
266. ta and RTP frames submitted to the bridge for transmission to the wireless media The count does not include control frames wireless management frames and retransmissions In addition to the total count there are also separate counts for frames according to the priority queue to which they were routed Low Mid or High If the ACSE Option is enabled then the Low Mid and High counts are for data frames only and there is an additional counter for voice RTP frames The voice frames count includes fax frames This is true also for Subscriber Units that do not support voice in cells where the ACSE Option in the AU is enabled In this case the Voice count should be O lt gt Frames dropped too many retries Displays the number of dropped frames The frames that were retransmitted to the extent of the maximum allowed number of retransmissions without being acknowledged If the ACSE Option is enabled then in addition to the total count there are also separate counters for total number of data frames and voice RTP frames The voice frames count includes fax frames This is true also for Subscriber Units that do not support voice in cells BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Manual E BreezeACCESS 4 0 Operations and Administration where the ACSE Option in the AU is enabled In this case the Voice count should be O lt P Total retransmitted frames Displays the total number of retransmissions of frames counts all unsuccessful transmissions
267. tatus The Show Unit Status menu displays the current values of the following parameters lt P Unit Type Identifies the unit s function as one of the following Access Unit Subscriber Unit or GPS and Alarms Module Unit MAC Address Displays the unit s unique IEEE MAC address Unit Hardware Version Displays the hardware version of the unit the indoor module of IF based products Flash Type Displays the type and size of the Flash memory 9 95 Flash Versions Current Version Displays the software version that is currently active Shadow Version Displays the software version currently defined as the shadow backup version Version After Reset Displays the software version that will be used after the next reset BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Manual ES BreezeACCESS 4 0 Operations and Administration lt gt Console Speed Displays the speed defined in the unit for the connected terminal used for running the terminal emulation program 4 Number of Associations Since Last Reset In SUs displays the total number of associations with any AU since the last reset including duplicate associations with the same AU In AUs displays the number of SUs that have associated with the AU since the last reset including duplicate associations with the same SU The following parameters appear for Subscriber Units only lt gt Voice Hardware Version SU with voice support only Displays the hardware v
268. tatus of the AU It is defined as full if the number of SUs associated with the AU has reached the maximum allowed according to the value of the Maximum Number of Associations parameter see page 2 31 An AU whose associations load status is full cannot be selected as the Best AU even if its computed mark is the highest ESSID The ESSID of the AU In addition to the neighboring AU data table the following information is displayed Best AU Support Preferred AU MAC Address Number of Scanning Attempts Associated AU MAC Address the MAC address of the selected AU Run Time ESSID the ESSID of the selected AU Power Control Parameters 4 Transmit Power Control IF based units only SU A E AU BS and AU NI Controls the relative gain of the Tx power circuits A value of 15 represents the highest transmit power level which is the maximum level supported by the specific unit A lower value represents a lower transmit power level The effect of this parameter on the transmitted power is not linear since it is affected by the length attenuation of the IF cable The allowed range is from O to 15 BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Manual EZI BreezeACCESS 4 0 Operations and Administration The default value is 15 maximum power The following table displays the transmitted power output as a function of the value of the Transmit Power Control parameter and the attenuation of the IF cable Table 2 3 Transmit Power Output Cabl
269. te with provided they both use the same ESSID An SU that can communicate with more than one AU using the same ESSID becomes associated with the first AU it finds not necessarily the best choice in terms of quality of communication or other factors such as number of SUs serviced by each AU The same limitation also exists if only one AU in the neighborhood has an ESSID identical to the one used by the SU since it is not always necessarily the best choice The topology of a fixed access network is constantly changing Changes in base station deployment and subscriber density can accumulate to create substantial changes in SU performance The quest for load sharing together with the desire to create best throughput conditions for the SU created the need for the Best AU feature to enable a SU to connect to the best AU in its neighborhood When the Best AU feature is used each of the AUs are given a quality mark based on the level at which it is received by the SU The SU scans for a configured number of cycles gathering information from all the AUs it can communicate with At the end of the scanning period the SU reachs a Best AU decision according to the information gathered The AU with the highest quality mark is selected as the Best AU and the SU will immediately try to associate with it The quality mark given to each AU depends on the level at which it is received by the SU as follows BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Manual ES BreezeA
270. teger 710 3 3 1 8 for activating the graceful degradation 0 70 96 ServiceParameters 8 algorithm RunTimeMirCirOption Applicable to SU only Indicates the actual Integer 710 3 3 1 9 status of the MIR CIR option which may be disable 0 ServiceParameters 9 different from the setting of this parameter in the enable 1 SU since it is controlled by the AU na 255 Manual Revision 1 01 Appendix B EZI disable 0 enable 1 na 255 MirOnlyOption 710 3 3 1 10 ServiceParameters 10 Applicable only to AU when CIR MIR option is enabled When enabled the MIR CIR algorithm fo determining the actual information rate is overridden and operates only with the configured MIR values The graceful degradation algorithm is disabled User Filtering Parameters MIB Parameter Description Values Range Location in Parenthesis UserFilterParams 710 9 3 2 brzAccessMib 2 UserFilterOption 710 3 3 2 1 UserFilterParams 1 pFilterTable 710 3 3 2 2 UserFilterParams 2 pFilterEntry 710 3 3 2 2 1 IpFilterTable 1 IpID 710 3 3 2 2 1 1 IpFilterEntry 1 MaskID 710 3 3 2 2 1 2 IpFilterEntry 2 pFilterRange 710 3 3 2 2 1 3 IpFilterEntry 3 pFilterldx 710 3 3 2 2 1 4 IpFilterEntry 4 DeleteOneUserFilter 710 3 3 2 3 UserFilterParams 3 DeleteAllUserFilters 710 3 3 2 4 UserFilterParams 4 Applicable to SU only User Filtering parameters Applicable to SU on
271. ter Book 4 2 48 a Parallela Book 4 2 66 EB eee Book 4 2 66 anere EIER ee nen eter lari pi Book 2 2 5 Book 2 3 5 Locating Units AGR abbi Book 2 1 5 AUREA IN NEIN Book 2 1 5 NES CERERE e AREA EU CU CRM E UP OO Book 2 1 5 Indoor Equipment rss Book 2 1 6 US ea Book 2 1 5 ei D EE Book 2 1 5 Los Out mer Parametros Book 4 2 8 M NIAC Address Database nia Book 4 2 17 ET EE Book 4 2 2 Mana ce ment SY EE Book 1 2 13 PC IN Gr Book 1 2 13 Breeze VLAN AGE abili alia Book 1 2 13 Max Flash Detect Timeout Parameter Book 4 2 67 Maximum ACSE Voice Sessions Parameter Book 4 2 33 Maximum Burst Duration Parameter eee Book 4 2 55 Maximum Data Rate CTE SIS ilaria Book 3 2 2 Maximum Data Rate Parameter iii rien nie rien Book 4 2 29 Maximum Delay Parameter iraniani Book 4 2 55 Maximum Multicast Rate Parameter rien Book 4 2 50 Maximum Number of Associations Parameter Book 4 2 31 Maximum Voice Sessions Parameter eese Book 4 2 32 Menus Advanced REESEN cossiensa a Book 4 2 21 Air Interface Parameters iii cieco rie cie riore rie rie rie nienione Book 4 2 22 AN austera Book 4 2 73 Alarms In Names e I Book 4 2 73 Alarms Out Controllata Book 4 2 74 Adarms Out Names clelia Book 4 2 74 Automatic Alarms Out Definition e
272. that allows decreasing the connection set up time if supported by the Gateway The original procedure prior to H 323 Version II required four round trips of messages between endpoints before the first media stream is exchanged between peers Fast Connect or Fast Start is a new procedure added to H 323 version II It reduces the number of round trips to one by combining the call connect procedures into a single H 225 transaction The default selection is Enable Information Transfer Capability To define the value of the information transfer capability element in the Q 931 SETUP message Manual Revision 1 01 M enus and Parameters ESI Available selections Speech used by H 323 speech terminals Unrestricted used by H 323 AudioVisual terminals for unrestricted digital information eje Restricted used H 323 AudioVisual terminals for restricted digital information x 3 1 kHz audio used by H 323 speech terminals Unrestricted with tones used by H 323 AudioVisual terminals for transmission of unrestricted digital information with tones announcement Video not used by H 323 terminals The default is Speech we This information element is encoded according to Figure 4 11 Q 931 and Table 4 6 Q 931 The SU support only H323 Speech traffic and a change of the default value is not recommended A change will be needed only as result of special PSTN switch requirements lt gt Dialing Prefix Parameter
273. the SUs that are currently conducting a voice call This database is used to determine the number of active voice calls that are managed by the AU at any given moment allowing control of the number of simultaneous voice calls see Maximum Voice Sessions parameters In addition the AU allocates prioritized channels to the BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Manual EE BreezeACCESS 4 0 Operations and Administration voice RTP packets of SUs included in the Call Information database The SU is deleted from the Call Information database once it sends a message that the call was terminated Throughout the voice call the SU periodically transmits keep alive re association messages approximatly every ten minutes indicating that the call is still on If such messages are not received for a period defined by the Call Aging Time parameter the following will take place a The AU deletes the SU listing from the Call Information database assuming that the call was improperly terminated e g reset or loss of synchronization b For non ACSE voice calls a prioritized channel is no longer allocated to the voice packets although voice packets will still get a relatively high priority c ACSE voice calls will be terminated no slot will be allocated for the call The allowed range for the Call Aging Time parameter is 1 no aging or 2 50 000 seconds It is recommended to configure a call aging time of at least 1200 20 minutes The default value
274. the Subscriber Units that are currently conducting a voice call Call Info For each of these databases the displayed information includes ale X The current number of entries The number of entries in the Bridging Info includes the Et Ethernet and the Vp Virtual ports entries The number of entries in the Association Info includes the associated units Sd There is no aging algorithm for associated SUs An SU will be removed from the associations database only upon occurrence of any of the following 1 The AU received from another AU a SNAP frame with the SU MAC address indicating that the SU has become associated with the other AU or 2 The AU has decided that the SU aged out following its failure to acknowledge a certain number of consecutive frames transmitted to it 1 e D al dis The aging time specified for entries in these tables the defaults are 300 seconds for the Bridge Aging Time No Aging for the Association Aging Time and 1800 seconds for the Call Info table Le aT The maximum allowed number of entries for these tables 1019 for the Bridging Info and as specified by the Maximum Number of Associations parameter for the Association Info and the Call Info The default value of the Maximum Number of Associations is 512 hy lt gt Display Association Info Displays details of the associated SUs Each entry in the list includes the following information sie The MAC address of the associated S
275. the servers stations using these protocols must tag the frames they send to the unit with the value of the VLAN ID Voice amp Management parameter Valid values 1 to 4094 or 65535 No VLAN Default value 65535 If VLAN ID Voice amp Management is other than 65535 e Only tagged management frames with matching VLAN ID received on either the Ethernet or wireless link ports are forwarded to the unit e AVLAN Management Tag is inserted in all management frames generated by the unit before transmission on either the Ethernet or wireless link port The tag includes the values of the VLAN ID Voice amp Management and the VLAN Priority Management parameters e AVLAN Voice Tag is inserted in all voice frames RTP packets generated by the unit before transmission to the Wireless or Ethernet port The tag includes the values of the VLAN ID Voice amp Management and the VLAN Priority Voice parameters If VLAN ID Voice amp Management is 65535 No VLAN e Only untagged management frames received on either Ethernet or wireless link ports are forwarded to the unit e Management frames generated by the unit will not be tagged e Ifthe Voice Priority Tag Option is enabled a VLAN Priority Tag is inserted in all voice frames RTP packets generated by the unit before transmission to the Wireless or Ethernet port The tag includes a VID value of zero and the VLAN Priority Voice parameter The following table summarizes the fu
276. there are no transmissions by other units until it will attempt to transmit The contention window is a random number whose maximum value is determined by the value of the Minimum Contention Window parameter and the number of previous trials to transmit the frame The higher the number of SUs served by the same AU the higher the Minimum Contention Window for each SU should be The Valid values are from 7 to 255 The default value is 31 Carrier Sense Level This is the threshold level that determines the existence of transmission from another unit on the wireless media As long as the level is above this threshold the unit will assume that another unit is transmitting and will refrain from trying to transmit in order to prevent collisions The default values are IF based products SU A E AU A E 8bdBm SU R 50 RSSI units SU I AU I 50 RSSI units Maximum Multicast Rate AU only Determines the maximum rate of multicast and broadcast transmissions Multicast and broadcast transmissions are not acknowledged therefore there is a chance that such transmissions will not be properly received without the possibility of using the acknowledgement mechanism Manual Revision 1 01 M enus and Parameters EST for retransmission Therefore it is recommended to use a lower rate for transmission of broadcast multicast and control frames to increase the probability that they will be received without errors The available selections a
277. thernet broadcast filtering From Ethernet Only Filter broadcast messages received from the Ethernet port From WLAN Only Filter broadcast messages received from the wireless link port Both From Ethernet amp WLAN Filter broadcast messages received from both the Ethernet port and the wireless link port The default selection is Disable lt gt DHCP Broadcast Override Filter Enables broadcasting of DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol messages This is independent of the filtering option selected in Filter Options above meaning that even if according to the selected filtering option broadcast messages should be filtered DHCP broadcasts will be transmitted if the Enable DHCP Broadcast option is selected Available selections are vis Disable DHCP Broadcast messages will be filtered or transmitted according to the general filtering criteria set by the selected value of the Filter Options parameter Enable DHCP Broadcast messages will be transmitted regardless of the selected value of the Filter Options parameter The default selection is Disable lt gt PPPoE Broadcast Override Filter Enables broadcasting of PPPoE Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet messages This is independent of the filtering option selected in Filter Options above meaning that even if according to the selected filtering option broadcast messages should be filtered PPPoE broadcasts are transmitted if the Enable PPPoE Broadcast
278. tions from BreezeACCESS power supply module Alarm In 7 through Alarm In 10 that turn on to indicate a power failure or over temperature problem in any of the two optional power supplies PS1 alarms refer to a power supply module inserted in the left most slot of the chassis PS2 alarms refer to a power supply module inserted in the right most slot of the chassis Alarm In 5 GPS Antenna Status is generated internally in the GU module and it is turned on to indicate that proper PPS pulse per second timing signals are received from the GPS antenna NOTES Over Temperature alarm indication is only supported by the AC power supply module In installations with a single power supply module the GU module doesn t function and therefore will not provide an alarm indication upon total failure of the power supply or upon failure of the 5 V module The GU module can also control 3 Alarm Out relay where each relay has a common contact a normally open NO contact and a normally closed NC contact The Alarm Parameters menu allows access to the following sub menus Alarms In Names Alarms Out Names Automatic Alarms Out Definition e e e Alarms Out Control lt gt Show Alarm Parameters Alarms In Names The Alarms In Names menu allows names for each of the four external alarm indications that can be connected to the AL IN connector to be defined These names can reflect the specific environment in which the module is bei
279. tions are available Applicable to AU SU and GU A Management IP Filter Table of up to 3 IP addresses of devices that are authorized to access the unit for management purposes Not accessible Applicable to AU SU and GU A Management IP Filter Table entry Not accessible Applicable to AU SU and GU An IP address in the Management IP Filter Table Applicable to AU SU and GU Read only A table index for an entry in the Management IP Filter Table Applicable to AU SU and GU Deletes a single selected entry from the Management IP Filter Table Applicable to AU SU and GU Deletes all entries from the Management IP Filter Table Applicable to AU SU and GU Enables or disables sending of SNMP traps Applicable to AU SU and GU A Management Trap Table of up to 3 IP addresses of devicess to send traps to Not accessible Applicable to AU SU and GU A Management Trap Table entry Not accessible Applicable to AU SU and GU The trap community associated with the applicable entry in the Management Trap Table Applicable to AU SU and GU An IP address in the Management Trap Table entry Values Range Integer wlanOnly 0 ethOnly 1 bothWlanEth 2 na 255 Integer disable 0 activateOnEthPort 1 activateOnWlanPort 2 activateOnBothWlanAndEth 3 na 255 IP address Integer 1 3 Integer off 0 firstEntry 1 secondEntry 2 thirdEntry 3 na 255 Integer off 0 on 1
280. total number of frames that were received from the wireless media The count includes data control and wireless management frames including beacons received from the AU The count does not include frames that were discarded internally bad frames and duplicate frames lt gt Total received data frames Displays the total number of data frames received from the wireless media including duplicate frames see Duplicate frames discarded below In addition to the total count there are also separate counts for data frames according to the receive priority queue to which they were routed Low or High lt gt Bad fragments received Displays the number of frames received from the wireless media with errors CRC errors Manual Revision 1 01 M enus and Parameters E lt P Duplicate frames discarded Displays the number of frames discarded due to receiving multiple copies If an acknowledge message was not received by the originating unit the same data frame can be properly received twice or more Although duplicate frames are included in all counters that count data frames only the first copy is forwarded to the Ethernet port lt P Internally discarded MIR CIR Displays the number of data frames received from the Ethernet port that were discarded by the MIR CIR mechanism to avoid exceeding the maximum allowed information rate Voice Statistics SU with Voice Support Only The voice statistics counters display information
281. ts These reflectors may be buildings or moving objects such as airplanes and motor vehicles If this is the case the radio signal does not travel in a straight line but is reflected or deflected off of the object creating multiple propagation paths Manual Revision 1 01 Indoor SU R Units EJ In applications where no multipath propagation is expected a single antenna is sufficient to ensure good performance levels However in cases where multipath propagation exists Alvarion recommends that two antennas be used This takes advantage of space diversity capabilities By using two antennas per unit the system can select the best antenna on a per packet basis every several milliseconds When installing a single antenna configure the Transmit Antenna option to either Antenna 1 or Antenna 2 according to the antenna being used When using two antennas configure the Transmit Antenna option to Both Antennas Antenna Polarization Antenna polarization must be the same at either end of the link In most applications the preferred orientation is vertical polarization Above ground propagation of the signal is better when the antenna is polarized vertically For omni antennas make sure that the antennas are extended upward vertically in relation to the floor to achieve vertical polarization To verify polarization of detached antennas refer to the assembly instructions supplied with the antenna set Antenna Seal When using outdoor a
282. ubscriber Unit sie The Maximum Data Rate of the SU sis The average level of RF signals received from the Subscriber Unit The wireless status of the SU There are three options 3 Associated Manual Revision 1 01 M enus and Parameters E Authenticated Not Authenticated a temporary status sie The SW version of the SU Message SU gt AU Probe Response only if correct ESSID in AU gt SU Probe Request SU Synchronized SU Authenticated SU gt AU Not Authenticated AU gt SU Not Authenticated SU gt AU Not Authenticated AU gt SU Authenticated lt P Display CIR MIR Info Displays details of the CIR MIR parameters of the associated SUs Each entry in the list includes the following information sie The MAC address of the associated Subscriber Unit ef The SW version of the SU eje MIR CIR info for the SU NZ CIR Tx SU to AU MIR Tx SU to AU CIR Rx AU to SU MIR Rx AU to SU Max Delay Per rate Counters AU and SU Resets or displays the per rate counters The per rate counters display the number of frames excluding retransmissions transmitted since the last reset at each of the rates 1 Mbps 2 Mbps 3 Mbps and the total number of frames that were retransmitted at each of the rates In the BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Manual ES BreezeACCESS 4 0 O perations and Administration AU the information is provided for each of the associated SUs identified by their MAC addr
283. uffer from poor performance due to accumulation in the buffers of data from other applications e g FTP The Maximum Delay parameter limits the number of available buffers Data that is delayed more than the permitted maximum delay will be discarded If the SU should support applications that are very sensitive to delay the value of the Maximum Delay should be decreased Valid values 300 10000 milliseconds Default value 5000 milliseconds Graceful Degradation Limit AU only Sets the limit on using the graceful degradation algorithm In cases of over demand the performance of all SUs will be degraded proportionally to their CIR IR 100 k x CIR The graceful degradation algorithm will be used as long as k lt K where K is the Graceful Degradation Limit Beyond this point the simple brute force algorithm will be used The higher is the expected over demand in a cell the higher should be the value of the Graceful Degradation Limit Higher demand can be expected in cases of significant over subscription and or in deployments where a high number of subscribers are in locations that do not enable proper communication with the AU at the highest data rate Valid values O 70 96 Default value 70 96 Do not use the graceful degradation algorithm sis Mir Only option AU only Enables or disables the option of forcing the MIR CIR algorithm to use MIR values only The MIR CIR algorithm determines the actual i
284. ull LAN Data and Voice Units SU X 1D1V 2 4 YP The unit supports one Ethernet device and has an interface to a standard analog telephone set POTS SU X 8D1V 2 4 YP The unit supports up to eight Ethernet devices eight MAC addresses and has an interface to a standard analog telephone set POTS BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Manual ES BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Description SU X BD1V 2 4 YP The unit provides bridge functionality and can support a full LAN It also has an interface for a standard analog telephone POTS X A The outdoor radio unit includes an integral high gain flat antenna X E The outdoor radio unit has a connector for an external antenna Y H HP model The maximum output power at the antenna port is 26 dBm Y G GP model The maximum output power at the antenna port is 15 dBm Y M MP model The maximum output power at the antenna port is 7 dBm Y L LP model The maximum output power at the antenna port is 4 dBm SU I I D Miniature Indoor Units The SU I I D line includes miniature units that are designed for indoor desktop or wall mount installations Figure 2 2 BreezeACCESS SU I Unit lt gt The SU I products include two integral 2dBi omni antennas lt P The SU I D products have two RF connectors for connecting to one or two detached antennas The following types of units are available Data only Units SU X 1D 2 4 The unit supports one Ethernet device SU X 8D 2 4 The unit supports up
285. units with a VLAN ID Management or VLAN ID Management amp Voice value other than 655395 In the unit all management frames are routed to the High queue This parameter only impacts the way that other VLAN aware devices will handle the packet t dis Valid values are 0 7 The default value is 4 for SU units with voice support and O for all other units 2 es VLAN Priority Voice SU with voice support only Applicable for all link types Displays and sets the value of the VLAN Priority field for voice frames RTP packets In the unit all voice frames RTP packets are routed to the High queue This parameter only impacts the way that other VLAN aware devices will handle the packet In units with VLAN ID Voice amp Management of 65535 No VLAN if the Voice Priority Tag Option enabled then a Priority Tag that includes the value of the VLAN Priority Voice parameter and a zero value in the VID field will be inserted into all voice frames RTP packets generated by the unit before transmission to the Wireless or Ethernet port al AN Valid values are 0 7 The default value is 6 NI dis VLAN Priority Threshold AU and SU Applicable for trunk and hybrid links only Displays and defines the value of the VLAN Priority Threshold This parameter impacts the way that the unit will handle tagged packets that are received from the Ethernet port BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Manual EI BreezeACCESS 4 0 Operati
286. using a single GU it should localFromOtherGU 2 always be configured to 1 na 255 gPSAntennaOrlnternal When using several daisy chained units and a GPS Antenna is connected to the first unit than all units should be configured to 1 gPSAntennaOrlnternal When using several daisy chained units without a GPS antenna than the first unit that generates the self synchronization signals for all other units should be configured to 1 gPS AntennaOrlInternal All other units that receive the synchronization signals from the first unit should be configured to 2 localFromOtherGU BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Manual E BreezeACCESS 4 0 System M anual MIB Parameter Description Values Range Location in Parenthesis SiteSurvey 710 3 3 8 brzAccessMib 8 PerHopStatistics Table Applicable to SU and AU Statistics 710 3 3 8 1 accumulated since last reset and average RSSI SiteSurvey 1 per frequency for all hopping frequencies in the sequence Not Accessible hopSegEntry Applicable to SU and AU A Per Hop Statistics 710 3 3 8 1 1 Table entry Not accessible perHopStatistics Table 1 wPperHopsStatistics Table Applicable to SU and AU Read only The Integer 710 3 3 8 1 1 1 channel number according to the hopping hopSeqEntry 1 sequence hop TracerRx Applicable to SU and AU Read only The Integer 710 3 3 8 1 1 2 accumulated number of frames received since hopSegEntry 2 last reset at the applicable frequency hop TracerTx
287. will be a successful window thus slowing down the decision to degrade to a lower rate and accelerating the decision to upgrade to a higher rate Valid value 1 to Multi Rate Decision Window Size Default value 8 lt gt Dwell Time AU only The time spent on a radio channel before hopping to the next channel according to the operational hopping sequence The allowed selections are 32 64 and 128 Kilo microseconds The default value is 128 Kilo microseconds When the ACSE Option is enabled this parameter is not applicable and the dwell time is the ACSE Dwell Time set to a fixed value of 60 milliseconds Service Parameters AU and SU The Service Parameters menu includes the following parameters lt gt User Filtering Parameters Only available in SUs Defines IP addresses of user s devices that are authorized to access the wireless media serving for security and or control purposes It can also be used to enable transmission reception of specific protocol frames only These filtering functions do not affect management frames that are sent to or generated by the unit or Choose this option to define the following parameters User Filtering Option Disables or enables the User Filtering feature The available options are Disable No filtering IP Only only IP Protocol packets pass User Defined Addresses Only only messages from IP addresses included in the User Filter Addresses list pass PPPoE Pr
288. with local regulations related to maximum allowable transmitted power e g when using high gain antennas Ifa lower power level is sufficient for good performance reducing the transmitted power may be beneficial through minimizing interference with the operation of other units Other Air Interface Parameters lt Maximum Data Rate Displays the current maximum data rate and allows entry of a new value for the maximum data rate BreezeACCESS units operate at data rates of 3 Mbps 2 Mbps 1 Mbps Under certain conditions compatibility reasons or range speed trade off you may decide to limit the use of higher rates If the quality of the link is not good enough it is recommended to decrease the value of this parameter the higher the data rate the higher the error rate Otherwise there is a high probability that the unit will have to retransmit many frames several times before temporarily reducing the data rate see Number of Retransmissions to Decrease Rate on page 2 50 A high number of retransmissions reduces the overall throughput for the selected SU as well as for all the other SUs served by the same AU It is recommended to also configure the Maximum Data Rate parameter when the Multi Rate mechanism is enabled to avoid unnecessary trials to transmit at higher rates when the probability of successful transmissions at these rates is low The link quality can be estimated based on the RSSI measurement in the SU indicatin
289. y have a finite lifetime An endpoint may request a timeToLive in the RRQ message to the Gatekeeper The Gatekeeper may respond with an RCF containing the same timeToLive or a shorter timeToLive After this time the registration shall be expired The timeToLive is expressed in seconds Prior to the expiration time the endpoint may send an RRQ message having the keepAlive bit set The keep alive RRQ resets the time to live timer in the Gatekeeper allowing the registration to be extended After the expiration time the endpoint must re register with a Gatekeeper using a full RRQ message Valid values 0 the keep alive mechanism is not activated 1 65535 seconds Default value 0 lt gt DTMF Relay Selects the method of handling DTMF signals DTMF input may be transferred through a network in band by RTP payloads or using DTMF relay The use of DTMF relay is preferred as it overcomes the problems of RTP packet loss and jitter When DTMF relay is used DTMF digits are transferred using H 245 protocol messages standard or Q 931 protocol message proprietary The DTMF relay can handle all phone pad digits 0 9 A D and Hook Flash Manual Revision 1 01 M enus and Parameters ECI The following options are available sis Disable DTMF tones are transferred in band through the voice codec using the RTP protocol Enable DTMF signals are relayed via H 245 sessions If Fast Start is enabled a H 245 session will
290. z 47 frq2_6GhzHoppingSequence28MHz 48 frq2_6GhzHoppingSequence36MHz 49 frq2_6GhzHoppingSequence42MHz 50 frqSingleChannel2_6Ghz 51 BreezeACCESS 3 3a 3 6b read only frqFlexibleHopping 37 BreezeACCESS 3 5a frq3_ 5aGHzHoppingSequence10MHz frq3_ 5aGHzHoppingSequence12MHz frq3_ 5aGHzHoppingSequence14MHz frq3_ 5aGHzHoppingSequence24MHz frq3_ 5aGHzHoppingSequence28MHz frq3_ 5aGHzHoppingSequence36MHz frq3_ 5aGHzHoppingSequence42MHz frqFlexibleHopping 37 frqSingleChannel3_5GHz 40 frq3_ 5aGHzHoppingSequence24MhzProprie tary 69 BreezeACCESS 3 5a1 To 5a1GHzHoppingSequence1 0MHz frqa3 5a1GHzHoppingSequence12MHz frqa3 5a1GHzHoppingSequence14MHz frq3_5a1GHzHoppingSequence24MHz frq3_5a1GHzHoppingSequence28MHz frq3_5a1GHzHoppingSequence36MHz frq3_5a1GHzHoppingSequence42MHz frq3_5a1GHzHoppingSequence50MHz frqFlexibleHopping 37 frqSingleChannel3_5a1GHz 39 frq3_5a1GHzHoppingSequence24MhzPropri etary 70 BreezeACCESS 3 5b 3 5ab frq3_ 5aGHzHoppingSequence 10MHz frq3_ 5aGHzHoppingSequence 12MHz frq3_ 5aGHzHoppingSequence14MHz frq3_ 5aGHzHoppingSequence24MHz frq3_ 5aGHzHoppingSequence28MHz frq3_ 5aGHzHoppingSequence36MHz frq3_ 5aGHzHoppingSequence42MHz frq3_ 5bGHZHoppingSequence50MHz frqFlexibleHopping 37 frqSingleChannel3_5GHz 40 fra3_5aGHzHoppingSequence24MhzProprie tary 69 BreezeACCESS 3 8 frqa 8GHzBandl 0 frqa 8GHzSelectable 1 frq3_ 8GHzApprovalSpectrumMask 2 frqFlexibleHopping 37 frqSin
291. zecomSU H 8D1V breezecomBreezeACCESS ACCESS 17 SU R 8D1V 710 10 2 1 17 breezecomSU BD breezecomBreezeACCESS ACCESS 9 SU I BD 710 10 2 1 9 Manual Revision 1 01 Appendix B EI breezecomSU R 1D1V breezecomBreezeACCESS ACCESS 18 SU R BD1V 710 10 2 1 18 breezecomAU NI breezecomBreezeACCESS ACCESS 19 AU NI 710 10 2 1 19 breezecomAU BS breezecomBreezeACCESS ACCESS 20 AU BS 710 10 2 1 20 breezecomSU BS breezecomBreezeACCESS ACCESS 22 SU BS 710 10 2 1 22 breezecomAU BS WA breezecomBreezeACCESS ACCESS 23 AU BS WA 710 10 2 1 23 breezecomGU BS breezecomBreezeACCESS GENERAL 1 GU BS 710 10 2 2 1 breezecomAU breezecomBreezeACCESS ACCESS 21 AU I 710 10 2 1 21 BreezeACCESS 4 0 System Manual E BreezeACCESS 4 0 System M anual brzAccessMIB Path breezecom OBJECT IDENTIFIER 1 3 6 1 4 1 710 iso 1 org 3 dod 6 internet 1 private 4 enterprises 1 breezecom 710 breezecomPrvRev OBJECT IDENTIFIER 1 3 6 1 4 1 710 3 breezecom 3 brzAccessMib OBJECT IDENTIFIER 1 3 6 1 4 1 710 3 3 breezecomPrvRev 3 Note is used instead of the brzacc prefix Service Parameters MIB Parameter Description Values Range Location in Parenthesis ServiceParameters MIR CIR Parameters 710 3 3 1 brzAccessMib 1 MirCirOption Applicable to SU and AU only The setting in the Integer 710 3 3 1 1 AU enables disables the MIR CIR support disable 0 ServiceParameters 1 feature for all SUs served by the AU regardl

BreezeACCESS II System Manual v4.0

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents